TM 9-2320-273-10

*TM 9-2320-273-10
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
TRUCK, TRACTOR, LINE HAUL, 6X4
M915 (NSN 2320-01-028-4395) (EIC B4A)
M915P1 (NSN 2320-01-525-7451) (EIC BAY)
TRUCK, TRACTOR, LINE HAUL, 6X4
M915A1 (NSN 2320-01-125-2640) (EIC B4B)
M915A1P1 (NSN 2320-01-525-7444) (EIC BAZ)
LIGHT EQUIPMENT TRANSPORTER (LET), 6X6, W/WINCH
M916 (NSN 2320-01-028-4396) (EIC B4C)
M916P1 (NSN 2320-01-531-2626) (EIC BFS)
TRUCK CHASSIS, 8X6, FOR 20 TON DUMP TRUCK
M917 (NSN 3805-01-028-4389) (EIC EZZ)
M917P1 (NSN 3805-01-531-2623) (EIC BFX)
TRUCK CHASSIS, 6X6, FOR BITUMINOUS
DISTRIBUTOR TRUCK,
M918 (NSN 3895-01-028-4390) (EIC EXC)
TRUCK CHASSIS, 8X6, FOR CONCRETE-MOBILE®
MIXER TRUCK,
M919 (NSN 3895-01-028-4391) (EIC EXD)
MEDIUM EQUIPMENT TRANSPORTER (MET), 8X6, W/WINCH
M920 (NSN 2320-01-028-4397) (EIC B4D)
M920P1 (NSN 2320-01-531-2638) (EIC BG2)
*TM 9-2320-273-10 dated 12 OCTOBER 2012 supersedes TM 9-2320-273-10 dated
15 MAY 1980, TM 9-2320-283-10 dated 15 MAY 2006, LO 9-2320-273-12 dated
14 JANUARY 1983, TB 9-2320-273-13&P-1 dated 1 JUNE 2006, and
TB 9-2320-273-13&P-2 dated 31 MARCH 2008, including all changes.
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A. Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
14 DECEMBER 2012
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY
FIRST AID DATA
For information on first aid, refer to FM 4-25.11. Seek medical attention in the event of
an injury.
WARNING
EXHAUST GASES CAN KILL
Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless, deadly poison
which, when breathed, deprives the body of oxygen and
causes suffocation. Exposure to air containing carbon
monoxide produces symptoms of headache, dizziness, loss of
muscular control, apparent drowsiness, and coma. Permanent
brain damage or death to personnel may result from severe
exposure. Carbon monoxide occurs in exhaust fumes of
internal combustion engines.
Carbon monoxide may become dangerously concentrated
under conditions of inadequate ventilation. The following
precautions must be observed to ensure safety of personnel.
1. DO NOT operate vehicle in an enclosed area without proper ventilation.
2. BE
a.
b.
c.
d.
ALERT for exhaust poisoning symptoms:
Headache
Dizziness
Sleepiness
Loss of muscular control
3. If you see another person with exhaust poisoning symptoms:
a. Remove person from area.
b. Expose to fresh air.
c. Keep person warm.
d. DO NOT permit physical exercise.
e. Administer Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR), if necessary.
f. Notify a medic.
4. BE AWARE. The field protective mask for Chemical, Biological, Radiological,
and Nuclear (CBRN) protection WILL NOT protect you from carbon monoxide
poisoning.
* For artificial respiration procedures, refer to FM 4-25.11.
The Best Defense Against Carbon Monoxide Poisoning Is Good Ventilation!
a
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
This warning summary contains information on first aid, general safety warnings, and
hazardous materials warnings found in the body of this manual that must be understood
and applied during operation and maintenance of this equipment. Failure to observe
these warnings could result in serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within the limits
specified in the TM in accordance with (IAW) AR 70-1. Operation beyond these limits
without written approval from the Commander, U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle
Management Command, ATTN: AMSTA-CG, Warren, MI 48397-5000, is prohibited.
Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on vehicles equipped with Crew
Protection Kit, vehicle operator must be aware of differences in driving characteristics
and adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment
or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
Operators must know the location and understand the proper use of all controls and
indicators before operating the tractor. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Operating tractor with air pressure below the normal operating range indicates a loss in
air supply and will limit the number of times the brakes can be applied before losing
front wheel brakes. Failure to stop tractor and allow air pressure to build up may result
in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
If low pressure warning lamp illuminates and buzzer sounds while driving tractor, stop
immediately and investigate the cause. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Operating tractor with air pressure below the normal operating range indicates a loss in
air supply and will limit the number of times the brakes can be applied before the
forward-rear axle emergency park/spring brakes are automatically activated. Failure to
stop tractor and allow air pressure to build up may result in damage to equipment and
possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Before backing operations, ensure the backup alarm override switch is in the down
position. Do not disable the alarm when personnel or equipment safety may be
sacrificed as a result. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
Never use the parking brake in place of the service brake for stopping the tractor.
Sudden lockup of spring brakes may result in loss of control of tractor and possible
damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
b
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Do not attempt to check and reset circuit breakers while driving the tractor. Always
pull safely to side of road first. If tractor cannot be safely operated due to a circuit
breaker that cannot be reset, do not attempt to operate tractor. Failure to comply may
result in damage to equipment or possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
Hazard switch will override brake lights when in use. Use hand signals and exercise
extra care when using hazard switch. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Operators must know how to use the controls and indicators before starting and driving
the vehicle. In addition, operators must know the capabilities and limitations of the
vehicle and be able to use the features of the vehicle in the safest and most efficient
way to accomplish their mission. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment
and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
The driver and passenger must wear seatbelts during vehicle operation. Ensure seatbelts
are fastened and properly adjusted before placing vehicle in motion. Failure to comply
may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
The driver and companion seatbelts must be connected and adjusted for proper fit prior
to placing the vehicle in motion. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Seatbelt must be completely extended from nonlocking retractor device. All excess
webbing must then be adjusted at the buckle. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not start engine with parking brake control pushed in (released). The vehicle could
roll in either direction once brake system reaches operating pressure and spring brakes
release. Always pull out parking brake control prior to starting engine or damage to
equipment and possible injury or death to personnel may result. Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
On M915 and M915A1 vehicles, cab controlled fifth wheel control lever must be in the
LOCK position when a trailer is connected to the tractor fifth wheel. Failure to comply
may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
To prevent fifth wheel movement during transit, ensure cab mounted sliding fifth wheel
control lever is in LOCK position before moving vehicle. Follow procedure to verify
fifth wheel control lever is locked in position when tractor is coupled to trailer, and
never move fifth wheel control lever to UNLOCK position during transit. Failure to
comply may result in loss of control, damage to equipment, and possible injury or
death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not operate vehicle with low tire pressure on wet smooth roads at high speeds.
Doing so may result in loss of control, damage to equipment, and possible injury or
death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
c
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Never allow vehicle to coast in neutral (N) position. Engine braking action is not
available when transmission is out of gear, and damage to equipment and possible
injury or death to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
Center of gravity is higher on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit. Always use
slower speeds when driving vehicle. DO NOT operate vehicle on steep hills or inclines.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Visibility is reduced on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit. Always use a
ground guide when maneuvering vehicle near obstacles. Failure to comply may result
in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
Vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit have different door handles and latching
hardware. Exercise caution when opening and closing armor doors to not allow
clothing or equipment to catch on door hardware. Failure to comply may result in
injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
DO NOT park vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit on a hill or incline. The
parking brake may have insufficient braking capacity to hold vehicle due to increased
vehicle weight. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and possible
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not use engine retarder on slippery road surfaces. Using engine retarder on wet, icy,
or snow covered roads may result in loss of vehicle control. Failure to comply may
result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
Failure to comply to downhill driving procedures may cause loss of vehicle control and
result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Excessive use of the service brake to control downhill speed will result in loss of
braking power due to heat build up. Failure to comply may result in severe injury or
death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The engine brake loses its effectiveness to control speed of tractor when tractor is
pushed by additional weight of trailer on downhill grades. Failure to downshift
transmission to lower gear range and use service brakes to keep tractor and engine
speeds under control may result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Never downshift to a gear range lower than the tractor road speed on slippery
pavement. Sudden increase in engine rpm may cause drive wheels to lose traction with
pavement and result in loss of control of tractor or jackknifing of trailer. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not use the pusher axle as a step when in the raised position. When pusher axle
wheels are off the ground, it freewheels. Failure to comply may result in injury to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
d
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Never park tractor on a steep grade. It is never good practice to park a heavy truck on
a steep slope even when parking brake holding capability exceeds federal safety
standards. Failure to comply may result in tractor moving unexpectedly, damage to
equipment, and injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
All personnel must stand clear of tractor and trailer during coupling operations. Failure
to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
To avoid unintentional fifth wheel movement during tractor operation, always ensure
fifth wheel control is in the LOCK position before placing tractor in normal operation.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and serious injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Never move fifth wheel control to the UNLOCK position during normal tractor
operation. Failure to comply may result in loss of control, damage to equipment, and
serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure no one is standing behind tractor or trailer during the coupling procedure.
Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure the kingpin couples with the fifth wheel. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment, and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
Hearing protection is required during winching operations. Failure to comply may
result in damage to hearing. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Avoid quick jerking action on cables when operating winch to prevent excessive
loading on the cable. Keep personnel not involved in winching away from winch cables
and payload. A snapping cable or shifting load can cause serious injury. Stop winching
immediately if shifting payload presents a hazard, or if any component fails, and notify
Field Maintenance. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Always wear heavy gloves when handling the winch wire rope. Never allow the cable
to run through your hands as broken wires can cause painful injuries. Failure to comply
may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Improper use of lifting equipment and attachment of cables to tractor may result in
injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Lifting sling must have a weight capacity greater than the weight of the vehicle. Refer
to specified vehicle weight in Equipment Description and Data (WP 0003). Failure to
comply may result in injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure lifting area is clear of all non-essential personnel prior to lifting and no
personnel enters during lifting operation. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
e
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Chock wheels to keep vehicle from moving before brakes are released. Failure to
comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Hearing protection is required for personnel when engine is running for an extended
period of time and personnel are close to vehicle. Noise levels produced by vehicle
may exceed 85 dB. Long-term exposure to this noise level may cause hearing loss.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Let radiator cool before removing cap. Remove radiator cap in two steps. First, place a
thick cloth over the cap and slowly rotate cap left to its first stop, pause, and let
pressure escape from cooling system. Then rotate cap further left until you can remove
it. Failure to comply may result in serious burns. Seek medical attention in the event of
an injury.
Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless, deadly poison which, when breathed,
deprives the body of oxygen and causes suffocation. Exposure to air containing carbon
monoxide produces symptoms of headache, dizziness, loss of muscular control,
apparent drowsiness, and coma. Permanent brain damage or death to personnel may
result from severe exposure. Carbon monoxide occurs in exhaust fumes of internal
combustion engines.
Carbon monoxide may become dangerously concentrated under conditions of
inadequate ventilation. Refer to page a of Warning Summary for further precautions
that must be observed to ensure safety of personnel.
Do not remove fill cap when hydraulic oil is hot. The hydraulic tank is pressurized to 5
psi (35 kPa). Remove fill cap slowly. Failure to comply may result is severe injury to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Observe all warnings, cautions, and notes while performing Preventive Maintenance
Checks and Services (PMCS). Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel or
damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
After raising engine compartment hood, ensure S-shaped safety hook is properly
inserted through two matching holes in prop channel to prevent hood from accidentally
falling. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in
the event of an injury.
While performing PMCS with engine running, wear approved hearing protection.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event
of an injury.
When working in engine compartment with engine running, keep clear of cooling fan.
The fan can engage at any time and serious injury to personnel may result. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
The engine must be shut off before performing PMCS steps 34 through 44. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
Engine must be off to check the fan clutch and actuator. Failure to comply may result
in severe injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
f
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
During normal operation the exhaust pipe and muffler will become very hot. Exercise
caution not to make body contact or touch hot exhaust components with bare hands.
Failure to comply may result in severe burns to personnel. Seek medical attention in
the event of an injury.
Remove all jewelry such as rings, bracelets, and identification tags. If jewelry comes in
contact with battery terminals, a direct short can occur resulting in instant heating of
jewelry or tools and damage to electrical system. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment and injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
Exercise caution when raising or lowering spare wheel and tire assembly. All personnel
must stand clear during lifting operations. Should wheel and tire assembly fall over or
drop from lift, serious injury to personnel may result. Failure to comply may result in
injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Stay clear of wheel when checking tire air pressure and inflating tire. Injury or death to
personnel may result from exploding wheel components. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Do not touch hot clutch disc when raising or lowering spare wheel and tire assembly
winch brake. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure winch cable drum has a minimum of four full turns of cable prior to lifting
spare wheel and tire assembly. Failure to comply may result in cable pulling off cable
drum and injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Ensure wheel and tire assembly does not suddenly drop from truck by guiding it down
between fuel tank and fender. Failure to comply could cause winch cable to snap and
injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
The vehicle’s hydraulic jack is intended only for lifting and is not a safe support for
performing maintenance. Do not get under vehicle unless it is properly supported by
jack stands or wood blocks. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure parking brake is released and chocks are placed behind tires at opposite end of
vehicle to be raised prior to jacking operations. Do not place chocks in front of tires at
opposite end of vehicle to be raised. If vehicle is not free to roll during jacking
operations, it may topple jack. Move chocks tight against tires after jacking and set
parking brake. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel or damage to
equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Check to make sure that the batteries are connected as shown in figure 1. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
Let radiator cool before performing this task. Failure to comply may result in injury to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
g
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
WARNING DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Winch system retains some pressure even when not in use. Wear goggles/face shield
when opening winch reservoir. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTIONS
Leaking or spilled lubrication material called out in this work package may cause a slip
and fall hazard. When draining lubrication material, clean any leaking or spilled
lubrication material immediately using suitable absorbent materials. Dispose of
contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning materials in accordance with local procedures
and plans. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
When fueling vehicle, ensure pump nozzle contacts the filling tube on top of the fuel
tank to carry off static electricity. Do not smoke or have open flame in fueling area.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not smoke, have open flame, or make sparks when performing battery maintenance.
Batteries may explode causing severe injury to personnel. Failure to comply may result
in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event
of an injury.
Do not perform fuel filter/water separator draining while smoking or near fire, flames,
or sparks. Fuel may ignite causing injury or death to personnel and/or damage to
equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Leaking or spilled coolant may cause a slip and fall hazard. When draining cooling
system, clean any leaking or spilled coolant immediately using suitable absorbent
materials. Dispose of contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning materials in accordance
with local procedures and plans. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Accidental or intentional introduction of liquid contaminants into the environment is a
violation of state, federal, and military regulations. Refer to Army POL (WP 0001) for
information concerning storage, use, and disposal of these liquids. Failure to comply
may result in damage to environment and health of personnel. Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
Contact with any lubrication material called out in this work package may cause skin
irritation. Use chemical resistant gloves. In case of skin contact, remove any
contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Wash
contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or
blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of
eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes or until
irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages. DO
NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in injury or death
to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
h
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Battery acid (electrolyte) is extremely harmful. Always wear safety goggles and rubber
gloves when performing battery maintenance. Failure to comply may result in severe
injury to personnel if acid contacts eyes or skin. Seek medical attention in the event of
an injury.
Contact with sealing compound may cause skin irritation. Use chemical resistant
gloves. In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin
thoroughly with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact
may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye
contact may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at
least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause irritation to upper
respiratory passages. DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply
may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
If Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) exposure is suspected,
personnel wearing protective equipment should handle all air cleaner media. Consult
your CBRN Officer or CBRN NCO for appropriate handling or disposal procedures.
CBRN contaminated filters must be handled using adequate precautions and must be
disposed of by trained personnel. Wear eye protection when removing A/C air filter.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in
the event of an injury.
Contact with cleaning solvent may cause skin irritation. Use chemical resistant gloves.
In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly
with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact may cause
irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact
may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least
15 minutes or until irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause irritation to upper
respiratory passages. DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply
may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
Contact with fire extinguisher chemicals may cause skin irritation. Use caution while
discharging chemicals. Do not spray on or at any personnel. Use chemical resistant
gloves. In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin
thoroughly with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact
may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye
contact may occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at
least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause irritation to upper
respiratory passages. DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply
may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
i
TM 9-2320-273-10
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTIONS - CONTINUED
Cleaning solvent is combustible. DO NOT use or store near heat, sparks, flame, or
other ignition sources. Use mechanical ventilation whenever product is used in a
confined space, heated above ambient temperatures, or agitated. Keep container sealed
when not in use. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
Hot coolant is under pressure. Be careful when removing coolant filler cap or
inspecting cooling system. Engine cooling system is under pressure and may cause
severe injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Methyl alcohol is highly flammable, poisonous, and can be absorbed through your skin.
Do not drink or breathe it. If you spill any on your skin, wash it off with water
immediately. Keep it away from sparks and flame. Failure to comply may result in
injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
j
TM 9-2320-273-10
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES
NOTE: This manual supersedes TM 9-2320-273-10 dated 15 MAY 1980,
TM 9-2320-283-10 dated 15 MAY 2006, LO 9-2320-273-12 dated
14 JANUARY 1983, TB 9-2320-273-13&P-1 dated 1 JUNE 2006, and
TB 9-2320-273-13&P-2 dated 31 MARCH 2008, including all changes. Zero in the
“Change No.” column indicates an original page or work package.
Date of issue for the original manual is:
Original: 14 DECEMBER 2012
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR
MATTER IS 44 AND TOTAL NUMBER OF WORK
PACKAGES IS 39,
CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:
Page/WP No.
Front cover
Warning Summary (10 pgs)
i – xii
Chp 1 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0001 (6 pgs)
WP 0002 (40 pgs)
WP 0003 (14 pgs)
WP 0004 (8 pgs)
Chp 2 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0005 (38 pgs)
WP 0006 (4 pgs)
WP 0007 (6 pgs)
WP 0008 (10 pgs)
WP 0009 (10 pgs)
WP 0010 (30 pgs)
WP 0011 (2 pgs)
WP 0012 (22 pgs)
WP 0013 (12 pgs)
WP 0014 (10 pgs)
WP 0015 (2 pgs)
WP 0016 (6 pgs)
WP 0017 (2 pgs)
WP 0018 (4 pgs)
WP 0019 (4 pgs)
WP 0020 (4 pgs)
Change No.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page/WP No.
WP 0021 (4 pgs)
Chp 3 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0022 (2 pgs)
Chp 4 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0023 (24 pgs)
Chp 5 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0024 (6 pgs)
WP 0025 (54 pgs)
WP 0026 (2 pgs)
WP 0027 (2 pgs)
WP 0028 (2 pgs)
WP 0029 (8 pgs)
WP 0030 (16 pgs)
WP 0031 (2 pgs)
WP 0032 (2 pgs)
WP 0033 (2 pgs)
WP 0034 (4 pgs)
WP 0035 (16 pgs)
Chp 6 title page (2 pgs)
WP 0036 (2 pgs)
WP 0037 (8 pgs)
WP 0038 (2 pgs)
WP 0039 (4 pgs)
INDEX-1 – INDEX-6
Back cover
A/B blank
Change No.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*TM 9-2320-273-10
HEADQUARTERS,
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 14 DECEMBER 2012
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR
TRUCK, TRACTOR, LINE HAUL, 6X4
M915 (NSN 2320-01-028-4395) (EIC B4A)
M915P1 (NSN 2320-01-525-7451) (EIC BAY)
TRUCK, TRACTOR, LINE HAUL, 6X4
M915A1 (NSN 2320-01-125-2640) (EIC B4B)
M915A1P1 (NSN 2320-01-525-7444) (EIC BAZ)
LIGHT EQUIPMENT TRANSPORTER (LET), 6X6, W/WINCH
M916 (NSN 2320-01-028-4396) (EIC B4C)
M916P1 (NSN 2320-01-531-2626) (EIC BFS)
TRUCK CHASSIS, 8X6, FOR 20 TON DUMP TRUCK
M917 (NSN 3805-01-028-4389) (EIC EZZ)
M917P1 (NSN 3805-01-531-2623) (EIC BFX)
TRUCK CHASSIS, 6X6, FOR BITUMINOUS
DISTRIBUTOR TRUCK,
M918 (NSN 3895-01-028-4390) (EIC EXC)
TRUCK CHASSIS, 8X6, FOR CONCRETE-MOBILE®
MIXER TRUCK,
M919 (NSN 3895-01-028-4391) (EIC EXD)
MEDIUM EQUIPMENT TRANSPORTER (MET), 8X6, W/WINCH
M920 (NSN 2320-01-028-4397) (EIC B4D)
M920P1 (NSN 2320-01-531-2638) (EIC BG2)
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS
You can help improve this publication. If you find any errors, or if you would like to recommend any
improvements to the procedures in this publication, please let us know. The preferred method is to
submit your DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) through the
Internet on the TACOM Unique Logistics Support Applications (TULSA) Web site. The Internet
address is https://tulsa.tacom.army.mil. Access to all applications requires CAC authentication, and you
must complete the Access Request form the first time you use it. The DA Form 2028 is located under
the TULSA Applications on the left-hand navigation bar. Fill out the form and click on SUBMIT.
Using this form on the TULSA Web site will enable us to respond more quickly to your comments
and to better manage the DA Form 2028 program. You may also mail, e-mail, or fax your comments
or DA Form 2028 directly to the U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command. The postal
mail address is U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/
TECH PUBS, MS 727, 6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000. The e-mail address is
tacomlcmc.daform2028@us.army.mil. The fax number is DSN 786-1856 or Commercial (586)
282-1856. A reply will be furnished to you.
*TM 9-2320-273-10 dated 12 OCTOBER 2012 supersedes TM 9-2320-273-10 dated
15 MAY 1980, TM 9-2320-283-10 dated 15 MAY 2006, LO 9-2320-273-12 dated
14 JANUARY 1983, TB 9-2320-273-13&P-1 dated 1 JUNE 2006, and
TB 9-2320-273-13&P-2 dated 31 MARCH 2008, including all changes.
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A. Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
i
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
How to Use This Manual ............................................................................................ xi
Chapter 1 - General Information, Equipment Description, and Theory of Operation
General Information ......................................................................................... WP 0001
Equipment Description .................................................................................... WP 0002
Figure 1. M915 Left Front View ............................................................. WP 0002-5
Figure 2. M915 Right Rear View ........................................................... WP 0002-7
Figure 3. M916 Left Front View ............................................................. WP 0002-9
Figure 4. M916 Right Rear View ......................................................... WP 0002-11
Figure 5. M917 Left Front View ........................................................... WP 0002-13
Figure 6. M917 Right Rear View ......................................................... WP 0002-15
Figure 7. M918 Left Front View ........................................................... WP 0002-17
Figure 8. M918 Right Rear View ......................................................... WP 0002-19
Figure 9. M919 Left Front View ........................................................... WP 0002-21
Figure 10. M919 Right Rear View ....................................................... WP 0002-23
Figure 11. M920 Left Front View ......................................................... WP 0002-25
Figure 12. M920 Right Rear View ....................................................... WP 0002-27
Figure 13. M915A1 Left Front View .................................................... WP 0002-29
Figure 14. M915A1 Right Rear View ................................................... WP 0002-31
Figure 15. A/C Condenser ..................................................................... WP 0002-32
Figure 16. A/C Evaporator Components ............................................... WP 0002-33
Figure 17. A/C Compressor ................................................................... WP 0002-34
Figure 18. A/C Receiver/Dryer ............................................................. WP 0002-35
Figure 19. Windshield Armor Frame and Ballistic Glass .................... WP 0002-36
Figure 20. Roof Armor, Rear Armor, and Escape Hatch ..................... WP 0002-37
Figure 21. Armor Door Assembly ......................................................... WP 0002-38
Figure 22. Interior Armor ...................................................................... WP 0002-39
Equipment Data ............................................................................................... WP 0003
Table 1. Differences Between Models .................................................... WP 0003-1
Theory of Operation ........................................................................................ WP 0004
Figure 1. Power Train .............................................................................. WP 0004-2
Figure 2. Front and Rear Suspension ...................................................... WP 0004-3
Figure 3. Engine and Accessories ........................................................... WP 0004-4
Figure 4. M915 through M920 Transmission Controls .......................... WP 0004-5
Figure 5. M915A1 Transmission Controls .............................................. WP 0004-6
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions
Description and Use of Operator Controls and Indicators ............................. WP 0005
Table 1. Instrument Panel Controls and Indicators ................................ WP 0005-1
Figure 1. Instrument Panel Controls and Indicators ............................... WP 0005-1
Table 2. Instrument Cluster and Gauges ................................................. WP 0005-2
ii
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions - Continued
Figure 2. Instrument Cluster and Gauges ............................................... WP 0005-2
Table 3. Instrument Cluster, Gauges, and Indicator ............................... WP 0005-4
Figure 3. Instrument Cluster, Gauges, and Indicator .............................. WP 0005-4
Table 4. Engine Run Switch, Start Button, and
Cigar Lighter/Utility Plug ................................................................. WP 0005-6
Figure 4. Engine Run Switch, Start Button, and
Cigar Lighter/Utility Plug ................................................................. WP 0005-6
Table 5. Tachograph ................................................................................ WP 0005-7
Figure 5. Tachograph ............................................................................... WP 0005-7
Table 6. Ether Quick-Start and Clearance Lamps
Buttons and Indicators ...................................................................... WP 0005-8
Figure 6. Ether Quick-Start and Clearance Lamps
Buttons and Indicators ...................................................................... WP 0005-8
Table 7. Control Panel Indicators ............................................................ WP 0005-9
Figure 7. Control Panel Indicators .......................................................... WP 0005-9
Table 8. Lights and Engine Retarder Switch ........................................ WP 0005-10
Figure 8. Lights and Engine Retarder Switch ....................................... WP 0005-10
Table 9. Wiper and Washer Controls and Indicators ........................... WP 0005-12
Figure 9. Wiper and Washer Controls and Indicators .......................... WP 0005-12
Table 10. Inter-Axle Differential Control ............................................. WP 0005-13
Figure 10. Inter-Axle Differential Control ............................................ WP 0005-13
Table 11. Tractor and Trailer Parking Brake Controls ......................... WP 0005-14
Figure 11. Tractor and Trailer Parking Brake Controls ....................... WP 0005-14
Table 12. Lower Control Panel ............................................................. WP 0005-16
Figure 12. Lower Control Panel ............................................................ WP 0005-16
Table 13. Air Filter Restriction Indicator ............................................. WP 0005-17
Figure 13. Air Filter Restriction Indicator ............................................ WP 0005-17
Table 14. Circuit Breaker and Relay Access Panel .............................. WP 0005-18
Figure 14. Circuit Breaker and Relay Access Panel ............................ WP 0005-18
Table 15. Circuit Breaker and Relays ................................................... WP 0005-19
Figure 15. Circuit Breaker and Relays .................................................. WP 0005-19
Table 16. Circuit Breakers and Glove Compartment Door .................. WP 0005-20
Figure 16. Circuit Breakers and Glove Compartment Door ................ WP 0005-20
Table 17. Cab Floor Mounted Controls ................................................ WP 0005-22
Figure 17. Cab Floor Mounted Controls ............................................... WP 0005-22
Table 18. Range Selector Control M915A1 ......................................... WP 0005-24
Figure 18. Range Selector Control M915A1 ........................................ WP 0005-24
Table 19. Fifth Wheel Control Lever M915A1 .................................... WP 0005-26
Figure 19. Fifth Wheel Control Lever M915A1 ................................... WP 0005-26
Table 20. Steering Wheel and Column Mounted Controls .................. WP 0005-27
iii
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions - Continued
Figure 20. Steering Wheel and Column Mounted Controls ................. WP 0005-27
Table 21. Transmission Air Control M915 through M920,
Fan Clutch Actuator Override M919, PTO Control M916 and
M920, and Pusher Axle Controls M917, M919, and M920 ......... WP 0005-28
Figure 21. Transmission Air Control M915 through M920,
PTO Control M916 and M920, Fan Clutch Actuator Override
M919, and Pusher Axle Controls M917, M919, and M920 ......... WP 0005-28
Table 22. Transmission Ratio Selector, M915 through M920 ............. WP 0005-30
Figure 22. Transmission Ratio Selector, M915 through M920 ............ WP 0005-30
Table 23. Seat Adjustment Controls ..................................................... WP 0005-32
Figure 23. Seat Adjustment Controls .................................................... WP 0005-32
Table 24. Additional Cab Controls ....................................................... WP 0005-33
Figure 24. Additional Cab Controls ...................................................... WP 0005-33
Table 25. Crew Protection Cab Doors, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-34
Figure 25. Crew Protection Cab Doors, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-34
Table 26. Defroster Fans, Dome, and Map Lamps .............................. WP 0005-35
Figure 26. Defroster Fans, Dome, and Map Lamps ............................. WP 0005-35
Table 27. Air Conditioning Kit Controls, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-36
Figure 27. Air Conditioning Kit Controls, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-36
Table 28. Rear Sliding Window, M916 through M920 ....................... WP 0005-37
Figure 28. Rear Sliding Window, M916 through M920 ...................... WP 0005-37
Table 29. Crew Protection Kit Escape Hatch, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-38
Figure 29. Crew Protection Kit Escape Hatch, M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 .................................................... WP 0005-38
Operation Under Usual Conditions ................................................................. WP 0006
Seat and Seatbelt Operation ............................................................................ WP 0007
Figure 1. Operator Seat ............................................................................ WP 0007-3
Figure 2. Companion Seat ....................................................................... WP 0007-4
Figure 3. Seatbelts .................................................................................... WP 0007-5
Starting Engine Above +32° F (0° C) ............................................................ WP 0008
Figure 1. Applying Parking Brake and Selecting Neutral,
(M915A1 Shown) ............................................................................. WP 0008-2
Figure 2. Turning On Ignition and Observing Warning Indicators ....... WP 0008-3
Figure 3. Control Lever, Cab Controlled Fifth Wheel ........................... WP 0008-4
iv
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions - Continued
Figure 4. Disengaging PTO, (M916 through M920 Models) ................ WP 0008-5
Figure 5. Differential Control Switch and Engine Start Button ............. WP 0008-6
Figure 6. Engine Retarder Foot Switch and Accelerator Pedal ............. WP 0008-7
Figure 7. Engine Start Button .................................................................. WP 0008-7
Figure 8. Instrument and Indicator Panel Gauges and Indicators .......... WP 0008-9
Cold Weather Starting Below +32° F (0° C) ................................................. WP 0009
Figure 1. Applying Parking Brake and Selecting Neutral ...................... WP 0009-2
Figure 2. Turning Engine Run Switch On and
Observing Warning Indicators .......................................................... WP 0009-3
Figure 3. Control Lever, Cab Controlled Fifth Wheel ........................... WP 0009-3
Figure 4. Disengaging PTO, (M916 through M920 Models) ................ WP 0009-4
Figure 5. Differential Control Switch and Engine Start Button ............. WP 0009-5
Figure 6. Engine Retarder Foot Switch and Accelerator Pedal ............. WP 0009-6
Figure 7. Starting Engine ......................................................................... WP 0009-7
Figure 8. Instrument and Indicator Panel Gauges and Indicators .......... WP 0009-9
Placing Vehicle in Motion ............................................................................... WP 0010
Figure 1. Instrument Panel Gauges and Indicators ................................. WP 0010-3
Figure 2. Instrument Panel Indicators and Controls ............................... WP 0010-3
Figure 3. Transmission Control Lever .................................................... WP 0010-4
Figure 4. Service, Park, and Trailer Brake Controls and
Accelerator Pedal .............................................................................. WP 0010-5
Figure 5. Transmission Control Lever and Range Indicator .................. WP 0010-7
Figure 6. Oil Pressure Gauge .................................................................. WP 0010-8
Figure 7. Water Temperature Gauge ....................................................... WP 0010-9
Figure 8. Air Pressure Gauges and Low Air Pressure Indicator ........... WP 0010-9
Figure 9. Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge ................................... WP 0010-10
Figure 10. Voltmeter .............................................................................. WP 0010-10
Figure 11. Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... WP 0010-11
Figure 12. Tachograph ........................................................................... WP 0010-15
Figure 13. Transmission Control Lever Range Indicator ..................... WP 0010-21
Figure 14. Transmission Range Indicator ............................................. WP 0010-23
Figure 15. Engine Retarder Switch ....................................................... WP 0010-24
Figure 16. Accelerator and Engine Retarder Control Pedals ............... WP 0010-25
Figure 17. Inter-axle Differential Lockup Controls .............................. WP 0010-27
Figure 18. Pusher Axle Controls ........................................................... WP 0010-28
Figure 19. M917 & M919 Pusher Axle Air Pressure for Vehicle
Weight Load Chart ......................................................................... WP 0010-29
Figure 20. M920 Pusher Axle Air Pressure for Vehicle Weight
Load Chart ...................................................................................... WP 0010-29
Stopping, Shutting Down Engine, and Parking Vehicle ................................ WP 0011
v
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions - Continued
Fifth Wheel Operation and Coupling and Uncoupling Trailers ..................... WP 0012
Figure 1. M915 Fifth Wheel Controls ..................................................... WP 0012-2
Figure 2. M916 and M920 Fifth Wheel Controls ................................... WP 0012-3
Figure 3. M915A1 Fifth Wheel Controls ................................................ WP 0012-5
Figure 4. Chock Block Placement (Level Ground) ................................ WP 0012-6
Figure 5. Fifth Wheel Equipment Checks ............................................... WP 0012-7
Figure 6. Tractor and Trailer Coupling ................................................... WP 0012-9
Figure 7. M915, M916, and M920 Air Hose and Cable
Connections ..................................................................................... WP 0012-10
Figure 8. M915A1 Air Hose and Cable Connections .......................... WP 0012-10
Figure 9. Chock Block Placement (Level Ground) .............................. WP 0012-11
Figure 10. Fifth Wheel Controls ........................................................... WP 0012-13
Figure 11. Pintle Towing Trailer Connections ..................................... WP 0012-14
Figure 12. Mud Flap Stowage ............................................................... WP 0012-15
Figure 13. Winch Components .............................................................. WP 0012-16
Figure 14. Winch Controls .................................................................... WP 0012-17
Figure 15. PTO Control Knob and Indicator Light .............................. WP 0012-19
Figure 16. Winch Operator Station ....................................................... WP 0012-21
Figure 17. Securing Winch Wire Rope ................................................. WP 0012-22
Operating Auxiliary Equipment ...................................................................... WP 0013
Figure 1. Towing Pintle ........................................................................... WP 0013-1
Figure 2. M915 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs ......... WP 0013-2
Figure 3. M916 and M918 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and
Tie Downs ......................................................................................... WP 0013-3
Figure 4. M917, M919, and M920 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles,
and Tie Downs .................................................................................. WP 0013-4
Figure 5. M915A1 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs .... WP 0013-5
Figure 6. Fire Extinguisher ...................................................................... WP 0013-6
Figure 7. NATO Slave Receptacle .......................................................... WP 0013-7
Figure 8. Air Conditioning ...................................................................... WP 0013-8
Figure 9. Opening Escape Hatch ............................................................. WP 0013-9
Figure 10. Opening Cab Rear Sliding Window .................................... WP 0013-10
Figure 11. Opening Stone Shield .......................................................... WP 0013-11
Decals and Instruction Plates .......................................................................... WP 0014
Figure 1. Sunvisor Instruction and Information Decals ......................... WP 0014-1
Figure 2. Instrument Panel Instruction and Information Decals ............ WP 0014-2
Figure 3. Driver Door Data Plates and Instruction Information
Decals ................................................................................................ WP 0014-3
Figure 4. M915A1 Circuit Breaker and Relay Identification Decals ..... WP 0014-4
Figure 5. Driver Seat Instruction Decals ................................................. WP 0014-5
vi
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 2 - Operator Instructions - Continued
Figure 6. Engine Compartment Decals ................................................... WP 0014-6
Figure 7. Fan Shroud Decals ................................................................... WP 0014-7
Figure 8. Fifth Wheel Decals .................................................................. WP 0014-8
Figure 9. Winch Decals and Data Plates ................................................ WP 0014-9
Operation Under Unusual Conditions ............................................................. WP 0015
Extreme Cold Conditions ................................................................................ WP 0016
Extreme Hot Conditions .................................................................................. WP 0017
Unusual Terrain Operation .............................................................................. WP 0018
Fording Operation ............................................................................................ WP 0019
Figure 1. Fording ..................................................................................... WP 0019-2
Spring Brake Power Springs Operation .......................................................... WP 0020
Figure 1. Spring Brake Power Spring ..................................................... WP 0020-2
Towing Vehicle ................................................................................................ WP 0021
Figure 1. Air Pressure Hose Connections ............................................... WP 0021-3
Chapter 3 - Troubleshooting Master Index
Troubleshooting Master Index ......................................................................... WP 0022
Chapter 4 - Troubleshooting Procedures
Troubleshooting Procedures ............................................................................ WP 0023
Chapter 5 - Maintenance Instructions
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) Introduction ............ WP 0024
Table 1. Cleaning Instructions ................................................................. WP 0024-5
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) ................................. WP 0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and
Services (PMCS) ............................................................................... WP 0025-1
Figure 1. Fuel Heater ............................................................................... WP 0025-3
Figure 2. Trailer Coupling Air Hoses ..................................................... WP 0025-3
Figure 3. Fifth Wheel Controls ............................................................... WP 0025-5
Figure 4. Radiator Sight Glass ................................................................ WP 0025-8
Figure 5. Cab Fire Extinguisher .............................................................. WP 0025-8
Figure 6. Instrument Panel ..................................................................... WP 0025-11
Figure 7. Automatic Drain Valve .......................................................... WP 0025-13
Figure 8. Front Armor ........................................................................... WP 0025-15
Figure 9. Side Armor (Left Side) .......................................................... WP 0025-17
Figure 10. Floor and Firewall Armor (Left Side) ................................. WP 0025-18
Figure 11. Roof Armor .......................................................................... WP 0025-19
Figure 12. Side Armor (Right Side) ...................................................... WP 0025-21
Figure 13. Floor and Firewall Armor (Right Side) .............................. WP 0025-22
Figure 14. Roof Armor and Escape Hatch ........................................... WP 0025-23
vii
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 5 - Maintenance Instructions - Continued
Figure 15. A/C Blower Unit .................................................................. WP 0025-24
Figure 16. Turbocharger ........................................................................ WP 0025-25
Figure 17. Transmission Dipstick .......................................................... WP 0025-29
Figure 18. Engine Oil Dipstick ............................................................. WP 0025-31
Figure 19. Engine Fuel Filter ................................................................ WP 0025-32
Figure 20. Drive Belts ........................................................................... WP 0025-33
Figure 21. Fan Clutch and Actuator ...................................................... WP 0025-35
Figure 22. Power Steering Pump Reservoir .......................................... WP 0025-37
Figure 23. Turbocharger ........................................................................ WP 0025-38
Figure 24. Oil Bypass Filter .................................................................. WP 0025-39
Figure 25. Ether Quick-Start Assembly ................................................ WP 0025-40
Figure 26. Trailer Couplings ................................................................. WP 0025-41
Figure 27. Exhaust System .................................................................... WP 0025-43
Figure 28. A/C Condenser ..................................................................... WP 0025-47
Figure 29. A/C Evaporator Assembly ................................................... WP 0025-49
Figure 30. A/C Receiver/Dryer ............................................................. WP 0025-51
Figure 31. A/C Compressor ................................................................... WP 0025-53
Cleaning Vehicle .............................................................................................. WP 0026
Cleaning Ballistic Glass ................................................................................... WP 0027
Filling Fuel Tank ............................................................................................. WP 0028
Figure 1. Fuel Tank and Filler Cap ......................................................... WP 0028-1
Cooling System Service ................................................................................... WP 0029
Figure 1. Removing Radiator Cap ........................................................... WP 0029-3
Figure 2. Draining Cooling System ......................................................... WP 0029-3
Figure 3. Filling Empty Cooling System ................................................ WP 0029-5
Figure 4. Checking Coolant Level .......................................................... WP 0029-5
Figure 5. Radiator Site Glass ................................................................... WP 0029-7
Figure 6. Adding Coolant to Cooling System ........................................ WP 0029-7
Wheel and Tire Service ................................................................................... WP 0030
Figure 1. M915, M918, and M915A1 ..................................................... WP 0030-2
Figure 2. M916 ......................................................................................... WP 0030-3
Figure 3. M917, M919, and M920 .......................................................... WP 0030-3
Figure 4. Spare Wheel and Tire Carrier
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-5
Figure 5. Spare Tire Carrier Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-5
Figure 6. Wheel and Tire Assembly on Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-7
Figure 7. Lower Wheel and Tire Assembly
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-7
viii
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 5 - Maintenance Instructions - Continued
Figure 8. Raising Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-9
Figure 9. Wheel and Tire Assembly on Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ........................................................... WP 0030-9
Figure 10. Install Tire on Spare Tire Carrier
(M915, M916, and M915A1) ......................................................... WP 0030-11
Figure 11. Secure Side Panel (M915, M916, and M915A1) ............... WP 0030-11
Figure 12. Wheel Nut Tightening Sequence ......................................... WP 0030-13
Figure 13. Operating Jack ...................................................................... WP 0030-14
Figure 14. Front Axle Jack Placement, M915 and M915A1 ............... WP 0030-15
Figure 15. Front Axle Jack Placement, M916 through M920 ............. WP 0030-15
Figure 16. Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear Axle Jack Placement ........... WP 0030-16
Battery Inspection ............................................................................................ WP 0031
Figure 1. Battery Box, Battery, and Cables Inspection .......................... WP 0031-2
Fan Clutch Lockup Procedure (M915 Through M920) ................................. WP 0032
A/C Air Filter Replacement ............................................................................ WP 0033
Figure 1. A/C Air Filter Replacement ..................................................... WP 0033-2
Maintenance Under Unusual Conditions ........................................................ WP 0034
Lubrication Instructions ................................................................................... WP 0035
Table 1. Use of Lubricants ...................................................................... WP 0035-4
Figure 1. Lubrication Locations (M915 and M915A1) .......................... WP 0035-6
Figure 2. Lubrication Locations (M916 and M918) ............................... WP 0035-7
Figure 3. Lubrication Locations (M917, M919, and M920) .................. WP 0035-8
Figure 4. Power Steering Pump Level Check and Fill ........................... WP 0035-9
Figure 5. Front Wheel Bearing Level Check and Fill (M915A1) ....... WP 0035-10
Figure 6. Fuel Filter/Water Separator Drain Moisture ......................... WP 0035-10
Figure 7. Engine Oil Level Check and Fill .......................................... WP 0035-12
Figure 8. Transmission Level Check and Fill ....................................... WP 0035-12
Figure 9. Fifth Wheel Lubrication
(M915, M916, M920, and M915A1) ............................................. WP 0035-14
Figure 10. Winch Reservoir Level Check and Fill
(M916 and M920) ........................................................................... WP 0035-15
Figure 11. Pintle Hook Lubrication
(M915, M916, M917, M920, and M915A1) ................................. WP 0035-16
Chapter 6 - Supporting Information
References ........................................................................................................ WP 0036
Components of End Item (COEI) and Basic Issue Item (BII) ...................... WP 0037
Table 1. Basic Issue Items (BII) ............................................................. WP 0037-3
Table 2. Basic Issue Items (BII) ............................................................. WP 0037-4
ix
TM 9-2320-273-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS - CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Chapter 6 - Supporting Information - Continued
Table 3. Basic Issue Items (BII) ............................................................. WP 0037-5
Table 4. Basic Issue Items (BII) ............................................................. WP 0037-6
Table 5. Basic Issue Items (BII) ............................................................. WP 0037-7
Additional Authorization List (AAL) ............................................................. WP 0038
Table 1. Additional Authorization List (AAL) ....................................... WP 0038-2
Expendable and Durable Items List ................................................................ WP 0039
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List ......................................... WP 0039-2
Index ................................................................................................................ INDEX-1
x
TM 9-2320-273-10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
ABOUT YOUR MANUAL
Equipment operators must familiarize themselves with the format and use of this
Technical Manual (TM) prior to operating equipment or performing routine
maintenance. Learning how to use this manual will enable personnel to quickly locate
information, gain proper knowledge of the equipment, and shorten the time necessary
to complete the required procedure. Features of this TM are:
Work Package Format - This TM is organized in work package (WP) format. Each WP
is an individual, stand-alone unit of information identified by a four-digit sequence
number. WPs are positioned within the TM in sequential order
(i.e., 0001, 0002, 0003, etc.) and each WP is page numbered consecutively after the
sequence number at the bottom of each page (i.e., 0001-1, 0001-2, 0001-3, etc.). A WP
may contain as many as thirty pages.
Text Design - A Table of Contents (TOC) is located in the front matter section of the
TM. WP titles and sequence numbers are listed in the TOC in sequential order. WPs
are organized into chapters based on subject and chapters are listed in the TOC.
Chapter title pages are positioned sequentially within the manual. In addition to the
TOC and chapter title pages, a separate subject index is located in the back of the TM.
The subject index is organized in alphabetical order with WP sequence and page
numbers provided. Each WP contains identification information which includes the
following:
1. Maintenance level(s) - This identifies what maintenance level(s) can perform the
task.
2. WP title - This identifies the name and title of the procedure and where
applicable, the title of the subtasks within the WP.
3. Effectivity notice - This is only listed when a WP does not apply to all
configurations or models of the equipment, in which case only the model(s) that
apply are listed.
4. Initial setup - Initial setup requirements may be listed after the WP identification
information above. The Initial Setup contains a list of all tools, materials/parts,
authorized personnel, reference information, and equipment conditions that must
be performed first. Special environment conditions and any other specific
information required to perform and complete the task may also be included.
Use of Text and Illustrations - WP text may be presented as general information
written in paragraphs, a single task having numbered steps, or two or more subtasks
each containing separate information (e.g., removal, inspection, installation). Where
steps are used, they must be followed in the order which they are numbered. When
illustrations are used, they are located after the text to which they apply on facing
two-page modules and are identified in the text by figure and item numbers. Each
illustration has a figure number and title beneath it and may contain item numbers with
arrows pointing to each part called out in the corresponding text. Illustration callouts
are numbered sequentially starting at the 11 o’clock position and continuing clockwise
around the illustration. Tables and figures are numbered sequentially within each WP.
xi
TM 9-2320-273-10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL - CONTINUED
Abbreviations and acronyms are only spelled out within the text the first time they
appear in the manual. A list of all abbreviations and acronyms used in this TM is
provided in General Information, WP 0001.
HOW TO USE YOUR MANUAL
The format of this manual is designed to make accessing information quick and easy.
The following example is intended as a guide and should be reviewed and put to
memory before attempting to use this manual. If you have any questions after
reviewing the following example, don’t hesitate to ask your supervisor.
PROBLEM: You observe while leaving the motor pool that the semi-trailer brakes will
not apply when the vehicle service brake is used or trailer brake hand control on
steering column is used.
SOLUTION: You must find information on the vehicle brake system in the operator’s
manual, review the operating procedures, and if necessary, perform the appropriate
troubleshooting tasks to solve the problem.
1. Refer to the TOC to determine what chapter and WP contains information on
brake system operation. If there is not an obvious WP title that indicates the
specific information on brakes, you may locate the information more quickly by
using the subject index. After reviewing the TOC and/or subject index, you
determine that Chapter 2, Operation Under Usual Conditions, WP 0006, and
Chapter 4, Troubleshooting Procedures, WP 0023, contain the information you
desire.
2. Go to WP 0006 and review the operating procedures pertaining to coupling and
stopping semi-trailer. Then go to WP 0022 and look through the list of
malfunctions in the Troubleshooting Master Index until you identify the
malfunction that most accurately fits the problem.
3. Go to WP 0023-10, Trailer Brakes Will Not Apply When Brake Pedal Is Used or
Hand Control on Steering Column is Used, and follow the steps listed. As you
perform the procedure you discover that one of the inter-vehicular air hoses is
leaking due to a damaged pressure coupling. Now you must notify Field
Maintenance as instructed.
4. When maintenance is allocated at the operator’s level, you must perform and
complete all instructions as outlined.
xii
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION,
AND THEORY OF OPERATION
TM 9-2320-273-10
0001
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
SCOPE
This Technical Manual (TM) contains operator level instructions for the operation and
servicing of M915, M915A1, M916, M917, M918, M919, and M920 trucks and
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 trucks equipped with Crew
Protection and Air Conditioning Kits. Operating instructions include safety
requirements, description of equipment, use of controls, and operation under usual and
unusual conditions. Servicing instructions include operator level Preventive
Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS), lubrication, maintenance procedures, and
troubleshooting as allocated by the Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC). Replacement
and repair of components are allocated for field level or higher maintenance, and are
subsequently not authorized at the operator’s level nor included in this manual.
Type of Manual - Operator/crew
Model Number and Equipment Name M915, M915A1, M916, M917, M918, M919, and M920 Truck, Tractor, Truck Chassis,
and Light and Medium Equipment Transporters.
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 Truck, Tractor, Truck Chassis,
and Light and Medium Equipment Transporters.
Purpose of Equipment:
1. The M915 is a line haul truck tractor used to haul semi-trailers on Class I good
roads only (30,000 lb (13,608 kg) on 5th wheel).
2. The M916 tractor is used to transport medium weight payloads/semi-trailers (up to
40,000 lb (18,144 kg) on 5th wheel) on and off roads.
3. The M917 truck is a 20-ton dump truck with a hydraulic hoist used to haul 12
cubic yards of aggregate and similar materials on and off road (15.2 cubic yards
heaped and 19.6 yards with side boards).
4. The M918 is a bituminous distributor truck used for spraying liquid asphalt. The
M918 can be operated on and off roads.
5. The M919 truck is a Concrete-Mobile® mixer truck used to transport up to 8
cubic yards of dry concrete material and mix at construction sites. The M919 can
be operated on and off roads.
6. The M920 tractor is used to transport heavy payload/semi-trailers (up to 40,000 lb
on 5th wheel) on and off roads.
7. The M915A1 is a line haul truck tractor used to haul semi-trailers for over the
road use (30,000 lb (13,608 kg) on 5th wheel).
8. The M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 is a standard truck
equipped with an armored cab and air conditioning for improved ballistic
protection and climate control of cab.
Special Inclusions - Operation and operator maintenance procedures for
vehicle-equipped options are covered in this TM.
0001-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0001
MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS
Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be
those prescribed by (as applicable) DA PAM 750-8, The Army Maintenance
Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual; DA PAM 738-751, Functional Users
Manual for The Army Maintenance Management Systems - Aviation (TAMMS-A); or
AR 700-138, Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability.
REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIR)
If your vehicle needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the
only one who can tell us what you do not like about your equipment. Let us know why
you do not like the design or performance.
All non-Aviation/Missile EIRs and PQDRs must be submitted through the Product Data
Reporting and Evaluation Program (PDREP) Web site. The PDREP site is:
https://www.pdrep.csd.disa.mil/.
If you do not have Internet access, you may submit your information using an SF 368
(Product Quality Deficiency Report). You can send your SF 368 using email, regular
mail, or fax using the addresses/fax numbers specified in DA PAM 750-8, The Army
Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual. We will send you a reply.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL (CPC)
Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) of Army materiel is a continuing concern. It
is important that any corrosion problems with this item be reported so that the problem
can be corrected and improvements can be made to prevent the problem in future
items.
Corrosion specifically occurs with metals. It is an electrochemical process that causes
the degradation of metals. It is commonly caused by exposure to moisture, acids, bases,
or salts. An example is the rusting of iron. Corrosion damage in metals can be seen,
depending on the metal, as tarnishing, pitting, fogging, surface residue, and/or cracking.
Plastics, composites, and rubbers can also degrade. Degradation is caused by thermal
(heat), oxidation (oxygen), solvation (solvents), or photolytic (light, typically UV)
processes. The most common exposures are excessive heat or light. Damage from these
processes will appear as cracking, softening, swelling, and/or breaking.
SF Form 368, Product Quality Deficiency Report should be submitted to the address
specified in DA PAM 750-8, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS)
Users Manual.
0001-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0001
ARMY PETROLEUM, OIL, AND LUBRICANTS (POL)
Proper disposal of hazardous waste material is vital to protecting the environment and
providing a safe work environment. Materials such as batteries, oils, and antifreeze
must be disposed of in a safe and efficient manner.
DO NOT overfill any fluid reservoir. If a fluid starts to flow out of reservoir, stop
IMMEDIATELY to avoid spillage. Immediately clean up spilled fluid before
proceeding with any task.
Refer to local procedures and plans for preventing and responding to fluid spills or
leaks. Comply with local regulations when disposing of clean up material and fluids.
The following references are provided as a means to ensure that proper disposal
methods are followed:
Waste Disposal Instructions (MEIS/MIDI CD ROM)
National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA)
Clean Air Act (CAA)
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability
Act (CERCLA)
Emergency Planning and Community Right to Know Act (EPCRA)
Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA)
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
The disposal of Army Petroleum, Oil, and Lubricants (POL) products are affected by
some of the above regulations. State regulations also may apply to POL. If you are
unsure of which legislation affects you, contact state and local agencies for regulations
regarding proper disposal of Army POL.
DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
Procedures for destruction of army materiel to prevent enemy use can be found in
TM 750-244-6, Procedures for Destruction of Tank-Automotive Equipment to Prevent
Enemy Use.
0001-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0001
DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE - CONTINUED
PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT
Storage and shipment instructions are located in TM 9-2320-273-23, Preparation for
Storage or Shipment, and in TM 746-10, Marking, Packaging and Shipment of
Supplies, and Equipment: General Packaging Instructions for Field Use.
NOMENCLATURE CROSS REFERENCE LIST
The following is a list of official nomenclature used in this manual and the
corresponding unofficial nomenclature (common names or jargon terms) used in the
field.
OFFICIAL TM
UNOFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
Engine coolant
Antifreeze, ethylene glycol mixture
Ether quick-start system
Cold start system
Engine retarder
Engine brake, Jake brake, Jacobs brake
Wire rope
Cable
Quick disconnect coupling
Gladhand
Air hose tender
Pogo stick
0001-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0001
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS
Abbreviations and acronyms appearing in this manual are defined in the paragraph
from where they first appear, after which only the abbreviation or acronym is used. The
following is a quick-reference list of all abbreviations and acronyms and their
corresponding word or compound term used in this manual.
dB - Decibel
@ - at
° - Degrees
DIA - Diameter
– - Minus, negative
EA - Each
% - Percent
EIR - Equipment Improvement
Recommendation
+ - Plus, positive
etc. - etcetera
°C - Degrees Celsius (e.g., 0° C)
F - Fahrenheit
°F - Degrees Fahrenheit (e.g., 32° F)
FAX - facsimile
ac - alternating current
FM - Field Manual
A/C - Air Conditioner
FMVSR - Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Regulation
AAL - Additional Authorization List
ABS - Anti-Lock Brake System
ft - foot, feet
AR - Army Regulation
GAA - Grease, Artillery, and Automotive
ATF - Automatic Transmission Fluid
gal. - gallon(s)
BII - Basic Issue Item
GVW - Gross Vehicle Weight
BK - Bulk
GVWR - Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
CAGEC - Commercial and Government
Entity Code
hp - horsepower
HR - Hand Receipt
CBRN - Chemical, Biological,
Radiological, and Nuclear
IAW - In Accordance With
cfm - cubic feet per minute
ID - Identification
cm - centimeter
in. - inch
cm3 - cubic centimeter
k - kilo, thousand
CID - Cubic Inch Displacement
kg - kilogram
COEI - Components of End Item
km - kilometer
CPC - Corrosion Prevention and Control
CTA - Common Table of Allowance
DA - Department of the Army
DA PAM - Department of the
Army-Pamphlet
kPa - kilopascal
kph - kilometers per hour
L - Liter(s)
lb - pound(s)
0001-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS - CONTINUED
lb-ft - pound-feet
lb-in. - pound-inch
psi - pounds per square inch
LPM - Liters Per Minute
qt - quart
m - meter
qty - quantity
MAC - Maintenance Allocation Chart
Recm. - Recommended
mi - mile
Rqr. - Required
ml - milliliter
rpm - revolutions per minute
MLC - Military Load Classification
SF - Standard Form
pt - pint
mm - millimeter
SI - Supply Instruction
mpg - miles per gallon
TAMMS - The Army Maintenance
Management System
mph - miles per hour
N•m - Newton-meter
TAMMS-A - The Army Maintenance
Management System - Aviation
N/A - Not Applicable
NATO - North Atlantic Treaty
Organization
TB - Technical Bulletin
NCO - Noncommissioned Officer
TOC - Table of Contents
NSN - National Stock Number
OEA - Oil Engine Arctic
TULSA - TACOM Unique Logistics
Support Applications
oz - ounce
U/I - Unit of Issue
PAM - Pamphlet
UV - Ultraviolet
PMCS - Preventive Maintenance Checks
and Services
w/ - with
PQDR - Product Quality Deficiency
Report
TM - Technical Manual
w/o - without
WP - Work Package
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0001-6
0001
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES
WARNING
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and
efficiently within the limits specified in the TM in
accordance with (IAW) AR 70-1. Operation beyond these
limits without written approval from the Commander, U.S.
Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN:
AMSTA-CG, Warren, MI 48397-5000, is prohibited. Failure
to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
If the vehicles are equipped with crew protection kit,
vehicles will be heavier than usual and weight increases will
change vehicle handling characteristics. Refer to Operation
Under Usual Conditions, WP 0006.
M915 AND M915A1
Capabilities of the M915 and M915A1 tractors are:
1. The M915 and M915A1 are capable of carrying maximum loads of 30,000 lb
(13,608 kg) on the fifth wheels, and have a towing capacity from its rear pintle of
50,000 lb (22,680 kg). The M915 and M915A1 have a maximum Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) of 50,000 lb (22,680 kg) and a Gross Combination
Weight Rating (GCWR) of 105,000 lb (47,627 kg).
2. While operating on Class I roads, the M915 and M915A1 can maintain speeds of
55 mph on level roads. The M915 can maintain 25 mph while ascending a 3.9
percent grade at GCWR, and the M915A1 can maintain 25 mph while ascending
a 3 percent grade at GCWR. They are capable of climbing a 17 percent grade at
GCWR in both forward and reverse directions, and can operate on side slopes up
to 10 percent where adequate traction is available. In addition, the M915A1 can
ford hard-bottom water crossings up to 20 in. (50.8 cm) in depth for 5 minutes
without damage or requiring maintenance before further operation.
3. Average cruising ranges at GCWR with a full tank of fuel (118 gal. (447 L)) vary
based on driving habits, climate, and road conditions. For example, during
highway operation under full power at 2,100 rpm, the fuel rate is 20.5–21.4 gal.
(77.6–81.0 L) per hour. Traveling at an average of 40 mph at GCWR results in a
300-mile operating range on a full tank.
4. The M915 and M915A1 are capable of operating in temperatures from
-25 to 125° F (-32 to 52° C) and can operate to -50° F (-46° C) with arctic engine
and personnel heater kits installed.
0002-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES - CONTINUED
M916
Capabilities of the M916 tractor are:
1. The M916 is capable of carrying a maximum load of 78,500 lb (35,607 kg) on its
fifth wheel, and has a towing capacity from its rear pintle of 50,000 lb
(22,680 kg). The M916 has a maximum Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
of 56,000 lb (25,401 kg) and a Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) of
106,000 lb (48,081 kg).
2. The M916 can start and climb a 25 percent grade at GCWR in both forward and
reverse directions.
3. The M916 is capable of operating on side slopes up to 10 percent where adequate
traction is available.
4. The M916 is capable of operating in temperatures from -25 to 125° F
(-32 to 52° C) and can operate to -50° F (-46° C) with arctic engine and
personnel heater kits installed.
M917
The M917 dump truck body provides the capability of hauling and dumping, or
spreading heavy loads of hot asphalt, aggregate, dirt, and similar materials. The M917
vehicle chassis has off-road capabilities providing a variety of terrain in which the
dump truck can operate. The body contains a sealed hydraulic system for raising and
lowering the bed. The hydraulic system is powered by the vehicle chassis PTO unit.
The tailgate can be adjusted for dumping the load or for controlled spreading while the
vehicle is moving. For additional information, refer to TM 5-3805-274-13&P.
M918
The M918 is a bituminous distributor truck used for spraying liquid asphalt. The M918
can be operated on and off roads. The M918 consists of an E. D. Etnyre & Company
Bituminous Distributor, Model D 63 storage tank with a low pressure heating system,
hydraulic powered pumping unit, and an adjustable spray bar for distributing
bituminous material. For additional information, refer to TM 5-3895-371-10.
M919
The M919 Concrete-Mobile® mixer unit is a combination materials transporter and
concrete mixing plant. The mixer carries sufficient unmixed material to produce fresh
concrete in any quantity up to 8 cubic yards (6.12 cubic meters). The concrete is mixed
on-site and the unit has been precisely calibrated so mixes produced meet or exceed
American Concrete Institute and American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials standards for design strength. The unit can be used on an
intermittent or continuous basis. However, continuous operation is dependent on the
availability of raw material at the site. Some control settings for mix operations vary
from truck to truck and site to site. For additional information, refer to
TM 5-3895-372-10.
0002-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES - CONTINUED
M920
Capabilities of the M920 tractor are:
1. The M920 is capable of carrying a maximum load of 99,730 lb (45,237 kg) on its
fifth wheel, and has a towing capacity from its rear pintle of 75,000 lb
(34,019 kg). The M920 has a maximum Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
of 75,000 lb (34,019 kg) and a Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) of
130,000 lb (58,967 kg).
2. The M920 can start and climb a 25 percent grade at GCWR in both forward and
reverse directions.
3. The M920 is capable of operating on side slopes up to 10 percent where adequate
traction is available.
4. The M920 is capable of operating in temperatures from -25 to 125° F
(-32 to 52° C) and can operate to -50° F (-46° C) with arctic engine and
personnel heater kits installed.
AIR CONDITIONING KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
Capabilities of the Air Conditioning Kit:
1. The Air Conditioning Kit provides the M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1,
and M920P1 with cooling of the vehicle cab.
2. The Air Conditioning Kit consists of a compressor, condenser, receiver/dryer,
evaporator assembly, switch box, hoses, and electrical harness.
CREW PROTECTION KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
Capabilities of the Crew Protection Kit:
1. The Crew Protection Kit provides the M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1,
and M920P1 with improved armor protection for vehicle occupants.
2. The Crew Protection Kit consists of armor panels installed on the cab floor,
firewall, roof, rear of cab, driver side, passenger side, door assemblies, windshield
frame, ballistic glass, and an escape hatch.
0002-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
M915
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on cab top
used to mark vehicle cab. Lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on cab top on driver side and is air operated.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab
door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle and trailer when coupled.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides
of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries
are low.
DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear
suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver
door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to
the side of the tank.
FRESH AIR VENTS - There is a cab air vent on each side of the cab cowl. The vent
is opened and closed from inside the cab by a hand-operated lever.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on the top of each
front fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and
a red lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight
on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on
the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable
shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight
mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
CLEARANCE
MARKER
LIGHTS
AIR HORN
ENGINE
SIDE VIEW
MIRRORS
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
FUEL
TOWING EYES
TANK
TURN SIGNAL
AND SHACKLES
LIGHTS
BLACKOUT
DRIVE
FRESH AIR
VENTS
LIGHT BLACKOUT
MARKER LIGHT
Figure 1. M915 Left Front View.
0002-5
DRIVING
AXLES
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M915
TRAILER RAMPS - There are two steel ramps mounted on the frame rails adjacent to
the fifth wheel. The trailer ramps help with alignment during coupling, and prevent the
trailer from contacting the vehicle frame or fifth wheel too low during coupling.
FIFTH WHEEL - A fifth wheel is mounted on the vehicle frame over the tandem rear
axles. Kingpin lock is air-actuated by a control lever in the cab.
SPARE TIRE HOIST - The spare tire hoist is for lifting the spare tire on and off the
carrier.
AIR HOSE TENDER - The air hose tender is located in front of the spare tire carrier
and supports a coiled air hose for connecting to the trailer.
SPARE TIRE CARRIER - The spare tire carrier, located directly behind the cab on the
vehicle frame, is a steel frame structure that holds the spare wheel and tire assembly.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located
and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab
passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the
cab.
SPARE TIRE RACK - The spare tire rack is mounted to the left frame rail next to the
spare tire carrier. The rack assembly supports the hoist for lifting the spare tire on and
off the carrier.
DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear
suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle.
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender and at the back of
the truck behind the rear tires.
TOWING PINTLE - The towing pintle, located at the center of the frame rear
crossmember, is provided for interface with trailers requiring a pintle.
0002-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
SPARE TIRE
CARRIER
EXHAUST STACK
AND MUFFLER
AIR HOSE
TENDER
TRAILER
RAMPS
SPARE TIRE
HOIST
FIFTH
WHEEL
SPARE TIRE
RACK
TOWING MUD
PINTLE FLAPS
DRIVING AXLES
BATTERY BOX
Figure 2. M915 Right Rear View.
0002-7
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M916
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle
designed to protect the grille/headlight area.
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab
top used to mark the vehicle cab. The lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the cab top on the driver side and is air
operated.
WINCH CONTROLS AND OPERATOR STATION - Winch and controls used to pull
out stuck vehicles and for pulling trailers onto vehicle fifth wheel.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the
rear suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides
of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries
are low.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver
door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to
the side of the tank.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on the top of each
front fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and
a red lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle is mounted to the front suspension
assembly and is a steering axle and driving axle.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight
on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight
mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on
the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable
shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
0002-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
CLEARANCE
MARKER
LIGHTS
AIR HORN
BRUSH
GUARD
WINCH
CONTROLS AND
OPERATOR
STATION
ENGINE
~
~
~
TOWING
EYES AND
SHACKLES
BLACKOUT
DRIVE LIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
LIGHTS
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
FRONT
DRIVE
AXLE
BLACKOUT
MARKER
LIGHT
REAR
DRIVING
AXLES
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
FUEL
TANK
Figure 3. M916 Left Front View.
0002-9
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M916
TRAILER RAMPS - There are two steel ramps mounted on the frame rails adjacent to
the fifth wheel. The trailer ramps help with alignment during coupling and prevent the
trailer from contacting the vehicle frame or fifth wheel too low during coupling.
FIFTH WHEEL - A fifth wheel is mounted on the vehicle frame over the tandem rear
axles. Kingpin lock is air-actuated by a control lever in the cab.
WINCH CONTROLS - Controls used to operate the winch.
SPARE TIRE HOIST - The spare tire hoist for lifting the spare tire on and off the
carrier.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located
and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension assembly
and is a steering axle and driving axle.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab
passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the
cab.
SPARE TIRE CARRIER - The spare tire carrier, located directly behind the cab on the
vehicle frame, is a steel frame structure that holds the spare wheel and tire assembly.
AIR HOSE TENDER - The air hose tender is located in front of the spare tire carrier
and supports a coiled air hose for connecting to the trailer.
DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear
suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle .
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender and at the back of
the truck behind the rear tires.
TOWING PINTLE - The towing pintle, located at the center of the frame rear
crossmember, is provided for interface with trailers requiring a pintle.
0002-10
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
SPARE TIRE
HOIST
WINCH
CONTROLS
TRAILER
RAMPS
EXHAUST STACK
AND MUFFLER
FIFTH
WHEEL
TOWING
PINTLE
MUD
FLAPS
SPARE
FRONT DRIVING
TIRE
AXLE
CARRIER BATTERY
AIR
BOX
DRIVING
HOSE
AXLES
TENDER
Figure 4. M916 Right Rear View.
0002-11
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M917
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle
designed to protect the grille/headlight area.
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab
top used to mark the vehicle cab. The lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the cab top on the driver side and is air
operated.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab
door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle and trailer when coupled.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides
of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries
are low.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the
rear suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle.
PUSHER AXLE - The pusher axle is a non-driving axle located directly in front of the
driving axle.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver
door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to
the side of the tank.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on the top of each
front fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and
a red lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight
on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on
the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable
shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight
mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
CLEARANCE
MARKER LIGHTS
BRUSH
GUARD
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
ENGINE
AIR HORN
SIDE VIEW
MIRRORS
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
~
BLACKOUT
TOWING EYES
MARKER
FUEL
AND SHACKLES
LIGHT
TURN TANK
SIGNAL
LIGHTS
BLACKOUT
DRIVE
LIGHT
Figure 5. M917 Left Front View.
0002-13
PUSHER
AXLE
REAR DRIVING
AXLES
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M917
DUMP BODY - The dump truck body provides the capability of hauling and dumping,
or spreading heavy loads of hot asphalt, aggregate, dirt, and similar materials. The
dump body contains a sealed hydraulic system for raising and lowering the dump bed.
For additional information, refer to TM 5-3805-274-13&P.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located
and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension assembly
and is a steering axle and driving axle.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab
passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the
cab.
MUD GUARD - The mud guard is located in front of the pusher axle tires to limit
mud being thrown off tires and onto vehicle.
PUSHER AXLE - The pusher axle is a non-driving axle located directly in front of the
driving axle.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the
rear suspension assembly and function as driving axles of the vehicle.
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender and at the back of
the truck behind the rear tires.
TOWING PINTLE - The towing pintle, located at the center of the frame rear
crossmember, is provided for interface with trailers requiring a pintle.
0002-14
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
EXHAUST STACK
AND MUFFLER
DUMP BODY
TOWING
PINTLE
MUD
FLAPS
REAR
DRIVING
AXLES
FRONT
DRIVING
MUD
AXLE
GUARD
BATTERY
PUSHER
BOX
AXLE
Figure 6. M917 Right Rear View.
0002-15
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M918
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle
designed to protect the grille/headlight area.
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab
top used to mark the vehicle cab. The lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the cab top on the driver side and is air
operated.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides
of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries
are low.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below cab driver door.
The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to the
side of the tank.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on top of each front
fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and a red
lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight
on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on
the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable
shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight
mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-16
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
CLEARANCE
MARKER
LIGHTS
BRUSH
GUARD
ENGINE
AIR HORN
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
~
FUEL
TANK
TURN SIGNAL
LIGHTS
TOWING BLACKOUT
EYES AND DRIVE
SHACKLES LIGHT
BLACKOUT
MARKER
LIGHT
Figure 7. M918 Left Front View.
0002-17
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M918
BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR BODY - The bituminous distributor body is used for
spraying liquid asphalt. The bituminous distributor body consists of a storage tank with
a low pressure heating system, hydraulic powered pumping unit, and an adjustable
spray bar for distributing bituminous material. For additional information, refer to
TM 5-3895-371-10.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located
and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab
door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension assembly
and is a steering axle and driving axle.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab
passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the
cab.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the
rear suspension assembly and function as the driving axles of the vehicle.
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender and at the back of
the truck behind the rear tires.
0002-18
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
BITUMINOUS
DISTRIBUTOR BODY
MUD
FLAPS
EXHAUST STACK
AND MUFFLER
REAR
DRIVING
AXLES
Figure 8. M918 Right Rear View.
0002-19
SIDE VIEW
MIRRORS
FRONT
BATTERY DRIVING
BOX
AXLE
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M919
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab
top used to mark the vehicle cab. Lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the cab top on the driver side and is air
operated.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides
of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries
are low.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver
door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to
the side of the tank.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on top of each front
fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and a red
lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight
on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on
the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable
shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle
designed to protect the grille/headlight area.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight
mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-20
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
CLEARANCE
MARKER
LIGHTS
AIR HORN
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
ENGINE
BRUSH
GUARD
~
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
TOWING EYES
AND SHACKLES
FUEL
TANK
BLACKOUT
DRIVE
LIGHT
TURN SIGNAL
LIGHTS
BLACKOUT
MARKER LIGHT
Figure 9. M919 Left Front View.
0002-21
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M919
CONCRETE MIXER BODY - The M919 Concrete-Mobile® mixer unit is a
combination materials transporter and concrete mixing plant. The mixer carries
sufficient unmixed material to produce fresh concrete in any quantity up to 8 cubic
yards (6.12 cubic meters). The concrete is mixed at the site and since the unit has been
precisely calibrated, mixes can be produced that meet or exceed American Concrete
Institute and American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
standards for design strength. For additional information, refer to TM 5-3895-372-10.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located
and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab
door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension assembly,
is a steering axle and driving axle.
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab
passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the
cab.
PUSHER AXLE - The pusher axle is a non-driving axle located directly in front of the
driving axle.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the
rear suspension assembly and function as driving axles of the vehicle.
0002-22
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
CONCRETE
MIXER BODY
SIDE VIEW
MIRRORS
EXHAUST STACK
AND MUFFLER
REAR
DRIVING
AXLES
PUSHER
AXLE
MUD
FLAPS FRONT
BATTERY DRIVING
AXLE
BOX
Figure 10. M919 Right Rear View.
0002-23
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M920
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab
top used to mark the vehicle cab. The lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the cab top on the driver side and is air
operated.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab
door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle and trailer when coupled.
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The NATO slave receptacle is located on both sides
of the cab, allowing vehicle to be jump started using another vehicle when the batteries
are low.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver
door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to
the side of the tank.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on top of each front
fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and a red
lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight
on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on
the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable
shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle
designed to protect the grille/headlight area.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight
mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-24
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
CLEARANCE
SIDE VIEW
MARKER
LIGHTS
AIR HORN MIRRORS
ENGINE
BRUSH
GUARD
NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
~
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
TOWING EYES
AND SHACKLES
FUEL
TANK
BLACKOUT
DRIVE
LIGHT
TURN SIGNAL
LIGHTS
BLACKOUT
MARKER LIGHT
Figure 11. M920 Left Front View.
0002-25
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M920
TRAILER RAMPS - There are two steel ramps mounted on the frame rails adjacent to
the fifth wheel. The trailer ramps help with alignment during coupling, and prevent the
trailer from contacting the vehicle frame or fifth wheel too low during coupling.
FIFTH WHEEL - A fifth wheel is mounted on the vehicle frame over the tandem rear
axles. Kingpin lock is air-actuated by a control lever in the cab.
WINCH CONTROLS - Controls used to operate the winch.
WINCH - Used to pull out stuck vehicles and for pulling trailers onto vehicle fifth
wheel.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located
and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension assembly,
is a steering axle and driving axle.
BATTERY BOX - The battery box is located on the right frame rail below the cab
passenger door. The battery box contains four batteries and two steps for entering the
cab.
PUSHER AXLE - The pusher axle is a non-driving axle located directly in front of the
driving axle.
REAR DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the
rear suspension assembly and function as driving axles of the vehicle.
MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender and at the back of
the truck behind the rear tires.
TOWING PINTLE - The towing pintle, located at the center of the frame rear
crossmember, is provided for interface with trailers requiring a pintle.
0002-26
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
WINCH
CONTROLS
TRAILER
RAMPS
TOWING
PINTLE
WINCH
EXHAUST STACK
AND
MUFFLER
EXHAUST
STACK
AND MUFFLER
FIFTH
WHEEL
MUD
FLAPS
REAR
DRIVING
AXLES
PUSHER
AXLE
FRONT DRIVING
AXLE
BATTERY
BOX
Figure 12. M920 Right Rear View.
0002-27
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M915A1
FRONT SPOTTER MIRRORS - There is an adjustable convex mirror mounted on
each front fender. The left mirror is intended to provide a view of the area directly in
front of the vehicle, and the right mirror is intended to provide a view of the lower
right side of the vehicle.
BRUSH GUARD - There is a steel brush guard mounted on the front of the vehicle
designed to protect grille/headlight area.
ENGINE - Cummins NTC-400 BIG CAM III diesel engine used to power vehicle.
CLEARANCE MARKER LIGHTS - There are five amber lights mounted on the cab
top used to mark the vehicle cab. Lights are controlled by the headlamp switch.
AIR HORN - A single horn is mounted on the driver side cab top and is air operated.
SIDE VIEW MIRRORS - There is an adjustable side view mirror mounted on each cab
door used to view the area to the left and right of the vehicle and trailer when coupled.
WORK LAMP RECEPTACLE - There is a small receptacle with a removable rubber
dust cap on each side of the cab at the bottom outside corner adjacent to the door
handle. The receptacle is provided as a power supply for the 12 Volt work lamp.
DRIVING AXLES - The forward-rear and rear-rear axles are mounted to the rear
suspension assembly and function as driving axles of the vehicle.
SPRING BRAKE CHAMBERS - An air chamber, located at each wheel end on the
rear tandem axles, mechanically operates the rear brakes by releasing when air pressure
is raised and applying when air pressure is released.
FUEL TANK - The fuel tank is located on the left frame rail below the cab driver
door. The fuel tank supports the driver steps for entering the cab, which are welded to
the side of the tank.
FRESH AIR VENTS - There is a cab air vent on each side of the cab cowl. The vent
is opened and closed from inside the cab by a hand-operated lever.
FRONT AXLE - The front axle, mounted to the front suspension, is a nondriving front
axle.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS - There is a turn signal light mounted on top of each front
fender. The turn signal light has an amber lens facing the front of the vehicle and a red
lens facing the rear. This light also functions as a marker light.
BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT - There is a light mounted above the service headlight
on each front fender for blackout lighting only.
SERVICE HEADLIGHTS - There is a combination high/low sealed beam headlight
mounted on each front fender for service lighting as required.
0002-28
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT - A single light is mounted adjacent to the headlight on
the left front fender for blackout lighting only.
TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There are two towing eyes with removable
shackles mounted on the front bumper and frame front support brackets.
CLEARANCE
MARKER
LIGHTS
BRUSH
GUARD
ENGINE
BLACKOUT
DRIVE
LIGHT
SIDE VIEW
MIRRORS
WORK LAMP
RECEPTACLE
~
FRONT
SPOTTER
MIRRORS
AIR HORN
~
TOWING
EYES AND
SHACKLES
BLACKOUT TURN
MARKER SIGNAL FRONT
AXLE
LIGHT
LIGHTS
FRESH
AIR
VENTS
SERVICE
HEADLIGHTS
DRIVING
AXLES
FUEL
TANK
SPRING
BRAKE
CHAMBERS
Figure 13. M915A1 Left Front View.
0002-29
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
M915A1
TRAILER RAMPS - There are two steel ramps mounted on the frame rails adjacent to
the fifth wheel. The trailer ramps help with alignment during coupling, and prevent the
trailer from contacting the vehicle frame or fifth wheel too low during coupling.
CAB CONTROLLED FIFTH WHEEL - A fifth wheel is mounted on the vehicle frame
over the tandem rear axles. Kingpin lock is air-actuated by a control lever in the cab.
SPARE TIRE HOIST AND RACK ASSEMBLY - The spare tire rack is mounted to
the left frame rail next to the spare tire carrier. The rack assembly supports the hoist
for lifting the spare tire on and off the carrier.
CAB SLIDING REAR WINDOW AND STONE SHIELD - There is a sliding window
protected by a steel grid located on the back panel of the vehicle cab.
EXHAUST STACK AND MUFFLER - The exhaust system stack and muffler, located
and supported by the right rear corner of the cab, routes engine exhaust above the cab.
FRONT WHEEL MUD FLAP - There is a mud flap mounted on each front fender.
BATTERY BOX AND NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE - The battery box is located on
the right frame rail below the cab passenger door. The battery box contains four
batteries, a NATO slave receptacle, and two steps for entering the cab.
SPARE TIRE CARRIER - The spare tire carrier, located directly behind the cab on the
vehicle frame, is a steel frame structure that holds the spare wheel and tire assembly.
AIR HOSE TENDER - The air hose tender is located in front of the spare tire carrier
and supports a coiled air hose for connecting to the trailer.
REAR WHEEL MUD FLAPS - There is a mud flap mounted behind each wheel on
the rear-rear axle.
BLACKOUT TAIL AND STOPLAMPS - There is a tail lamp located below the rear
towing eye on the left and right frame rail that contains the bulbs for blackout tail and
stoplamps.
SERVICE TAIL AND STOPLAMPS - There is a tail lamp mounted below the frame
rear crossmember at each side of the towing pintle. The service tail lamp provides tail,
turn signal, and stop lighting. A separate single-filament bulb functions as the backup
lamp.
REAR AIR LINE COUPLINGS - There are two air line quick-disconnect couplings
located at the rear of the vehicle below the towing pintle.
TOWING PINTLE - The towing pintle, located at the center of the frame rear
crossmember, is provided for interface with trailers requiring a pintle.
REAR TOWING EYES AND SHACKLES - There is a towing eye mounted on the
side of each frame rail adjacent to the towing pintle.
0002-30
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
CAB SLIDING
REAR WINDOW AND
STONESHIELD
SPARE TIRE
HOIST AND
RACK ASSEMBLY
REAR TOWING
EYES AND
SHACKLES
CAB
CONTROLLED
FIFTH
WHEEL
TOWING
PINTLE
EXHAUST
STACK AND
MUFFLER
TRAILER
RAMPS
~
SPARE TIRE
CARRIER
FRONT WHEEL
MUD FLAP
REAR
REAR WHEEL
AIR LINE
MUD FLAPS
COUPLINGS BLACKOUT
TAIL AND
STOPLAMPS
AIR HOSE
TENDER
SERVICE TAIL
AND STOPLAMPS
BATTERY BOX
AND NATO SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
Figure 14. M915A1 Right Rear View.
0002-31
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
AIR CONDITIONING KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
CONDENSER - Located on the roof of the cab, it is a part of the A/C system where
heat dissipation occurs. Inside the condenser, refrigerant gas is cooled and condensed
into liquid form and then delivered back to other parts of the system, where it is
expanded into a cool gaseous form to cool the cab.
CONDENSER
Figure 15. A/C Condenser.
0002-32
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
SWITCH BOX - Located to the left of the evaporator assembly, it features an ON/OFF
switch and HIGH/LOW fan speed switch.
EVAPORATOR ASSEMBLY - The unit mounted below the lower control panel, it
functions to remove heat and humidity from the cab by providing cooled air passing
through it when the fan is operated.
A/C FILTER - Located below the evaporator assembly, it filters the air passing through
the evaporator and out the cold air vents.
EVAPORATOR
ASSEMBLY
SWITCH BOX
A/C FILTER
Figure 16. A/C Evaporator Components.
0002-33
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
A/C ELECTRICAL HARNESS - The electrical harness that powers the A/C system,
which includes the magnetic clutch on the compressor and blower fan in the evaporator
assembly.
A/C HOSES - The plumbing that routes refrigerant between the compressor,
evaporator, condenser, and receiver/dryer.
A/C COMPRESSOR - Is a belt-driven pump, located on the engine, that circulates
refrigerant through the A/C system to cool the passenger compartment.
A/C ELECTRICAL
HARNESS
A/C HOSES
COMPRESSOR
Figure 17. A/C Compressor.
0002-34
TM 9-2320-273-10
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
A/C RECEIVER/DRYER - Located on vehicle frame, it stores compressor oil and
refrigerant until needed by the A/C system, contains a filter that traps debris, and
contains a desiccant that absorbs moisture.
A/C HOSES
A/C ELECTRICAL
HARNESS
RECEIVER/DRYER
Figure 18. A/C Receiver/Dryer.
0002-35
0002
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
CREW PROTECTION KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
WINDSHIELD ARMOR FRAME AND BALLISTIC GLASS - Located in front of cab
above instrument panel, it provides armor protection for the windshield area of the cab.
WINDSHIELD ARMOR
FRAME
BALLISTIC GLASS
~
~
Figure 19. Windshield Armor Frame and Ballistic Glass.
0002-36
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
ROOF ARMOR - Armor plate mounted on roof of vehicle cab.
REAR ARMOR - The armor plate located on rear of cab.
ESCAPE HATCH - Located on rear of cab in place of rear window, it provides an
emergency exit for vehicle occupants.
ESCAPE HATCH
ROOF ARMOR
REAR ARMOR
Figure 20. Roof Armor, Rear Armor, and Escape Hatch.
0002-37
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
ARMOR DOOR ASSEMBLY - Located on each side of cab, the armored door with
ballistic glass provides armor protection for vehicle occupants.
GLOVE BOX ARMOR - The armor plate mounted in front of glove box and access
panel on passenger side of cab.
FIREWALL ARMOR, RIGHT HAND - The armor plate mounted on firewall in front
of driver side of cab.
GLOVE BOX
ARMOR
~
ARMOR DOOR
ASSEMBLY
FIREWALL ARMOR,
RIGHT HAND
Figure 21. Armor Door Assembly.
0002-38
TM 9-2320-273-10
0002
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - CONTINUED
FIREWALL ARMOR, CENTER - The armor plate mounted in front of firewall.
FLOOR ARMOR - The armor plate mounted on floor of cab, it provides armor
protection for the floor area of the cab.
FIREWALL ARMOR, LEFT HAND - The armor plate mounted on firewall in front of
the driver side of cab.
FIREWALL ARMOR,
LEFT HAND
FIREWALL ARMOR,
CENTER
~
FLOOR ARMOR
Figure 22. Interior Armor.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0002-39/40 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
EQUIPMENT DATA
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN MODELS
Driving Front Axle
Transfer Case
Pusher Axle
Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly
Spare Wheel and Tire
Hoist
Towing Pintle
Fifth Wheel
Winch
Work Lamps
External Receptacle
for Work Lamps
Power Take-Off
(PTO)
Hose Tender and
Cable Support
Backup Alarm
Special Bodies:
Dump Body
Bituminous Distributor
Concrete-Mobile®
Mixer
Auxiliary Power
Steering Cylinder
Double Rail Frame
Front Shock
Absorbers
Tires:
Highway
On/Off Road
Crew Protection Kit
Air Conditioning Kit
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
M920P1
M920
M919
M918
M917P1
M917
M916P1
M916
M915P1
M915
M915A1P1
ITEM
M915A1
Table 1. Differences Between Models.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0003-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
EQUIPMENT DATA
NOTE
Refer to the following for specific equipment data.
WEIGHTS
Curb weight
M915A1 ................................................................................................... 19,720 lb (8945 kg)
M915 ........................................................................................................ 19,630 lb (8781 kg)
M916 .................................................................................................... 27,500 lb (12,474 kg)
M917 .................................................................................................... 34,030 lb (15,459 kg)
M918 .................................................................................................... 30,280 lb (14,216 kg)
M919 .................................................................................................... 37,540 lb (17,028 kg)
M920 .................................................................................................... 30,270 lb (13,730 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
M915A1 ............................................................................................. 50,000 lb (22,680 kg)*
M915 .................................................................................................. 50,000 lb (22,680 kg)*
M916 .................................................................................................... 56,000 lb (25,402 kg)
M917 .................................................................................................... 75,000 lb (34,019 kg)
M918 .................................................................................................... 56,000 lb (25,402 kg)
M919 .................................................................................................... 75,000 lb (34,019 kg)
M920 .................................................................................................... 75,000 lb (34,019 kg)
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
M915A1 ............................................................................................. 105,000 lb (47,627 kg)
M915 .................................................................................................. 105,000 lb (47,627 kg)
M916 .................................................................................................. 106,000 lb (48,082 kg)
M917 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M918 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M919 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M920 .................................................................................................. 130,000 lb (58,968 kg)
Front Axle Empty
M915A1 .................................................................................................... 9,730 lb (4,414 kg)
M915 ......................................................................................................... 9,920 lb (4,500 kg)
M916 ....................................................................................................... 13,370 lb (6,065 kg)
M917 ....................................................................................................... 18,670 lb (8,469 kg)
M918 ....................................................................................................... 11,980 lb (5,434 kg)
M919 ....................................................................................................... 14,280 lb (6,477 kg)
M920 ....................................................................................................... 14,700 lb (6,668 kg)
0003-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
WEIGHTS - CONTINUED
Pusher Axle
M915A1 ............................................................................................................................... N/A
M915 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M916 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M917 ......................... 20,000 lb (9,072 kg) (with 40,000 lb (18,144 kg) on 5th wheel)
M918 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M919 .................................. 20,000 lb (9,072 kg) (with 35,550 lb (16,125 kg) payload)
M920 ......................... 20,000 lb (9,072 kg) (with 44,730 lb (20,290 kg) on 5th wheel)
Front Axle Loaded
M915A1 .................................................................................................. 11,580 lb (5,253 kg)
M915 ......................... 11,055 lb (5,015 kg) (with 30,000 lb (13,608 kg) on 5th wheel)
M916 ......................... 14,570 lb (6,609 kg) (with 38,000 lb (12,700 kg) on 5th wheel)
M917 .................................. 10,780 lb (4,890 kg) (with 40,000 lb (18,144 kg) payload)
M918 .................................... 12,520 lb (5,679 kg) (with 12,000 lb (5,443 kg) payload)
M919 .................................... 9,210 lb (4,178 kg) (with 35,500 lb (16,125 kg) payload)
M920 ........................... 8,870 lb (4,023 kg) (with 44,730 lb (20,290 kg) on 5th wheel)
Front Axle Loaded Capacity
M915A1 .................................................................................................. 13,000 lb (5,897 kg)
Rear Axles Empty
M915A1 .................................................................................................... 9,100 lb (4,128 kg)
M915 ......................................................................................................... 9,710 lb (4,405 kg)
M916 ....................................................................................................... 14,130 lb (6,409 kg)
M917 ....................................................................................................... 15,360 lb (6,967 kg)
M918 ....................................................................................................... 19,300 lb (8,754 kg)
M919 .................................................................................................... 23,260 lb (10,551 kg)
M920 ....................................................................................................... 15,570 lb (7,063 kg)
Rear Axles Loaded
M915A1 ............................................................................................... 36,540 lb (16,574 kg)
M915 ...................... 37,660 lb (17,083 kg) (with 30,000 lb (13,608 kg) on 5th wheel)
M916 ...................... 40,930 lb (18,566 kg) (with 28,000 lb (12,700 kg) on 5th wheel)
M917 ................................ 44,200 lb (20,049 kg) (with 40,000 lb (18,144 kg) payload)
M918 .................................. 30,760 lb (13,953 kg) (with 12,000 lb (5,443 kg) payload)
M919 ................................ 43,880 lb (19,904 kg) (with 35,500 lb (16,125 kg) payload)
M920 ...................... 46,010 lb (20,870 kg) (with 44,730 lb (20,290 kg) on 5th wheel)
Rear Axles Combined Rated Capacity
M915A1 ............................................................................................... 40,000 lb (18,144 kg)
*Tire load limit to 50,000 lb (22,680 kg) GVW
0003-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
DIMENSIONS
Length Overall Chassis (Less Pintle Hook and Lifting Shackles)
M915A1 .......................................................................................................... 21.8 ft (6.70 m)
M915 ............................................................................................................... 22.4 ft (6.83 m)
M916 ............................................................................................................... 24.5 ft (7.50 m)
M917 ............................................................................................................... 29.2 ft (8.91 m)
M918 ............................................................................................................... 29.2 ft (8.91 m)
M919 ............................................................................................................... 31.2 ft (9.52 m)
M920 ............................................................................................................... 26.6 ft (8.11 m)
Length w/M872 Trailer
M915A1 ........................................................................................................ 54.9 ft (16.75 m)
Width (Including Mirrors)
All ................................................................................................................... 10.3 ft (3.14 m)
Width (Mirrors Folded)
M915A1 ............................................................................................................... 8 ft (2.44 m)
M915 through M920 ...................................................................................... 8.75 ft (2.70 m)
Height (Over Exhaust Stack, Empty)
M915A1 .......................................................................................................... 11.8 ft (3.60 m)
M915 ............................................................................................................... 11.2 ft (3.42 m)
M916 ............................................................................................................... 11.8 ft (3.60 m)
M917 ............................................................................................................... 11.8 ft (3.60 m)
M918 ............................................................................................................... 11.8 ft (3.60 m)
M919 ............................................................................................................... 11.8 ft (3.60 m)
M920 ............................................................................................................... 11.8 ft (3.60 m)
Height (Reduced, Over Horns, Empty)
M915A1 ............................................................................................................ 9.6 ft (2.93 m)
M915 ............................................................................................................... 10.7 ft (3.26 m)
M916 ............................................................................................................... 10.7 ft (3.26 m)
M917 .................................................................................................................. Not Reducible
M918 ............................................................................................................... 10.7 ft (3.26 m)
M919 ............................................................................................................... 10.7 ft (3.26 m)
M920 ............................................................................................................... 10.7 ft (3.26 m)
Wheelbase
M915A1 ................................................................................................ 167.00 in. (424.2 cm)
M915 .................................................................................................... 168.25 in. (427.4 cm)
M916 .................................................................................................... 186.00 in. (472.4 cm)
M917 .................................................................................................... 211.00 in. (535.9 cm)
M918 .................................................................................................... 186.00 in. (472.4 cm)
M919 .................................................................................................... 211.00 in. (535.9 cm)
M920 .................................................................................................... 211.00 in. (535.9 cm)
0003-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
DIMENSIONS - CONTINUED
Minimum Ground Clearance (Under Rear Walking Beam Bracket) (Empty)
M915A1 ......................................................................................................... 10 in. (25.4 cm)
M915 ......................................................................................................... 10.25 in. (26.0 cm)
M916 ......................................................................................................... 11.62 in. (29.5 cm)
M917 ......................................................................................................... 12.00 in. (30.5 cm)
M918 ......................................................................................................... 11.62 in. (29.5 cm)
M919 ......................................................................................................... 12.00 in. (30.5 cm)
M920 ......................................................................................................... 11.62 in. (29.5 cm)
Shipping Cube, Minimum
M915Al ............................................................................................. 1,674 cu ft (47.4 cu m)
CAPACITIES
Engine Oil (Including Filters)
M915A1 ............................................................................................................... 44 qt (41.6 l)
M915 through M920 ......................................................................................... 46 qt (43.53 l)
Engine Filters (Refill Capacity)
M915A1 ................................................................................................................ 4.8 qt (4.5 l)
M915 through M920 ............................................................................................. 4 qt (3.78 l)
Engine Bypass Filter (Refill Capacity)
M915A1 ............................................................................................................................... N/A
M915 through M920 ......................................................................................... 14 qt (13.24 l)
Cooling System (Refill Capacity)
M915A1 ......................................................................................................... 17.3 gal (65.5 l)
M915 through M920 ................................................................................... 16.25 qt (61.49 l)
Fuel Tank
Maximum ...................................................................................................... 118 gal (446.63 l)
Usable Capacity
M915A1 ........................................................................................................ 112 gal (423.9 l)
M915 through M920 ..................................................................................... 110 gal (416.3 l)
Power Steering Reservoir
All ............................................................................................................................ 2 qt (1.9 l)
Transmission Oil
M915A1 ............................................................................................................... 8 gal (30.3 l)
M915 through M920 ...................................................................................... 5.5 gal (20.82 l)
Transfer Case
M915A1 ............................................................................................................................... N/A
M915 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M916 through M920 ............................................................................................. 5 qt (4.73 l)
0003-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
CAPACITIES - CONTINUED
Rear Axles (Forward/Rear)
M915A1 ............................................................................................ 40/36 pt (18.93/17.03 l)
M915 ................................................................................................. 40/36 pt (18.93/17.03 l)
M916 through M920 ........................................................................ 34/28 pt (16.09/13.25 l)
Winch Reservoir
M916 and M920 .......................................................................................... 42 gal. (158.97 l)
Winch Drum
M916 and M920 .................................................................................................... 5 qt (4.73 l)
Front Axle
M915A1 ............................................................................................................................... N/A
M915 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M916 through M920 ......................................................................................... 27 pt (12.78 l)
PERFORMANCE
Operating Mode and Drive
M915A1 ............................................................................................................... On-road, 6x4
M915 .................................................................................................................... On-road, 6x4
M916 ..................................................................................................... On and Off road, 6x6
M917 ..................................................................................................... On and Off road, 8x6
M918 ..................................................................................................... On and Off road, 6x6
M919 ..................................................................................................... On and Off road, 8x6
M920 ..................................................................................................... On and Off road, 8x6
Operating Temperatures
Without additional kits ......................................... -25° F (-31.7° C) to +125° F (51.7° C)
With arctic kit ....................................................... -50° F (-45.6° C) to +125° F (51.7° C)
Drawbar pull (maximum at 0.7 coefficient)
M915A1 .................................................................................................. 20,541 lb (9,317 kg)
M915 .................................................................................................... 25,028 lb (11,262 kg)
M916 .................................................................................................... 45,725 lb (20,576 kg)
M917 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M918 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M919 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M920 .................................................................................................... 47,403 lb (21,501 kg)
Maximum Towed Load (w/M872 Trailer – 28,400 lb (12,882.2 kg)
M915A1 ............................................................................................... 54,000 lb (24,494 kg)
M915 .................................................................................................... 54,000 lb (24,494 kg)
Maximum Towed Load (w/M870 Trailer – 40,000 lb (18,144 kg)
M916 and M920 .................................................................................. 60,000 lb (27,216 kg)
0003-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
PERFORMANCE - CONTINUED
Maximum Forward Speed (@ 2100 rpm in top gear)
M915A1 ..................................................................................................... 58 mph (93.3 kph)
M915 ................................................................................................ 66.60 mph (107.16 kph)
M916 through M920 ............................................................................... 59 mph (94.93 kph)
Maximum Sustained Speed
M915A1 (@800/1200 rpm) ............................................................. 1.5/2 mph (2.4/3.2 kph)
M915 (@1300 rpm) ............................................................................... 2.31 mph (3.72 kph)
M916 through M920 .............................................................................. 2.23 mph (3.59 kph)
Speed on Grade (on 3.9% grade) ........................................................ 25.00 mph (40.22 kph)
Maximum Grade at GCWR
M915A1 ............................................................................................................................... 19%
M915 .................................................................................................................................... 17%
M916 through M920 ........................................................................................................... 25%
Angle of Approach (Loaded)
M915A1 ................................................................................................................................. 38°
M915 ...................................................................................................................................... 38°
M916 through M920 ............................................................................................................. 42°
Maximum Side Slope (w/ adequate tractive surface) .......................................................... 10%
Maximum Fording Depth ........................................................................ 20.00 in. (50.80 cm)
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB
Engine
Make and Model
M915A1 ........................................................................... Cummins, NTC-400 Big Cam III
M915 through M920 .............................................................................. Cummins, NTC-400
Type .......................................................................... 4-stroke, Turbocharged, In-line Diesel
Cylinders ..................................................................................................................................... 6
Displacement ...................................................................................................... 855 CID (14 l)
Compression Ratio ............................................................................................................. 14.0:1
Torque (Gross @ 1300 rpm)
M915A1 (Gross @ 1300 rpm) .......................................................... 1,250 lb-ft (1695 N•m)
M915 through M920 (Gross @ 1500 rpm) ...................................... 1,150 lb-ft (1559 N•m)
Maximum horsepower
M915A1 (@ 1300 rpm) .............................................................................. 400 HP (298 kw)
M915 through M920 (@ 2100 rpm) ........................................................... 400 HP (298 kw)
Maximum Governed Speed
M915A1 (Load) ........................................................................................................ 2,100 rpm
M915A1 (No Load) .................................................................................................. 2,460 rpm
M915 through M920 ................................................................................................. 2,100 rpm
0003-7
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
Oil Filter Quantity and Type
M915A1 .................................................. 2, Engine mounted, On-Replacement Elements
M915 through M920 .................................................... 1, Full Flow, Replaceable Element
Engine Retarder (Internal with Engine) ........................................................ Jacobs, Model 30
Fuel System
Type ................................................................................................................... Diesel Injection
Fuel Tank (Quantity and Type) ............. 1, 26-in. (66-cm) Diameter Cylinder, Aluminum
Air Cleaner (Quantity and Type) ...................................................................... 1, Dry Element
Cooling System
Type ......................................................................................................... Radiator, Pressurized
Working Pressure
M915 through M920 ....................................................................................... 10 psi (0.7 bar)
M915A1 ............................................................................................................. 9 psi (0.6 bar)
Transmission and Torque Converter
Make
M915A1 .......................................................................................................................... Allison
M915 through M920 ................................................................................................ Caterpillar
Model
M915A1 (transmission) ........................................................................................ HT 754CRD
M915A1 (torque converter) ................................................................. TC 498, lock-up type
M915 through M920 .................................................................................. D-7155 Overdrive
Type
M915A1 ......................................................................................... 5-speed, Fully Automatic
M915 through M920 ..................................................................... 16-speed Semi Automatic
Shifter .................................................................................................. Remote Control Cables
Electrical System
Type ................................................................................................ Basic 12V, 24V Cranking
Alternator .................................................................................................. 12/24V, 85/15 amps
Circuit Breakers ......................................................... Re-settable, Recycling for Headlamps
Batteries .......................................................................................................... Maintenance-free
Quantity and Type. ................................................................................. 4, Maintenance Free
Volts. .................................................................................................................. 12 Volts Each
Connection. ........................................................................................................ Series/Parallel
Capacity. .................................. 950 Cold Cranking Amps @ 0° F (-18° C) @ 24 Volts
Axles
Make
M915A1 ............................................................................................................................. Eaton
M915 through M920 .................................................................................................. Rockwell
0003-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
Front Axle Type and Model
M915A1 .................................................................................................... I-Beam, EFA 13F3
M915 .................................................................................................................. l-Beam FF931
M916 through M920 ................................................................................. Hypoid, FDS-1807
Rear Axle Type and Model
M915A1 Forward-Rear .............................................................................. Tandem, DS-401P
M915A1 Rear-Rear ....................................................................................... Tandem, RS-401
M915 ............................................................................................................... Tandem, SQHP
M916 through M920 ...................................................................................... Tandem, SUHD
Pusher Axle Model
M917, M919, and M920 ..................................................................................... TKND 967-P
Capacity at Ground
M915A1 Front ........................................................................................ 13,000 lb (5,897 kg)
M915 Front ............................................................................................. 12,000 lb (5,400 kg)
M916 through M920 Front .................................................................... 20,000 lb (9,000 kg)
M915A1 Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear ............................................... 40,000 lb (18,144 kg)
M915 Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear .................................................... 38,000 lb (17,100 kg)
M916 through M920 Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear ........................... 58,000 lb (26,100 kg)
M917, M919, and M920 Pusher Axle .................................................. 20,000 lb (9,000 kg)
Steering Angle (Front)
M915A1 ................................................................................................................................. 40°
M915 ...................................................................................................................................... 32°
M916 through M920 ............................................................................................................. 28°
Gear Ratio
M915A1 ............................................................................................................................ 4.33:1
M915 ................................................................................................................................. 4.44:1
M916 through M920 ........................................................................................................ 6.17:1
Differential Lockup ............................................................................................. Air Controlled
Lubrication ...................................................................................................................... Pressure
Transfer Case (M916 through M920)
Make and Model ..................................................................... Oshkosh 18,000 Series F-U29
Ratio ......................................................................................................................................... 1:1
Steering
Gear and Type ......................................................................................... Ross, Integral Power
M915A1 and M915 ............................................................................... Ross, Integral Power
M916 and M920 ............................................. Ross, Integral Power With Assist Cylinder
Power Steering Pump and Type .................................................. Eaton B165R, Gear Driven
Actuation .......................................................................................... Hydraulic Power Booster
Steering Gear Ratio ............................................................................................................ 20.4:1
0003-9
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
Turning Radius
M915A1 and M915 ........................................................................................ 53.5 ft (16.3 m)
M916 and M918 ................................................................................................ 80 ft (24.4 m)
M917, M919, and M920 ................................................................................ 89.5 ft (27.3 m)
Wheels
Make and Model
M915A1 ......................................................................................................... Firestone, 27404
M915 .......................................................................................................... Budd No. 47890-3
M916 through M920 .................................................................................. Budd No. R49210
Quantity
M915A1 .................................................................................................................................. 11
M915 ....................................................................................................................................... 11
M916 ....................................................................................................................................... 11
M917 ....................................................................................................................................... 14
M918 ....................................................................................................................................... 10
M919 ....................................................................................................................................... 14
M920 ....................................................................................................................................... 14
Size (Diameter x Width)
M915A1 ................................................................................ 22.5 x 8.25 in. (57.2 x 21 cm)
M915 .......................................................................................... 20 x 8 in. (50.8 x 20.3 cm)
M916 through M920 ..................................................................... 24 x 8 in. (61 x 20.3 cm)
Studs and Diameter of Bolt Circle .............. 10 per wheel, 11.25 in. (285.8 mm) diameter
Stud Size ................................................................................................... 1.125 in. (28.6 mm)
Rated Capacity
M915A1 ................................................................................................. 7,000 lb (3,157.2 kg)
M915 ......................................................................................................... 7,280 lb (3,276 kg)
M916 through M920 ................................................................................ 7,430 lb (3,344 kg)
Tires*
Type
M915A1 ............................................................................... Radial Ply, Tubeless, On-Road
M915 .......................................................................................................... Bias Ply, On-Road
M916 through M920 .......................................................................... Bias Ply, On/Off Road
Size
M915A1 .............................................................. 11R22.5, 11 x 22.5 in. (27.9 x 57.2 cm)
M915 ........................................................................................ 10 x 20 in. (25.4 x 50.8 cm)
M916 through M920 ................................................................... 11 x 24 in. (27.9 x 61 cm)
0003-10
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
Weight, with Wheel
M915A1 ......................................................................................................... 208 lb (94.3 kg)
M915 ............................................................................................................ 218 lb (98.88 kg)
M916 through M920 ................................................................................. 326 lb (147.87 kg)
Rated Capacity, On-Road
M915A1 and M915, Single .................................................................. 6,040 lb (2,739.7 kg)
M915A1 and M915, Dual .................................................................... 5,300 lb (2,404.1 kg)
M916 through M920, Single .................................................................... 7,430 lb (3,370 kg)
M916 through M920, Dual ................................................................... 5,220 lb (2,367.8 kg)
Load Range/Ply Rating
M915A1 .............................................................................................................................. G/14
M915 .................................................................................................................................... N/A
M916 through M920 ........................................................................................................... N/A
* Tactical tires, if used, should replace on road tires at all drive wheels.
Tire Air Pressure
M915A1
Front (Maximum Cold Pressure) ................................................................ 105 psi (724 kPa)
Rear (Maximum Cold Pressure) ................................................................... 95 psi (655 kPa)
M915
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ..................................................... 75 psi (517 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................ 80 psi (552 kPa)
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ........................................... 95 psi (655 kPa)
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ...................................................... 50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................. 50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................ 70 psi (483 kPa)
M916
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ..................................................... 90 psi (621 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................ 90 psi (621 kPa)
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ........................................... 95 psi (655 kPa)
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ...................................................... 50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................. 50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................ 90 psi (621 kPa)
M917
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ..................................................... 95 psi (655 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................ 65 psi (448 kPa)
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ......................................... 100 psi (689 kPa)
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ...................................................... 50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................. 60 psi (414 kPa)
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................ 90 psi (621 kPa)
0003-11
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
M918
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ..................................................... 75 psi (517 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................ 65 psi (448 kPa)
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ........................................... 80 psi (552 kPa)
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ...................................................... 50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................. 50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................ 50 psi (345 kPa)
M919
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ................................................... 100 psi (689 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................ 90 psi (621 kPa)
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ......................................... 100 psi (689 kPa)
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) .................................................... 50 psi (3454 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................. 60 psi (414 kPa)
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................ 90 psi (621 kPa)
M920
Front, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ................................................... 100 psi (689 kPa)
Front, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) .......................................... 100 psi (689 kPa)
Front, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ......................................... 100 psi (689 kPa)
Rear, Empty (Maximum Cold Pressure) ...................................................... 50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, 1/2 Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................. 50 psi (345 kPa)
Rear, Full Payload (Maximum Cold Pressure) ............................................ 90 psi (621 kPa)
Brake System
Actuating ........................................................................................... Air Mechanical (S-Cam)
Fail Safe (Spring Brakes)
M915A1 ........................................................................................................ Forward-Rear (2)
M915 through M920 ........................................................ Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear (4)
Pressure Range
M915A1 ...................................................................................... 65-150 psi (448-1034 kPa)
M915 through M920 ..................................................................... 65-125 psi (448-862 kPa)
Fifth Wheel
Type
M915A1 ......................................... Cab Controlled, Air Lock, Sliding, 12 in. (305 mm)
M915 ........................................................... 36 in. (91.4 cm) Diameter Single Oscillating
M916 through M920 ......................... 36 in. (91.4 cm) Diameter Full 4-Way Oscillating
Height
M915 ............................................... Unloaded 53 in. (135 cm), Loaded 50 in. (127 cm)
M916 through M920 ........................................................................ Loaded 64 in. (163 cm)
0003-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
DRIVELINE CHASSIS AND CAB - CONTINUED
Rated Capacity
Vertical ................................................................................................. 40,000 lb (18,144 kg)
Drawbar .............................................................................................. 150,000 lb (68,039 kg)
Plate Diameter/Oscillation. ............................................................. 36 in. (91.4 cm) diameter
Kingpin Size. .................................................................................................... 2 in. (50.8 mm)
M915A1 and M915 through M919 ................................................................ 2 in. (50.8 mm)
M920 ............................................................................................................ 3.5 in. (88.9 mm)
Pitch (Front/Rear) .............................................................................................................. 15/10°
Pintle
Make and Model ............................................................................................ Holland, No. 760
Rated Capacity
M915A1 ........................................................................................ 25 tons (22.7 metric tons)
M915 through M920 .................................................................... 30 tons (27.2 metric tons)
Towing Eyes
Quantity
M915A1 ........................................................................................................... 2 Front, 2 Rear
M915 ................................................................................................................ 2 Front, 2 Rear
M916 ................................................................................................................ 2 Front, 2 Rear
M917 ................................................................................................................ 2 Front, 2 Rear
M918 .............................................................................................................................. 2 Front
M919 .............................................................................................................................. 2 Front
M920 ................................................................................................................ 2 Front, 2 Rear
Maximum load up to 45° angle from long axis (each) ........................ 60,000 lb (27,216 kg)
Cab
Make ........................................................................................................................ AM General
Type ................................................................. 2 Passenger, All Steel, with Butterfly Hood
ACCESSORIES
Floodlights
M915, M916, and M920 ................................................................................................. 2 Fixed
Arctic Heater Kit, Engine (Optional)
M915, M915A1, M916, and M920 ........................................................................... Fuel Fired
Arctic Heater Kit, Personnel (Optional)
M915, M915A1, M916, and M920 ........................................................................... Fuel Fired
Tool Box ........................................................ 1 Under Passenger Seat and Center of Cab
0003-13
TM 9-2320-273-10
0003
ACCESSORIES - CONTINUED
Air Horn
M915A1 ...............................................................................................................
M915 ....................................................................................................................
M916 ....................................................................................................................
M917 ....................................................................................................................
M918 ....................................................................................................................
M919 ....................................................................................................................
M920 ....................................................................................................................
1,
2,
2,
1,
2,
2,
2,
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
Cab
Cab
Cab
Cab
Cab
Cab
Cab
Heater/Defroster .......................................................................... Fresh Air Type, Standard
MILITARY LOAD CLASSIFICATION (MLC)
Vehicle Without Trailer
M915A1 ....................................................................................................................................... 8
M915 ........................................................................................................................................... 8
M916 ......................................................................................................................................... 12
M917 ......................................................................................................................................... 50
M918 ......................................................................................................................................... 21
M919 ......................................................................................................................................... 45
M920 ......................................................................................................................................... 14
Vehicle With Trailer, Unloaded/Loaded
M915A1
M871 .................................................................................................................................. 14/35
M872 .................................................................................................................................. 14/46
M1062 ................................................................................................................................ 11/34
M967 .................................................................................................................................. 13/29
M969 .................................................................................................................................. 14/30
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0003-14
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
THEORY OF OPERATION
INTRODUCTION
This work package (WP) describes how components of the vehicle work and is
provided to give the operator a basic knowledge of the vehicle prior to its use. A
description of each functional system is provided below.
0004-1
0004
TM 9-2320-273-10
0004
POWER TRAIN FUNCTION
The power train is the mechanism by which power is transmitted from the engine to
the drive wheels. The power train is mounted to a channel type frame, and together
they make up the chassis. The vehicle power train consists of a diesel engine and
automatic transmission connected to two rear tandem axles. The engine and
transmission transmit power to the forward-rear axle through a transfer case (if
equipped) and a propeller shaft. An inter-axle propeller shaft connects the forward-rear
axle to the rear-rear axle. The front axle of the M915 and M915A1 is a non-driving
axle as indicated by its 6 x 4 drive designation. The front axle of the M916 through
M920 is a driving front axle indicated by the 8 x 6 or 6 x 6 drive designations. The
front driving axle is driven by a propeller shaft from the transfer case. The M917,
M919, and M920 are equipped with pusher axles located in front of the rear driving
tandem axles. The pusher axles are non-driving axles used to help distribute the weight
of loads carried on the vehicle across three axles instead of two. The pusher axles are
connected to the chassis by swing arms and air bags. The pusher axle is raised and
lowered using the pusher axle controls in the cab to adjust the amount of weight
carried by the pusher axle.
REAR-REAR
AXLE
INTER-AXLE
PROPELLER SHAFT
PRIMARY
PROPELLER
SHAFT
DIESEL ENGINE
FRONT AXLE
Figure 1. Power Train.
0004-2
FORWARD-REAR
AXLE
PUSHER AXLE
TM 9-2320-273-10
0004
POWER TRAIN FUNCTION - CONTINUED
Front and tandem rear axles are connected to the chassis by separate suspension
systems. The front suspension consists of two leaf spring assemblies and shock
absorbers connected to the front axle beam or driving axle and the vehicle frame. The
tandem rear axle suspension features two equalizer beams connecting the forward-rear
and rear-rear axles so both are sprung by a single leaf spring assembly at each side of
the vehicle frame. In addition, a torque rod assembly is connected to the tandem rear
axles and frame rear suspension crossmember to limit the amount of axle housing
rotation when power is transmitted to the ground.
FRAME
TORQUE
ROD
SHOCK
ABSORBER
LEAF
SPRING
FRONT
LEAF AXLE
SPRING
EQUALIZER
BEAM
Figure 2. Front and Rear Suspension.
0004-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0004
ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION FUNCTION
The vehicles are equipped with a Cummins NTC-400 engine. It is an in-line,
six-cylinder, four-stroke, four-cycle, turbocharged diesel. The engine powers the drive
wheels as well as the following accessories:
• Exhaust-driven turbocharger
• Belt-driven water pump
• Belt-driven cooling fan
• Belt-driven alternator
• Gear-driven air compressor
• Gear-driven fuel injector pump
• Gear-driven power steering pump
• Gear-driven engine oil pump
AIR
COMPRESSOR
TURBOCHARGER
WATER
PUMP
ALTERNATOR
COOLING
FAN
ENGINE
OIL
PUMP
Figure 3. Engine and Accessories.
0004-4
FUEL
INJECTOR
PUMP
POWER
STEERING
PUMP
TM 9-2320-273-10
0004
ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION FUNCTION - CONTINUED
The M915 through M920 vehicles use Caterpillar Model D-7155 Overdrive 16-Speed
semi-automatic transmissions with remote air control power shift. Gear selection is
accomplished through a manual control lever mounted on a control tower in the cab.
The manual control lever is connected to the transmission by air hose using operating
air from vehicle air supply. The transmission will not operate unless the transmission
air control valve is pushed in to provide transmission with operating air from vehicle
air supply.
MANUAL
CONTROL
LEVER
TRANSMISSION
AIR CONTROL
VALVE
Figure 4. M915 through M920 Transmission Controls.
0004-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0004
ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION FUNCTION - CONTINUED
The M915A1 vehicles use the Allison HT 754CRD transmission, a fully automatic,
5-speed type. Gear selection is accomplished through a remote control cable connecting
a range selector lever on the side of the transmission to a manual control lever
mounted on a control tower in the cab. During normal driving operation, shifting is
controlled automatically by the transmission modulator control, which determines the
transmission gear range setting from the position of the engine fuel control lever on the
fuel injector pump. The transmission drives the speedometer through a gear and cable.
MANUAL
CONTROL
LEVER
SPEEDOMETER
CABLE
RANGE
SELECTOR
LEVER
Figure 5. M915A1 Transmission Controls.
FUEL SYSTEM FUNCTION
The vehicle fuel system consists of a fuel injection pump driven off the air compressor
which is driven by the engine accessory drive. The fuel injection pump has a built-in
governor that meters fuel through a screen filter, solenoid shutoff valve, and into the
injectors.
CREW PROTECTION KIT FUNCTION
The Crew Protection Armor Kit consists of two armored doors, roof armor, windshield
ballistic glass, floor armor, firewall armor, rear cab armor panels, and an armored
emergency exit. The floor armor consists of three panels and is installed under the seat
and operator floor controls. The door armor assembly consists of an armored door,
hinge, sliding ballistic glass, and armored frame that is mounted to the existing door
opening. The rear armor consists of two panels and rests on the floor armor.
0004-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0004
CREW PROTECTION KIT FUNCTION - CONTINUED
The roof armor consists of two panels that are supported by door frames, rear armor,
and a center support. The windshield and side windows are constructed of ballistic
glass. The remaining armor panels are fastened to the vehicle using attachment brackets
and Grade 8 attachment hardware.
AIR CONDITIONING KIT FUNCTION
Air Conditioning Kit is installed on an armored vehicle to control the temperature
inside the cab. A belt-driven compressor is installed on the engine, a condenser is
installed on the cab roof, an evaporator assembly is installed on the interior of the cab,
and a receiver/dryer is installed on the outside of the cab. Refrigerant is transferred to
each of these components through O-ring sealed hoses. Electrical power is tied into the
existing electrical system on the vehicle. The entire system is controlled by an A/C
ON/OFF switch and fan speed LOW/MEDIUM/HI switch inside the cab.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0004-7/8 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 2
OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
INTRODUCTION
WARNING
Operators must know the location and understand the proper
use of all controls and indicators before operating the tractor.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and
possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
Prior to operating the vehicle, become familiar with the location, function, and use of
all controls and indicators. This work package (WP) describes each control or indicator
by name and function. Illustrations are provided to aid in identifying each control and
indicator.
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Refer to the following tables for information on controls and indicators.
Table 1. Instrument Panel Controls and Indicators.
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
CONTROL
PANEL
CIRCUIT BREAKER AND
RELAY ACCESS PANEL
1
~
~
~~
GLOVE BOX
TACHOGRAPH LOWER CONTROL
PANEL
SECTION
Figure 1. Instrument Panel Controls and Indicators.
Key
1.
Control/Indicator
Instrument Panel
Function
The Instrument Panel is located below the cowl and
windshield, and supports the instrument cluster,
tachograph, control panel, lower control panel, circuit
breaker and relay access panel, and glove box.
0005-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 2. Instrument Cluster and Gauges.
3
5
2
1
M915 THROUGH M920
2
3
4
1
5
M915A1
Figure 2. Instrument Cluster and Gauges.
Key
Control/Indicator
Function
1.
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the amount of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ENGINE RUN switch is in the ON position.
2.
Voltmeter
The VOLTS meter indicates battery voltage from 8–18
Volts. The normal operating range is 12–15 Volts.
Below 11 Volts (Red Area on Voltmeter):
Indicates a low battery or possible malfunction. Stop
truck and report problem to Field Maintenance.
Above 15 Volts (Red Area on Voltmeter):
Indicates batteries are being overcharged due to a
malfunction. Report problem to Field Maintenance.
0005-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
Key
0005
Table 2. Instrument Cluster and Gauges - Continued.
Control/Indicator
Function
Between 11 and 12 Volts (Yellow Area on Voltmeter):
Indicates battery is undercharged. Turn off all electrical
circuits (if possible) and run engine at highest rpm
permitted for the existing conditions. Voltmeter should
indicate charge in green area. Report problem to Field
Maintenance.
12 to 15 Volts (Green Area on Voltmeter):
Indicates normal operating range.
3.
Transmission Oil
Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates temperature of transmission oil in
degrees Fahrenheit and Centigrade. The normal operating
range is 100–250° F (38–121° C).
4.
Transmission Oil
Temperature Gauge
Decal (M915A1
Only)
CAUTION
If transmission oil temperature rises to the red zone,
300° F (149° C), stop tractor in a safe place, shift to
NEUTRAL position, and operate engine at 1,500
rpm until gauge indicator is in normal operating
temperature. If temperature cannot be lowered to
normal operating temperature, below 300° F
(149° C), after operating in neutral for 3 minutes,
shut down engine and notify Field Maintenance.
Continued operation at excessive temperatures will
cause damage to transmission.
This decal, located on the instrument cluster directly
above the TRANS OIL TEMP gauge, is a quick
reference for the three color-coded operating ranges
on the transmission oil temperature gauge.
5.
Oil Pressure
Gauge
CAUTION
The minimum engine oil pressure at 1,700–2,100
rpm is 30 psi (207 kPa) for safe engine operation.
At idle, the minimum safe engine oil pressure is
10 psi (69 kPa). If engine oil pressure is below
minimum levels, shut down engine immediately and
investigate cause. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment.
This gauge indicates engine oil pressure with engine
running. At 2,100 rpm rated engine speed, the normal
oil pressure range is 35–50 psi (241–345 kPa). At idle,
minimum oil pressure limit is 10 psi (69 kPa).
0005-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 3. Instrument Cluster, Gauges, and Indicator.
1
2
4
3
1
2
4
3
Figure 3. Instrument Cluster, Gauges, and Indicator.
Key
1.
Control/Indicator
FRONT AIR PSI
Gauge
Function
WARNING
Operating tractor with air pressure below the normal
operating range indicates a loss in air supply and
will limit the number of times the brakes can be
applied before losing front wheel brakes. Failure to
stop tractor and allow air pressure to build up may
result in damage to equipment and possible injury
or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
This gauge registers the amount of air pressure in the
front brake system. Normal operating range is
105–140 psi (724–965 kPa) for M915A1 or
105–120 psi (724–827 kPa) for M915 through M920
vehicles.
0005-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
Key
2.
0005
Table 3. Instrument Cluster, Gauges, and Indicator - Continued.
Control/Indicator
Function
LOW AIR
PRESSURE Indicator
WARNING
If low pressure warning lamp illuminates and buzzer
sounds while driving tractor, stop immediately and
investigate the cause. Failure to comply may result
in damage to equipment and possible injury or death
to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of
an injury.
This indicator illuminates red when either the front or
rear air system pressure is between 64–76 psi
(441–524 kPa) and below. The low air pressure buzzer
will sound at the same time the LOW AIR
PRESSURE indicator comes on.
3.
REAR AIR PSI
Gauge
WARNING
Operating tractor with air pressure below the normal
operating range indicates a loss in air supply and
will limit the number of times the brakes can be
applied before the forward-rear axle emergency
park/spring brakes are automatically activated.
Failure to stop tractor and allow air pressure to
build up may result in damage to equipment and
possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
This gauge registers the amount of air pressure in the
rear brake system. Normal operating range is
105–140 psi (724–965 kPa) for M915A1 or
105–120 psi (724–827 kPa) for M915 through M920
vehicles.
4.
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Gauge
CAUTION
Do not operate vehicle if coolant temperature rises
above 220° F (104° C) or engine overheating will
occur. Shut down engine and do not start until
coolant temperature is in normal range. If problem
persists, notify Field Maintenance. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment.
The TEMP gauge (M915A1) or WATER gauge (M915
through M920) indicates engine coolant temperature in
degrees Fahrenheit and Centigrade. The normal
operating range is 180–200° F (82–93° C) for M915A1
and 165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through M920
vehicles.
0005-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 4. Engine Run Switch, Start Button, and Cigar Lighter/Utility Plug.
2
1
3
Figure 4. Engine Run Switch, Start Button, and Cigar Lighter/Utility Plug.
Key
Control/Indicator
Function
1.
ENGINE RUN
The ENGINE RUN switch is a three-position, key
Switch
operated switch. To operate switch, insert key and turn
switch to ON position. In the ON position, power to the
ignition and accessories is connected; the low oil pressure
and parking brake warning lamps will illuminate, and if
air system pressures are below 60 psi (414 kPa), the low
air pressure lamp and warning buzzer will come on. After
starting engine and with all systems operational, the low
oil pressure lamp, low air pressure lamp, and warning
buzzer will go off. The parking brake warning lamp will
remain on until the brake is released. The engine run
switch is used to shut down the engine and disconnect
power to all accessories by turning switch to OFF
position.
2.
ENGINE START
Button
CAUTION
Do not depress and hold engine start button for
more than 15 seconds at a time. Allow two minute
intervals between cranking engine for starter motor
to cool. Once engine is running, do not depress start
button. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
The ENGINE START button is operated by depressing
and holding the button down until the engine starts.
Release button once engine starts.
3.
CIGAR
LIGHTER/Utility
Plug
The utility plug, located on the instrument cluster
adjacent to the ENGINE START button, is used as a
12V power source for accessories.
0005-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 5. Tachograph.
1
RPM
HAND
RPM
HAND
CLOCK
HANDS
MPH
HAND
M915 THROUGH M920
MPH
HAND
M915A1
KEY
Key
1.
Control/Indicator
Tachograph
CHART
1
Figure 5. Tachograph.
Function
The Tachograph, located on the instrument panel to the
right of the instrument cluster, indicates and records the
following data on a 7-day graph chart:
Ground speed is indicated by the mph hand.
Engine speed is indicated by the rpm hand.
Distance traveled is indicated in miles on the odometer.
Hours and minutes are indicated by analog clock hands.
CAUTION
Do not operate tractor without tachograph chart
installed or damage to tachograph will result.
The chart is replaced by opening the front of the
tachograph. Insert key in bezel lock and turn key
counterclockwise until tachograph can be opened.
Swing tachograph down to its horizontal position and
remove and replace the chart. Ensure new chart is
seated prior to closing.
0005-7
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 6. Ether Quick-Start and Clearance Lamps Buttons and Indicators.
4
4
1
1
2
3
2
Figure 6. Ether Quick-Start and Clearance Lamps Buttons and Indicators.
Key
Control/Indicator
Function
1.
Clearance Lamp
This button is depressed to flash the tractor and trailer
Button
clearance and marker lamps on and off.
2.
CL LPS (Clearance
This indicator is designed to aid the operator in locating
Lamps) Indicator
the clearance lamps button. This indicator will illuminate
when the LIGHTS switch is pulled out to the first and
second positions, and its brightness can be adjusted by
rotating the LIGHTS switch knob.
3.
ETHER Indicator
The ETHER indicator is designed to aid the operator in
(M915A1 Only)
locating the ether quick-start push button. This indicator
will illuminate when the LIGHTS switch is pulled out to
the first and second positions, and its brightness can be
adjusted by rotating the LIGHTS switch knob.
4.
Ether Quick-Start
This button is depressed to inject ether in the engine
Button
intake manifold for cold weather starting. Depress and
release switch button to operate.
0005-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 7. Control Panel Indicators.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Figure 7. Control Panel Indicators.
Control/Indicator
Function
ENG OIL Indicator
This indicator illuminates red when engine oil pressure is
below 10 psi (69 kPa) for M915A1 or 5 psi (34 kPa) for
M915 through M920 vehicles, the minimum operating
limit.
ENG TEMP Indicator This indicator illuminates red when engine coolant
temperature exceeds 220° F (104° C) for M915A1 or
225° F (107° C) for M915 through M920 vehicles, the
maximum operating limit.
DIFF LOCK OUT
This indicator illuminates red when the INTERAXLE
Indicator
DIFFERENTIAL control is placed in the LOCK position
and inter-axle differentials are engaged. On M916–M920
the front driving axle is also locked.
PTO Indicator (M916 This red light comes on when the PTO control is
through M920)
engaged.
PARK BRAKE
This indicator illuminates red when SYSTEM PARK
Indicator
control knob is pulled out.
HIGH BEAM
The HIGH BEAM indicator illuminates blue when the
Indicator
cab floor-mounted headlamp dimmer switch is depressed
for high beam operation.
0005-9
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 8. Lights and Engine Retarder Switch.
1
2
3
4
5
Key
1.
2.
Figure 8. Lights and Engine Retarder Switch.
Control/Indicator
Function
LIGHTS Switch
CAUTION
Do not operate service lamps for extended periods
of time with engine off. Failure to comply may
prevent engine from starting due to run down
batteries.
ENGINE
RETARDER
Switch
The LIGHTS switch is a combination switch and
rheostat that controls all tractor service lamps. Pulling
the LIGHTS switch knob out to the first position turns
on the marker/turn signal lamps, service tail and stop
lamps, clearance lamps, and instrument panel lamps.
Pulling the LIGHT switch knob out to the second
position turns on the service head lamps in addition to
the same lamps operated in the first position. Turning
the LIGHTS switch knob when in the first or second
position will dim or brighten the instrument panel
lights.
This switch is located on the control panel to the right
of the LIGHTS switch and controls the number of
engine cylinders activated when the engine retarder
foot switch is depressed. The HIGH position
designates all 6 cylinders for maximum engine
braking, MED position designates 4 cylinders, and
LOW position provides 2 cylinders for minimum
engine braking.
0005-10
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 8. Lights and Engine Retarder Switch - Continued.
Key
Control/Indicator
Function
WARNING
Before backing operations, ensure the backup alarm
override switch is in the down position. Do not
disable the alarm when personnel or equipment
safety may be sacrificed as a result. Failure to
comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
3.
BACKUP
ALARM Override
Switch (M916
through M920)
4.
WORK LAMPS
Switch
(M916 and M920)
5.
OPERATION
Switch
This switch is located on the control panel under the
engine retarder switch and allows the operator to
disable the backup alarm in “Quiet Zones”. Place this
switch in the up position to turn off the backup alarm.
Return the switch to the down position to activate the
backup alarm.
This switch is located on the control panel under the
backup alarm override switch. Place this switch in the
ON position to turn the stationary work lamps on, and
the OFF position to turn off.
CAUTION
Do not operate blackout lamps for extended periods
of time with engine off. Failure to comply may
prevent engine from starting due to run down
batteries.
This switch is a two-position switch used to select
either the blackout or service lamps, but does not turn
lamps on. The LIGHTS switch is used to turn all
lamps on and off. To operate this switch, pull the
toggle out and move to either position. This feature
prevents accidental engagement or disengagement of
the service lamps. In the NORMAL position, all
blackout lamps are inoperable and all service lamps are
operable. In the BLACKOUT position all service
lamps, backup lamps, and horn are automatically
locked out, and the blackout marker, tail, and stop
lamps will operate when the LIGHTS switch is pulled
to its first position. Pulling the LIGHTS switch to its
second position turns on the blackout drive lamps in
addition to the same blackout lamps operated in the
first position. The blackout stop lamps (brake lights)
will operate with the LIGHTS switch in either
position.
0005-11
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 9. Wiper and Washer Controls and Indicators.
3
4
1
2
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
Figure 9. Wiper and Washer Controls and Indicators.
Control/Indicator
Function
WIPER Control
The WIPER control is a valve for operating the
windshield wiper motor. Pull out the WIPER control knob
to operate the pneumatic wiper motor, and rotate the
switch knob for variable HI and LOW speed adjustment.
Push in the knob to turn the wipers off.
WIPER Indicator
This indicator is designed to aid the operator in locating
the WIPER switch. This indicator will illuminate when
the LIGHTS switch is pulled out to the first and second
positions, and its brightness can be adjusted by rotating
the LIGHTS switch knob.
WASHER Indicator
This indicator, located on the control panel to the right of
the WIPER indicator, is designed to aid the operator in
locating the WASHER switch. This indicator will
illuminate when the LIGHTS switch is pulled out to the
first and second positions, and its brightness can be
adjusted by rotating the LIGHTS switch knob.
WASHER Control
The WASHER Control, located on the control panel
below the WASHER indicator, is a valve for operating
the windshield washer pump. Depress and hold the
WASHER Control knob to spray cleaning compound on
the windshield. Release knob to stop spray.
0005-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 10. Inter-Axle Differential Control.
1
1
M916 THROUGH M920
M915 and M915A1
Key
1.
Figure 10. Inter-Axle Differential Control.
Control/Indicator
Function
INTER-AXLE
CAUTION
DIFFERENTIAL
Never move the inter-axle differential control to the
Control
LOCK position while tractor is moving or any
wheel is spinning or damage to equipment will
result.
This control is a valve for operating the air actuated
inter-axle differential lockup on all models. This
control engages the front driving axle on the M916
through M920.
M915 and M915A1
To engage the differential lock, bring tractor to a
complete stop and move control lever to LOCK
position. The DIFF LOCK OUT indicator will
illuminate red when control lever is in LOCK
position. To disengage the differential lock, move
the control lever to UNLOCK position while the
tractor is moving.
M916 through M920
To engage the differential lock and engage the front
driving axle, bring tractor to a complete stop and
move control lever to LOCK position. The DIFF
LOCK OUT indicator will illuminate red when
control lever is in LOCK position. To disengage the
differential lock, let up on accelerator and move the
control lever to UNLOCK position temporarily, then
place switch in the center (OFF) position for normal
driving while the tractor is moving.
0005-13
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 11. Tractor and Trailer Parking Brake Controls.
1
2
Key
1.
Figure 11. Tractor and Trailer Parking Brake Controls.
Control/Indicator
Function
TRAILER AIR
CAUTION
SUPPLY Control
If air system pressure drops to 60 psi (414 kPa) as a
(M915, M916, M917,
result of a release of system pressure or an air leak,
M920, and M915A1)
the trailer air supply protection valve will
automatically trip and apply the trailer spring brakes
to prevent the tractor spring brakes from locking up.
Failure to stop tractor and allow air system pressure
to build up will result in damage to equipment.
This control is a valve used to supply compressed air
to the trailer air reservoirs and brakes. Whenever the
SYSTEM PARK control is pulled out to apply the
tractor parking brakes, the TRAILER AIR SUPPLY
control knob will automatically pop out to apply the
trailer brakes. To release the trailer brakes, push in the
TRAILER AIR SUPPLY control knob after releasing
the tractor parking brakes.
0005-14
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 11. Tractor and Trailer Parking Brake Controls - Continued.
Key
2.
Control/Indicator
SYSTEM PARK
Control
Function
WARNING
Never use the parking brake in place of the service
brake for stopping the tractor. Sudden lockup of
spring brakes may result in loss of control of tractor
and possible damage to equipment and injury or
death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
The SYSTEM PARK control is a valve used to apply
or release the parking brakes. To apply the parking
brakes, bring tractor to a complete stop, then pull the
SYSTEM PARK control knob out. The PARK
BRAKE indicator will illuminate red when the
SYSTEM PARK Control is in the out position. Push
the knob in to release the parking brakes. If tractor is
connected to a trailer, push in the TRAILER AIR
SUPPLY control knob after releasing the tractor
parking brakes.
0005-15
TM 9-2320-273-10
1
2
0005
Table 12. Lower Control Panel.
5
6
4
3
7
ADJUSTMENT
KNOB
CENTER
BUTTON
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Figure 12. Lower Control Panel.
Control/Indicator
Function
THROTTLE Control This control is used for setting engine speed for operating
(M916 through
the PTO or maintaining fast idle. Press the center of the
M920)
button and pull out the control knob until desired engine
speed set. Release the center button. For fine tuning, turn
adjustment knob. Press button and push in control to
return engine to idle.
HEAT Control
This knob opens and closes a valve that controls the
amount of engine coolant flowing through the heater core.
To increase the heater temperature, pull the HEAT
control knob out, and to decrease the temperature, push
knob in.
FAN Switch
The heater fan has three speeds controlled by a 4-position
rotary switch. Turn the FAN switch knob clockwise to
LOW, MED, or HIGH positions to operate the fan. Turn
knob counterclockwise to OFF position to stop fan motor.
DRIVER Control
This knob operates the air vents for the driver side of
cab. Pull DRIVER control knob out to divert air to the
driver side; push in knob to close air vents.
PASSENGER
This knob operates the heater air vents for the passenger
Control
side of cab. Pull PASSENGER control knob out to divert
air to passenger side; push in knob to close air vents.
FRESH VENT
This knob controls the fresh air vent. Pull FRESH VENT
Control
control knob out to send fresh air to passenger side; push
in knob to close fresh air vent.
RECIR VENT
This knob controls the recirculation vent. Pull RECIR
Control
VENT control knob out to recirculate cab air through the
heater; push in knob to close vent.
0005-16
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 13. Air Filter Restriction Indicator.
RESET BUTTON
1
1
WINDOW
WINDOW
RESET BUTTON
M915 THROUGH M920
Key
1.
M915A1
Figure 13. Air Filter Restriction Indicator.
Control/Indicator
Function
Air Filter Restriction
NOTE
Indicator
Air cleaner maintenance is required when red band
is visible on air filter restriction indicator. Notify
Field Maintenance to service air filter.
This indicator, mounted on the instrument panel
adjacent to the lower control panel, is designed to
indicate when the engine air cleaner requires cleaning.
A clear or green band visible through the window
indicates there is adequate air flow through the air
cleaner; a yellow or red band indicates the air cleaner
is restricted and must be cleaned. Resetting is
accomplished by depressing a reset button.
0005-17
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 14. Circuit Breaker and Relay Access Panel.
SCREWS
1
Key
1.
Figure 14. Circuit Breaker and Relay Access Panel.
Control/Indicator
Function
Panel Cover
There is a panel cover that must be unlocked and opened
to gain access to the circuit breaker and relay access
panel. To open panel, turn three slotted head screws one
quarter turn counterclockwise, and swing the cover down.
To close cover, raise cover and turn three screws one
quarter turn clockwise.
0005-18
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 15. Circuit Breaker and Relays.
1
2
3
Key
1.
2.
3.
Figure 15. Circuit Breaker and Relays.
Control/Indicator
Function
Service, Blackout,
There are nine relays on this panel that function when the
and Trailer Lamp
tractor and trailer lamp switches are switched on and off.
Relays
There is nothing the operator can do to these relays if a
problem is experienced in one of the lamp systems; notify
Field Maintenance.
Starter Relay
This relay energizes and closes the starter solenoid
circuit. Operator can do nothing to this relay if the starter
becomes inoperable; notify Field Maintenance.
Relay Identification
Below each relay is an identification decal that identifies
Decals
the component or components controlled by that relay.
Field Maintenance uses the decals to identify relays when
troubleshooting a problem.
0005-19
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 16. Circuit Breakers and Glove Compartment Door.
1
KNOB
3
2
Key
1.
2.
Figure 16. Circuit Breakers and Glove Compartment Door.
Control/Indicator
Function
Glove Compartment The glove compartment door is opened by turning the
Door
fastener knob a quarter turn and swinging the door down.
To close, swing door up and latch by turning knob.
Circuit Breaker
Each circuit breaker is identified by a number (e.g., CB5)
Identification Decals directly below its reset button. Each number corresponds
to an electrical circuit protected by that circuit breaker.
Field Maintenance uses the numbers to identify circuit
breakers when troubleshooting a problem.
0005-20
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 16. Circuit Breakers and Glove Compartment Door - Continued.
Key
3.
Control/Indicator
Circuit Breaker
Buttons
Function
WARNING
Do not attempt to check and reset circuit breakers
while driving the tractor. Always pull safely to side
of road first. If tractor cannot be safely operated due
to a circuit breaker that cannot be reset, do not
attempt to operate tractor. Failure to comply may
result in damage to equipment or possible injury or
death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
There are nine 20 amp circuit breakers on the access
panel. If an electrical component will not function or
ceases to function (for example, the heater fan stops
with FAN switch in HIGH position), the circuit
breaker may have tripped and should be checked and
reset. To reset any circuit breaker, open panel cover,
identify circuit breaker by its number or if button is
out, and depress the button. If button remains in after
depressing it and component becomes operational,
close panel cover. If circuit breaker trips again, an
overload or short in the circuit has taken place. If
tractor can be safely operated without the affected
electrical item, complete mission and notify Field
Maintenance. If tractor cannot be safely operated,
secure tractor and notify Field Maintenance.
0005-21
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 17. Cab Floor Mounted Controls.
1
5
Key
1.
2.
3.
Figure
Control/Indicator
Headlamp Dimmer
Switch
Decontamination
Apparatus
Accelerator Pedal
4
3
2
17. Cab Floor Mounted Controls.
Function
To operate the service lamp high beams, pull the LIGHTS
switch out to the second position and depress and release
the floor-mounted foot switch. The HIGH BEAM
indicator on the control panel will illuminate blue when
the high beams are on. To dim head lamps, depress and
release foot switch again.
NOTE
The decontamination apparatus is used to spray a
decontaminating agent on vehicles and equipment to
reduce levels of chemical toxic agents to the
minimum extent to make them safe and allow for
their continued operation.
On M915 through M920 vehicles, a decontamination
apparatus is mounted under the lower control panel. To
use, remove from bracket, pull ring pin, lift handle
until it locks, aim and press top. Maintenance
requirements are in TM 3-4230-204-12&P.
To increase engine speed, place right foot on
floor-mounted accelerator pedal and press down
gradually. To reduce engine speed, let up on pedal.
0005-22
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 17. Cab Floor Mounted Controls - Continued.
Key
4.
Control/Indicator
Service Brake Pedal
Function
NOTE
If tractor is coupled to trailer, the trailer service
brakes will also be applied when using the tractor
service brake pedal.
To apply service brakes, place right foot on service
brake pedal and push down in proportion to the
amount of braking force required to stop or hold
tractor from moving.
5.
Engine Retarder
Foot Switch
NOTE
The accelerator pedal must be released to the full up
position before the engine retarder foot switch will
operate engine retarder.
To activate the engine retarder, identify driving
conditions and set the ENGINE RETARDER switch,
located on the control panel, for the amount of engine
braking desired. Release accelerator pedal and depress
floor-mounted foot pedal to engage engine retarder.
Release foot pedal to disengage engine retarder.
0005-23
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 18. Range Selector Control M915A1.
PUSH
1
BUTTON
SELECTOR
LEVER
GEAR RANGE
INDICATOR
GEAR RANGE
DIAL
Key
1.
Figure 18. Range Selector Control M915A1.
Control/Indicator
Function
Transmission Range
CAUTION
Selector Control
Do not allow tractor to coast in neutral (N)
(M915A1)
position. Failure to comply may result in severe
damage to transmission and loss of engine braking.
NOTE
The selector lever push button must always be
depressed to move the selector lever except when
manually up-shifting from 1-2 to 1-3, 1-3 to 1-4,
and 1-4 to 1-5.
The tractor engine will not crank or start unless
transmission selector lever is in neutral (N)
position.
The gear range dial and indicator will illuminate
when the LIGHTS switch is in the 1st and 2nd
positions.
0005-24
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 18. Range Selector Control M915A1 - Continued.
Key
Control/Indicator
Transmission Range
Selector Control
(M915A1)
Function
To operate the selector control, apply service brakes,
release parking brakes, depress push button, and move
selector lever until gear range indicator is aligned with
the desired gear position on the gear range dial.
Automatic upshift and downshift points are influenced by
the pressure of your foot on the accelerator pedal. For
example, when the accelerator pedal is fully depressed,
the transmission will automatically upshift near the
governed speed of the engine (2,100 rpm). A partially
depressed accelerator pedal will cause upshifts to occur at
a lower engine speed.
In all forward gear ranges, the vehicle will start in first
gear and automatically upshift to the highest gear shown
in the gear range selected. For example, in gear range
1-5, the vehicle will start in first gear and upshift
automatically through second gear, third gear, fourth
gear, and fifth gear. If gear range 1-3 is selected, the
transmission will automatically upshift from first gear
through second gear, and into third gear. It will not
upshift beyond third gear until the selector lever is
manually moved to a higher gear range.
Manual downshifts, performed by depressing the push
button and moving the selector lever, should be avoided
when the vehicle is above the maximum speed obtainable
in the next lower gear. If a downshift or shift to
REVERSE (R) is made at too high a speed, the
transmission hydraulic system automatically prevents the
shift from taking place until a safe lower speed is
reached.
Normally, service brakes and the engine retarder should
be used, as needed, to slow the vehicle to an acceptable
speed where the transmission may be downshifted.
0005-25
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 19. Fifth Wheel Control Lever M915A1.
1
Key
1.
Figure 19.
Control/Indicator
Fifth Wheel Control
Lever (M915A1)
Fifth Wheel Control Lever M915A1.
Function
Moving the fifth wheel control lever inside the cab to the
UNLOCK position operates an air cylinder under the fifth
wheel which allows it to travel on the slide track a total
of 12 inches (30.5 cm) forward or backward. This feature
allows for adjustment of amount of cargo load carried by
the rear tandem axles, within rated capacity.
0005-26
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 20. Steering Wheel and Column Mounted Controls.
2
1
3
5
4
Key
Figure 20. Steering Wheel and Column Mounted Controls.
Control/Indicator
Function
WARNING
Hazard switch will override brake lights when in
use. Use hand signals and exercise extra care when
using hazard switch. Failure to comply may result in
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
1.
Hazard Switch
To turn on hazard/emergency flashers, pull out
hazard/emergency flasher switch.
2.
Horn Button
To sound electric horn, push horn button.
CAUTION
Always return trailer brake hand control to OFF/UP
position. Failure to comply may result in trailer
brakes burning up.
3.
Trailer Brake
Hand Control
To apply trailer brakes, pull down trailer brake hand
control. The trailer brake hand control can be used on
grades, when at a standstill, to prevent tractor from
rolling backward when moving right foot from brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel in full steer position
for more than 10 seconds. Failure to comply may
result in overheating of power steering fluid and
may cause damage to equipment.
4.
Steering Wheel
5.
Turn Signal Lever
Rotate steering wheel clockwise to rotate front wheels
right, and counterclockwise to rotate front wheels left.
To turn on right turn signal, push turn signal lever up.
To turn on left turn signal, push turn signal lever
down.
0005-27
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 21. Transmission Air Control M915 through M920, Fan Clutch Actuator
Override M919, PTO Control M916 and M920, and Pusher Axle Controls M917,
M919, and M920.
3
2
CONTROL
PRESSURE
KNOB
SET
SCREW
AIR PRESSURE
GAUGE
PUSHER
AXLE
CONTROL
1
4
Figure 21. Transmission Air Control M915 through M920, PTO Control M916 and
M920, Fan Clutch Actuator Override M919, and Pusher Axle Controls M917, M919,
and M920.
Key
Control/Indicator
Function
1.
Power Take-Off
With transmission in 1st gear, pull cable knob to engage
Control
power take-off unit, then place transmission in neutral.
(M916 and M920)
Push cable knob to disengage power take-off unit. When
PTO has disengaged, the indicator light will go off.
2.
Fan Clutch Actuator The override switch is used during mixing operations of
Override
the Concrete-Mobil® mixer to prevent the fan clutch
(M919 Only)
from disengaging. Refer to TM 5-3895-372-10 for
specific operation instructions. Place the switch in the
override on position to override the fan clutch actuator
and in the automatic position for normal fan clutch
operation.
0005-28
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 21. Transmission Air Control M915 through M920, Fan Clutch Actuator
Override M919, PTO Control M916 and M920, and Pusher Axle Controls M917,
M919, and M920 - Continued.
Key
3.
Control/Indicator
Pusher Axle Control
(M917, M919, and
M920)
Function
Use this control panel to lower and raise the pusher axle
and to pressurize the system to adjust the amount of
weight carried by the pusher axle.
TO LOWER PUSHER AXLE:
Rotate the control pressure knob counterclockwise to
remove pressure from the pusher axle. Pressure gauge
should indicate 0 psi. Place the pusher axle raise/lower
control in the axle down position.
TO ADJUST LOAD ON THE PUSHER AXLE:
Rotate the control pressure knob clockwise (toward +)
until the air pressure gauge indicates the proper
pressure setting for the desired load. Tighten the
setscrew to lock the control pressure knob at the
pressure selected. With setscrew tightened at a
particular setting, the control pressure knob can be
closed (toward -) and reset to the previous setting.
CAUTION
Do not rotate the control knob counterclockwise to
raise axle. This causes the air to exhaust and allows
the bag to fold unevenly which can result in damage
to air bags.
TO RAISE THE PUSHER AXLE:
Set the axle raise/lower control at the AXLE LIFT
position.
4.
Transmission Air
Control
NOTE
The transmission will neutralize if the vehicle
auxiliary air supply drops below 60 psi.
The auxiliary air supply does not register at the
vehicles main air gauges. The auxiliary air supply
will provide approximately 14 to 18 transmission
shifts after loss of vehicle main air supply.
Push in on valve to provide the transmission with
operating air from vehicle supply. When the vehicle air
supply is 80 psi or greater, the charging valve will stay
in when released. Pull out on the charging valve to
remove air supply. The transmission will neutralize
automatically.
0005-29
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 22. Transmission Ratio Selector, M915 through M920.
1
GEAR
RANGE
DIAL
Key
1.
STRIP HEATER
INDICATOR LIGHT
Figure 22. Transmission Ratio Selector, M915 through M920.
Control/Indicator
Function
Transmission Ratio
CAUTION
Selector (M915
The transmission clutch disengages at engine speeds
through M920)
of 1,100 rpm or less causing loss of braking
efficiency of the engine as a brake. This condition
can damage the transmission if held in low rpm
range over 12 seconds. Down shifting within this
time is mandatory.
The drivelines must be disconnected when towing
the truck, otherwise the transmission will be
damaged.
Use the service brakes to hold truck while stopped
on a grade. Do not use the transmission to hold the
truck as damage may result.
Do not use the inhibitor override while the truck is
in motion.
0005-30
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 22. Transmission Ratio Selector, M915 through M920 - Continued.
Key
Control/Indicator
Transmission Ratio
Selector (M915
through M920)
Function
Place the ratio selector in neutral (N) to start the engine.
The engine will not start with the selector lever in any
other position. Place the ratio selector in R1 or R2 to
back up. R1 should be used for heavy loads or where a
slower reverse speed is required due to congestion or
other hazards. Move the ratio selector forward or
rearward to select the desired gear ratio position. The
transmission will remain in the previously selected
position until the ratio selector is moved into the notch
adjacent to the newly selected gear ratio. Progression
through the full range of 16 forward gear ratios may be
done two steps at a time up to 11th gear ratio. A built-in
inhibitor prevents more than a two step advance (or one
step advance from 11th–16th positions). The inhibitor
override is provided to allow selection of the proper gear
ratio for startup. This is done by pulling upward on the
ratio selector and may be used only when the truck is at a
standstill. Do not use the inhibitor override when the
truck is in motion.
The transmission is equipped with strip heaters to warm
the transmission during cold weather. The strip heaters
are thermostatically controlled for automatic operation at
temperatures below 5° F (-15° C). The indicator light on
the console illuminates with the key on when the strip
heaters are on. Do not operate the transmission until the
indicator light goes off.
0005-31
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 23. Seat Adjustment Controls.
1
2
3
6
5
5
7
4
OPERATOR SEAT
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
8
9
COMPANION SEAT
Figure 23. Seat Adjustment Controls.
Control/Indicator
Function
Ratchet Handle
Used to increase or decrease preload on seat.
Backrest Angle
Used to tilt backrest forward or rearward in three
Adjustment Lever
positions.
Preload Indicator
Indicator will be in the center position when seat preload
is set for proper weight.
Forward and
Lever will unlock seat so seat can be moved forward or
Backward Seat
rearward.
Adjustment Lever
Seatbelt
Used for safety when operating vehicle.
Ratchet Trip Lever
Used to lock ratchet handle in locked position after
preload is set.
Companion Seat
Used to tilt backrest forward or rearward in three
Backrest Angle
positions.
Adjustment Lever
Companion Seat
Used to tilt seat cushion in three positions.
Cushion Adjustment
Lever
Companion Seat
Lever will unlock seat so seat can be moved forward or
Forward and
rearward.
Rearward Seat
Adjustment Lever
0005-32
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 24. Additional Cab Controls.
1
7
2
3
6
4
5
Key
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Figure 24. Additional Cab Controls.
Control/Indicator
Function
Air Horn Chain
To sound air horn, pull downward on chain. Release
chain to silence air horn.
Cab Door Window
To lower left window glass, rotate left window regulator
Regulator Handle
handle clockwise. To raise left window glass, rotate left
window regulator handle counterclockwise. To lower
right window glass rotate right window regulator handle
counterclockwise. To raise right window glass, rotate
right window regulator handle clockwise.
Ash Tray
To open ash tray, lift top.
Driver Fresh Air
To bring fresh air into cab, push handle forward. To
Vent
exhaust inside air from cab, pull fresh air vent back. To
close fresh air vent, place handle in center position.
Cab Door Inside
To open cab door from inside cab, pull cab door handle.
Handle
Lock knob will unlock automatically when door handle
inside is pulled.
Cab Vent Window
Raise lever to unlock window. Push outward on vent
Handle
window handle to open vent window. Pull inward on vent
window handle to close vent window.
Door Lock Knobs
Push down lock knob to lock doors. Pull lock knob up to
unlock doors. Door lock knob will unlock automatically
when inside door handle is pulled, or door is unlocked
with a key from the outside.
0005-33
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 25. Crew Protection Cab Doors, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and
M920P1.
2
3
1
6
7
8
4
5
Figure 25. Crew Protection Cab Doors, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and
M920P1.
Key
Control/Indicator
Function
NOTE
Crew protection cab doors are applicable to
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and
M920P1 vehicles equipped with Crew Protection
Kit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Glove Box Handle
Glove Box Latch
Window Latch
Exterior Door
Handle
Grab Handle
Door Latch
Interior Door
Handle
Interior Grab
Handle
Used to open glove box.
Unscrew both latches to open glove box door.
Lift up latch and slide window to open or close.
Allows driver or passenger side door to be opened
from the outside.
Provides a hand hold for opening the door.
Secures side door closed.
Allows driver or passenger side door to be opened
from the inside.
Provides a hand hold for entering or existing the
vehicle.
0005-34
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 26. Defroster Fans, Dome, and Map Lamps.
2
1
3
Key
1.
2.
3.
Figure 26. Defroster Fans, Dome, and Map Lamps.
Control/Indicator
Function
Defroster Fans
To operate fan at high speed, turn knob at base of fan
clockwise. To operate fan at slower speeds, turn knob
further clockwise. To turn fan OFF, turn knob
counterclockwise. Fan may be swiveled on its base to
direct air flow as required by conditions.
Map Lamps
To turn ON map lamps, push rocker switch on lamp base.
To turn OFF map lamps, push other side of rocker
switch. Map lamp sockets may be swiveled to direct light
as needed.
Dome Lamps
Dome lamps provide general illumination of the cab
interior. To turn dome lamp ON, push button on lamp
base. To turn dome lamp OFF, push button on lamp base
again.
0005-35
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 27. Air Conditioning Kit Controls, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and
M920P1.
1
4
3
2
Figure 27. Air Conditioning Kit Controls, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1,
and M920P1.
Key
Control/Indicator
Function
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
A/C Evaporator
A/C Filters
Fan Speed Switch
4.
A/C On-Off
Switch
All vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit are
equipped with Air Conditioning Kit.
Supplies cool air to cab.
Directs air flow.
Controls the speed of A/C blower fan. Move switch to
left position for LOW, center position for MEDIUM,
and right position for HIGH speed.
Operates A/C system and A/C blower fan.
0005-36
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 28. Rear Sliding Window, M916 through M920.
1
Key
1.
Figure 28. Rear Sliding Window, M916 through M920.
Control/Indicator
Function
Rear Sliding Window To open rear sliding window, squeeze at center of latch
Latch, M916 through and slide window toward passenger side of cab. To close
M920
rear sliding window, squeeze at center of latch and slide
window toward driver side of cab.
0005-37
TM 9-2320-273-10
0005
Table 29. Crew Protection Kit Escape Hatch, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1,
M917P1, and M920P1.
1
2
Figure 29. Crew Protection Kit Escape Hatch, M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1,
M917P1, and M920P1.
Key
Control/Indicator
Function
1.
Escape Hatch Grab
Use grab handle to open escape hatch.
Handle
2.
Escape Hatch Latch
Pull to release latch and slide escape hatch open.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0005-38
TM 9-2320-273-10
0006
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
AR 70-1
DA Form 2404
DA Form 5988-E
WP 0007
WP 0008
WP 0009
WP 0010
WP 0011
WP 0012
WP 0013
WP
WP
WP
WP
WP
WP
WP
WP
WP
WP
0014
0015
0021
0024
0025
0028
0029
0030
0035
0037
GENERAL
This work package provides instructions for operation of the vehicle under normal
conditions. It describes the process by which the operator utilizes the equipment and
the order in which operational tasks are performed. Operation Under Usual Conditions
includes Assembly and Preparation for Use; Initial Adjustments, Before Use, and
Self-Test; Operating Procedures; Decals and Instruction Plates; and Preparation for
Movement. Follow the instruction for each heading listed below.
WP 0007 through WP 0014 provide specific instructions for the operation of M915
series and M915A1 vehicles, and WP 0010 and WP 0013 provide additional
instructions for the operation of M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1
vehicles under normal conditions. For operating instructions under unusual conditions,
refer to WP 0015.
ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE
M915 series and M915A1 vehicles require minor preparation before operation. When
the vehicle is transferred between property accounts, Component of End Item (COEI)
and Basic Issue Items (BII) must be removed from the vehicle and packaged and
shipped separately. When the vehicle is received, COEI and BII must be unpacked and
stowed on the vehicle before operation. In some cases, one or more items may require
assembly and/or installation on the vehicle.
Perform the following steps prior to operating the vehicle:
1. Unpack COEI and BII and stow them in designated stowage locations. Stowage
locations are noted in WP 0037.
2. Ensure Service Upon Receipt of Materiel is performed by Field Maintenance and
all subsequent Field Level Maintenance is performed per the required service
intervals; refer to DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E, Equipment Inspection and
Maintenance Worksheet.
0006-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0006
ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE - CONTINUED
3. If any auxiliary equipment will be used in conjunction with vehicle operation,
review the associated technical manuals for assembly and preparation for use
requirements of the auxiliary equipment.
END OF TASK
INITIAL ADJUSTMENTS, BEFORE USE, AND SELF-TEST
Perform the following checks prior to vehicle operation:
1. Check fuel level and fill fuel tank as necessary (WP 0028).
2. Check fluid levels for the following components and add proper fluids as
necessary:
a. Engine oil (WP 0035)
b. Engine coolant (WP 0029)
c. Transmission fluid (WP 0035)
d. Power steering fluid (WP 0035)
e. Windshield washer fluid (WP 0025)
3. Check battery terminal connections and battery voltage (WP 0025).
4. Check fire extinguisher for full charge (WP 0025).
5. Check tire pressure including spare tire (WP 0030).
END OF TASK
OPERATING PROCEDURES
WARNING
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and
efficiently within the limits specified in the TM in
accordance with (IAW) AR 70-1. Operation beyond these
limits without written approval from the Commander, U.S.
Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN:
AMSTA-CG, Warren, MI 48397-5000, is prohibited. Failure
to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Operators must know how to use the controls and indicators
before starting and driving the vehicle. In addition, operators
must know the capabilities and limitations of the vehicle and
be able to use the features of the vehicle in the safest and
most efficient way to accomplish their mission. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment and possible
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
0006-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0006
OPERATING PROCEDURES - CONTINUED
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on
vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator
must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and
adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment and possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
The following procedures are required to bring the equipment from OFF through
STANDBY condition to FULL OPERATION:
1. Perform all operator/crew Before, During, and After Operation PMCS as required
in WP 0024 and WP 0025.
2. Perform Operator PMCS for auxiliary equipment installed on vehicle. Refer to
associated TMs.
3. Review operating instructions prior to performing mission. Refer to operating
procedures in WP 0007 through WP 0014 and Operation Under Unusual
Conditions, WP 0015.
4. If trailer is connected to fifth wheel, ensure fifth wheel primary and secondary
locks are engaged as described in Fifth Wheel Operation, WP 0012.
5. Ensure wheel chocks are removed from tractor and trailer prior to operation.
Refer to Placing Vehicle in Motion, WP 0010.
6. Operate vehicle IAW operator instructions in WP 0007 through WP 0014.
END OF TASK
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES
The operator must become familiar with the decals and instruction plates associated
with equipment operation. In addition, all safety related warning and caution decals and
instruction plates must be understood and adhered to during operation (WP 0014).
END OF TASK
PREPARATION FOR MOVEMENT
Refer to Towing Vehicle WP 0021 for preparation for movement procedures.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0006-3/4 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
0007
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
SEAT AND SEATBELT OPERATION
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0005
GENERAL
WARNING
The driver and passenger must wear seatbelts during vehicle
operation. Ensure seatbelts are fastened and properly
adjusted before placing vehicle in motion. Failure to comply
may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
All seat and seatbelt adjustments are performed while
occupant is seated in normal driving position with feet flat
on cab floor and hands on steering wheel. Ensure driver seat
is adjusted for comfort and all controls are easily accessible.
The vehicle is equipped with an adjustable driver seat and either a two-point lap
seatbelt or three-point lap and shoulder harness seatbelt. The companion seat is also
adjustable and has a two-point lap seatbelt. The driver seat can be adjusted in three
ways: ride level, backrest angle, and forward and backward. Ensure the driver seat is
adjusted for comfort and ensure all controls are within easy reach prior to operating the
vehicle.
For description and use of controls associated with the operation of the driver and
companion seats and seatbelts, refer to WP 0005.
0007-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0007
DRIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Ride Level Adjustment:
NOTE
The driver seat ride level is the up and down shock
absorbing movement of the seat assembly. The ride level on
M915 through M920 vehicles is controlled by adjusting the
preload of the seat assembly torsion bars. The preload is the
amount of tension or twist applied to the torsion bars against
the weight of the occupant. The correct ride level is
established by increasing or decreasing the preload until
preload indicator is in line with the side frame of the seat.
Ride level will adjust to occupant weights of 130–275 lb
(59–125 kg).
Perform step 2 to increase preload (raise ride level) or
perform step 3 to decrease preload (lower ride level).
1. While seated in driver seat, observe position of preload indicator and determine if
adjustment is necessary.
2. Pull up on ratchet trip lever and rotate adjustment lever back and forth until
preload indicator is in line with seat side frame.
3. Push down on ratchet trip lever and rotate adjustment lever back and forth until
preload indicator is in line with seat side frame.
Backrest Angle Adjustment:
NOTE
The backrest angle can be adjusted to three positions.
Lift lever up with left hand, angle backrest forward or backward to desired position,
and lower lever until locked in one of three notched positions.
Forward And Backward Position Adjustment:
NOTE
The driver seat may be moved forward or backward 6 in.
(15 cm).
Pull and hold lever out, use legs and body to move seat assembly forward or backward
to desired position, and release lever to lock seat in position.
0007-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0007
RATCHET HANDLE
BACKREST ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
PRELOAD
INDICATOR
RATCHET
TRIP
LEVER
SEATBELT
FORE AND AFT
SEAT ADJUSTMENT
LEVER
Figure 1. Operator Seat.
END OF TASK
0007-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0007
M915A1 COMPANION SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Backrest Angle Adjustment:
Lift backrest angle adjustment lever up with left hand, angle backrest forward or
backward to desired position, and lower backrest angle adjustment lever until locked in
one of three notched positions.
Forward And Backward Position Adjustment:
Pull and hold fore and aft seat adjustment lever out, use legs and body to move seat
assembly forward or backward to desired position, and release fore and aft seat
adjustment lever to lock seat in position.
Seat Tilt Adjustment:
NOTE
The front edge of the seat can be tilted up or down to three
positions.
Using legs, take weight off seat cushion and turn seat cushion tilt adjustment lever
clockwise to tilt seat cushion up or counterclockwise to tilt seat cushion down.
BACKREST ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
SEATBELT
FORE AND AFT
SEAT ADJUSTMENT
LEVER
SEAT CUSHION TILT
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
Figure 2. Companion Seat.
END OF TASK
0007-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0007
USE OF SEATBELTS
WARNING
Driver and companion seatbelts must be connected and
adjusted for proper fit prior to placing the vehicle in motion.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Seatbelt must be completely extended from nonlocking
retractor device. All excess webbing must then be adjusted at
the buckle. Failure to comply may result in injury or death
to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
1. Fasten seatbelt buckle.
2. Remove slack by slipping belt through buckle until it fits snugly.
3. To release, press center of buckle on driver seatbelt, or pull up on belt buckle on
companion seatbelt.
DRIVER SEATBELT
BUCKLE RELEASE
COMPANION SEATBELT
BUCKLE RELEASE
Figure 3. Seatbelts.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0007-5/6 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATING UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C)
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0005
WP 0022
WP 0023
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C)
WARNING
Do not start engine with parking brake control pushed in
(released). The vehicle could roll in either direction once
brake system reaches operating pressure and spring brakes
release. Always pull out parking brake control prior to
starting engine or damage to equipment and possible injury
or death to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in
the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Ensure scheduled PMCS are performed prior to starting
vehicle. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
0008-1
0008
TM 9-2320-273-10
0008
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
1. If not applied, pull out parking brake control knob (Figure 1, Item 1).
NOTE
M915 through M920 vehicles have a neutral safety switch
which prevents the engine from being started with the
transmission in gear.
2. Place transmission manual control lever (Figure 1, Item 2) in neutral (N) position
(Figure 1, Item 3).
1
2
3
Figure 1. Applying Parking Brake and Selecting Neutral, (M915A1 Shown).
0008-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0008
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
NOTE
When vehicle ignition is switched on, low air pressure
warning buzzer will sound and the following warning
indicators will illuminate: LOW AIR PRESSURE, ENG
OIL, PARK BRAKE, and transmission heater warning lamp
on the M915 through M920.
3. Insert ignition key in engine run switch (Figure 2, Item 1), and turn on ignition by
moving engine run switch (Figure 2, Item 1) clockwise to IGNITION AND
ACCESSORY (ON) position (WP 0005).
4. Observe low air pressure warning buzzer sound and LOW AIR PRESSURE
indicator (Figure 2, Item 4), ENG OIL indicator (Figure 2, Item 2), PARK
BRAKE indicator (Figure 2, Item 3), and transmission heater warning lamp on the
M915 through M920 illuminate.
1
2
4
3
Figure 2. Turning On Ignition and Observing Warning Indicators.
0008-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
WARNING
On M915 and M915A1 vehicles, cab controlled fifth wheel
control lever must be in the LOCK position when a trailer is
connected to the tractor fifth wheel. Failure to comply may
result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death
to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
NOTE
On M915 and M915A1 tractors only, perform step 5 if
trailer is connected to the tractor fifth wheel.
5. Move fifth wheel control lever (Figure 3, Item 1) to LOCK position.
1
Figure 3. Control Lever, Cab Controlled Fifth Wheel.
0008-4
0008
TM 9-2320-273-10
0008
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
NOTE
On M916 through M920 vehicles, the PTO control should be
disengaged prior to starting vehicle engine. Perform step 6
for M916 through M920 models.
6. Check PTO indicator light (Figure 4, Item 1). If illuminated, push in PTO control
knob (Figure 4, Item 2) to disengage PTO, and observe red PTO indicator light
(Figure 4, Item 1) go off.
1
2
Figure 4. Disengaging PTO, (M916 through M920 Models).
0008-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0008
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
NOTE
The DIFF LOCK OUT indicator will remain illuminated if
the differential control switch is in LOCK position. For all
normal driving conditions the differentials should be
unlocked. If the differential control switch is in the LOCK
position, perform step 7 for M915 and M915A1 vehicles or
step 8 for M916 through M920 vehicles.
When the differential control switch is moved to the
UNLOCK position the red DIFF LOCK OUT indicator may
remain illuminated until the vehicle is put in motion.
7. Move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to UNLOCK position
(WP 0005).
8. Move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to UNLOCK position
(WP 0005). When engine is started and DIFF LOCK OUT indicator
(Figure 5, Item 1) goes off, move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to
OFF position.
1
2
2
M915 AND M915A1 M916 THROUGH M920
Figure 5. Differential Control Switch and Engine Start Button.
9. Turn off all vehicle accessories and ensure foot is off engine retarder foot switch
(Figure 6, Item 1) prior to starting engine.
0008-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0008
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
2
1
Figure 6. Engine Retarder Foot Switch and Accelerator Pedal.
CAUTION
Do not crank engine continuously for more than 15 seconds
at a time. Allow two minute intervals between cranking
engine for starter motor to cool. If engine fails to start after
four attempts, troubleshoot starting problem. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment.
When cranking engine, the ENGINE START button should
be released once the engine starts. Do not push the ENGINE
START button while engine is running. Failure to comply
will result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
The engine cannot be started by pushing or towing the
vehicle in gear.
The ENG TEMP indicator will illuminate while the ENGINE
START button is depressed.
10. To crank and start engine, push and hold ENGINE START button
(Figure 7, Item 1) down and slightly depress accelerator pedal (Figure 6, Item 2),
until engine starts. Release ENGINE START button (Figure 7, Item 1)
immediately after engine starts. If engine fails to start after cranking engine over
for 15 seconds, perform step 11.
1
ENGINE
START
Figure 7. Engine Start Button.
0008-7
TM 9-2320-273-10
0008
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
11. Wait 2 minutes to allow starter motor to cool and repeat step 10. If engine fails to
start after four attempts, refer to Troubleshooting Procedures, WP 0022 and
WP 0023.
CAUTION
Failure to shut off engine if no oil pressure is indicated on
engine oil pressure gauge may result in severe engine
damage. Do not attempt to restart engine until problem has
been corrected.
12. At engine startup, check engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1) for
minimum of 5 psi (34 kPa) on M915 vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) on M915A1. If
no oil pressure registers on engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1) after 10
seconds, shut off engine immediately by turning engine run switch
(Figure 8, Item 5) to OFF position. Refer to Troubleshooting Procedures,
WP 0022 and WP 0023.
CAUTION
Do not rev or idle engine above 1,000 rpm during warm-up.
Damage to turbocharger or engine may occur if vehicle is
operated without allowing sufficient time for oil circulation
to reach turbocharger and for engine parts to warm up
gradually.
Allow engine to warm up to normal operating temperature
(180–200 degrees F (82–93 degrees C)) to ensure proper oil
pressure. At low idle, if engine oil pressure drops below
5 psi (34 kPa) on M915 vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) on
M915A1 vehicles, shut off engine and troubleshoot problem.
Failure to comply may result in severe engine damage.
NOTE
On M915 through M920 vehicles, at low idle the engine oil
pressure gauge should register 5–20 psi (34–138 kPa) at
normal operating temperature.
If necessary during engine warm-up, set the hand throttle to
maintain a smooth low idle speed.
13. Warm up engine by idling engine at 580–650 rpm until engine temperature
reaches 180–200° F (82–93° C) and a minimum oil pressure of 5 psi (34 kPa) on
M915 vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) on M915A1 vehicles is maintained on engine
oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1). Ensure ENG OIL (low oil pressure)
warning indicator (Figure 8, Item 3) goes off.
14. During warm-up period, observe instrument panel gauges and warning indicators
for proper operation.
0008-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
0008
STARTING ENGINE ABOVE 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
15. Ensure LOW AIR PRESSURE warning indicator (Figure 8, Item 2) and buzzer
go off before releasing parking brake, PARK BRAKE warning indicator
(Figure 8, Item 4) will remain illuminated until parking brake is released prior to
driving vehicle.
1
3
2
4
5
Figure 8. Instrument and Indicator Panel Gauges and Indicators.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0008-9/10 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATING UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C)
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
WP 0005
WP 0016
WP 0022
WP 0023
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C)
1. Install winter front cover on radiator grille (WP 0016).
WARNING
Do not start engine with parking brake control pushed in
(released). The vehicle could roll in either direction once
brake system reaches operating pressure and spring brakes
release. Always pull out parking brake control prior to
starting engine or damage to equipment and possible injury
or death to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in
the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Ensure scheduled PMCS are performed prior to starting
vehicle. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
0009-1
0009
TM 9-2320-273-10
0009
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
2. If not applied, pull out parking brake control knob (Figure 1, Item 1).
NOTE
M915 and M915A1 vehicles have a neutral safety switch
that prevents the engine from being started with the
transmission in any gear other than neutral.
3. Place transmission manual control lever (Figure 1, Item 3) in neutral (N) position
(Figure 1, Item 2).
3
2
1
3
2
M915A1
M915 THROUGH M920
Figure 1. Applying Parking Brake and Selecting Neutral.
NOTE
Ensure all accessories are turned off and engine retarder
system is disengaged.
When the vehicle ignition is switched on, the low air
pressure warning buzzer will sound and the following
warning indicators will illuminate: LOW AIR PRESSURE,
ENG OIL, and PARK BRAKE. On M915 through M920
series vehicles, the strip heater indicator light, located on the
shift console, will also illuminate in cold weather.
4. Insert ignition key in engine run switch (Figure 2, Item 1) and turn on ignition by
moving engine run switch (Figure 2, Item 1) clockwise to IGNITION AND
ACCESSORY (ON) position (WP 0005).
5. Observe low air pressure warning buzzer sound and LOW AIR PRESSURE
indicator (Figure 2, Item 4), ENG OIL indicator (Figure 2, Item 2), and PARK
BRAKE indicator (Figure 2, Item 3), and transmission heater warning lamp on the
M915 through M920 illuminate.
0009-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
1
2
4
3
Figure 2. Turning Engine Run Switch On and Observing Warning Indicators.
WARNING
On M915 and M915A1 vehicles, the cab controlled fifth
wheel control lever must be in the LOCK position when a
trailer is connected to the tractor fifth wheel. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment and possible
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
NOTE
On M915 and M915A1 tractors only, perform step 6 if
trailer is connected to the tractor fifth wheel.
6. Move fifth wheel control lever (Figure 3, Item 1) to LOCK position.
1
Figure 3. Control Lever, Cab Controlled Fifth Wheel.
0009-3
0009
TM 9-2320-273-10
0009
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
NOTE
On M916 through M920 vehicles, the PTO control must be
disengaged prior to starting vehicle engine. Perform step 7
for M916 through M920 models.
7. Check PTO indicator light (Figure 4, Item 1). If illuminated, push in PTO control
knob (Figure 4, Item 2) to disengage PTO, and observe red PTO indicator light
(Figure 4, Item 1) go off.
1
2
Figure 4. Disengaging PTO, (M916 through M920 Models).
0009-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0009
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
NOTE
The DIFF LOCK OUT indicator will remain illuminated if
the differential control switch is in LOCK position. For all
normal driving conditions the differentials should be
unlocked. If the differential control switch is in the LOCK
position, perform step 8 for M915 and M915A1 vehicles or
step 9 for M916 through M920 vehicles.
When the differential control switch is moved to the
UNLOCK position, the red DIFF LOCK OUT indicator may
remain illuminated until the vehicle is put in motion.
8. Move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to UNLOCK position
(WP 0005).
9. Move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to UNLOCK position
(WP 0005), and once engine is started and DIFF LOCK OUT indicator
(Figure 5, Item 1) goes off, move differential control switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to
OFF position.
1
2
2
M915 AND M915A1 M916 THROUGH M920
Figure 5. Differential Control Switch and Engine Start Button.
0009-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0009
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
10. Turn off all vehicle accessories and ensure foot is off engine retarder foot switch
(Figure 6, Item 1) prior to starting engine.
2
1
Figure 6. Engine Retarder Foot Switch and Accelerator Pedal.
CAUTION
Do not crank engine continuously for more than 15 seconds
at a time. Allow two minute intervals between cranking
engine for starter motor to cool. If engine fails to start after
four attempts, troubleshoot starting problem. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment.
When cranking engine, the ENGINE START button must be
released once the engine starts. Do not push the ENGINE
START button while engine is running. Failure to comply
will result in damage to equipment.
Never depress the ether quick-start button before cranking
engine. Do not hold the ether start button down for more
that 4 or 5 seconds while cranking the engine. A build up of
ether can result in combustion in the intake manifold and
damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
The engine cannot be started by pushing or towing the
vehicle in gear.
The ENG TEMP indicator will illuminate while the ENGINE
START button is depressed.
0009-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0009
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
11. To crank and start engine, push and hold ENGINE START button
(Figure 7, Item 1) down, slightly depress accelerator pedal (Figure 6, Item 2), and
depress and hold ETHER quick-start button (Figure 7, Item 2) for 4 or 5 seconds
until engine starts. Release ENGINE START button (Figure 7, Item 1)
immediately after engine starts. If engine fails to start after cranking engine over
for 15 seconds, perform step 10.
1
2
Figure 7. Starting Engine.
NOTE
At temperatures below 0° F (-18° C) it may be necessary to
repeat steps 11 and 12 more than once.
12. Wait two minutes to allow starter motor to cool and repeat step 11. If engine fails
to start after four attempts, refer to Troubleshooting Procedures, WP 0022 and
WP 0023.
0009-7
TM 9-2320-273-10
0009
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
CAUTION
Failure to shut off engine if no oil pressure is indicated on
engine oil pressure gauge may result in severe engine
damage. Do not attempt to restart engine until problem has
been corrected.
13. At engine startup, check engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1) for 5 psi
(34 kPa) minimum on M915 vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) minimum on M915A1. If
no oil pressure registers on engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1) after 10
seconds, shut off engine immediately by turning engine run switch
(Figure 8, Item 5) to OFF position. Refer to Troubleshooting Procedures,
WP 0022 and WP 0023.
CAUTION
Do not rev or idle engine above 1,000 rpm during warm-up.
Damage to turbocharger or engine may occur if vehicle is
operated without allowing sufficient time for oil circulation
to reach turbocharger and for engine parts to warm up
gradually.
Allow engine to warm up to normal operating temperature
180–200° F (82–93° C) to ensure proper oil pressure. At low
idle, if engine oil pressure drops below 5 psi (34 kPa) on
M915 through M920 vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) on M915A1
vehicles, shut off engine and troubleshoot problem. Failure to
comply may result in severe engine damage.
NOTE
On M915 through M920 vehicles, at low idle the engine oil
pressure gauge should register 5–20 psi (34–138 kPa) at
normal operating temperature.
If necessary during engine warm-up, set the hand throttle to
maintain a smooth low idle speed.
14. Warm up engine by idling at 580–650 rpm until engine temperature reaches
180–200° F (82–93° C) and 5 psi (34 kPa) minimum oil pressure on M915
vehicles or 10 psi (69 kPa) minimum oil pressure on M915A1 vehicles is
maintained on engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1). Ensure ENG OIL
(low oil pressure) warning indicator (Figure 8, Item 2) goes off.
15. During warm-up period, observe instrument panel gauges and warning indicators
for proper operation.
16. Ensure LOW AIR PRESSURE warning indicator (Figure 8, Item 4) and buzzer
go off before releasing parking brake. PARK BRAKE warning indicator
(Figure 8, Item 3) will remain illuminated until parking brake is released prior to
driving vehicle.
0009-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
0009
COLD WEATHER STARTING BELOW 32º F (0º C) - CONTINUED
1
2
4
3
5
Figure 8. Instrument and Indicator Panel Gauges and Indicators.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0009-9/10 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATING UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP
WP
WP
WP
WP
References - Continued
0005
0007
0008
0009
0012
WP
WP
WP
WP
0013
0018
0027
0037
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION
WARNING
To prevent fifth wheel movement during transit, ensure cab
mounted sliding fifth wheel control lever is in LOCK
position before moving vehicle. Follow procedure to verify
fifth wheel control lever is locked in position when tractor is
coupled to trailer, and never move fifth wheel control lever
to UNLOCK position during transit. Failure to comply may
result in loss of control, damage to equipment, and possible
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Do not operate vehicle with low tire pressure on wet smooth
roads at high speeds. Doing so may result in loss of control,
damage to equipment, and possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on
vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator
must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and
adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment or possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1. Ensure BII and auxiliary equipment are stowed and locked for travel (WP 0037).
2. If tractor is coupled to trailer, ensure fifth wheel primary and secondary kingpin
lock releases are properly engaged, tractor-to-trailer air and electrical connections
are checked, and the sliding fifth wheel control lever is in LOCK position for the
M915A1 (WP 0012). If using towing pintle, ensure pintle is properly locked
(WP 0013).
0010-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION - CONTINUED
NOTE
If available, assistant will adjust mirrors with driver seated
in cab.
3. Adjust rear view mirrors and driver seat as necessary. Put seatbelt(s) on and
adjust tension (WP 0007).
NOTE
Ensure scheduled PMCS are performed prior to operating
tractor.
4. Start engine (WP 0008 or WP 0009).
5. Check engine oil pressure gauge (Figure 1, Item 3) for at least 10 psi (69 kPa) at
idle. Cold engine will read higher.
6. Check engine water temperature gauge (Figure 1, Item 7) for approximately
165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through M920 or 160–180° F (71–82° C) for
M915A1 if pulling load.
7. Check air pressure gauges (Figure 1, Items 4 and 6) for
105–140 psi (724–965 kPa). Air pressures below 60 psi (414 kPa) will result in
brakes not releasing. LOW AIR PRESSURE warning lamp (Figure 1, Item 5) and
buzzer should go off when both front and rear air system pressures reach
approximately 64–76 psi (441–524 kPa).
8. Voltmeter (Figure 1, Item 2) should indicate 12–15 V (green shaded area).
9. Fuel gauge (Figure 1, Item 1) should indicate there is sufficient fuel for intended
mission.
10. If operating in conditions requiring use of service or blackout lamps, operate
headlamp switch (Figure 2, Item 1) or blackout operation switch
(Figure 2, Item 2) as appropriate (WP 0005).
0010-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION - CONTINUED
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
Figure 1. Instrument Panel Gauges and Indicators.
1
2
Figure 2. Instrument Panel Indicators and Controls.
0010-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION - CONTINUED
11. For M915 through M920, depress the transmission Air Control Button
(Figure 3, Item 2). The button will lock in the depressed position as long as truck
air pressure is 80 psi or higher. It may be necessary to shift through all gears at
engine idle speed several times to eliminate transmission air leaks, particularly in
cold weather.
CAUTION
For M915 through M920, use of the inhibitor override when
the truck is in motion is prohibited. The shift inhibitor
override should only be used when the vehicle is at a
complete stop.
12. For M915 through M920, select the starting gear ratio using the following as a
guide. Pull up on the selector lever (Figure 3, Item 1) to override the inhibitor.
Suggested starting gears-level hard surfaces:
Empty to 75,000 lb GCVW, 6th gear
75,000 to 105,000 lb GCVW, 4th gear
105,000 to 130,000 lb GCVW, 3rd gear
NOTE
For M915A1, use the 1-5 gear range position for all normal
driving conditions. For information on all gear ranges, refer
to Use of Transmission Gear Ranges M915A1 in this work
package.
13. For M915A1, place transmission control lever (Figure 3, Item 1) in desired gear
range (WP 0005).
1
1
2
M915 THROUGH M920
Figure 3. Transmission Control Lever.
0010-4
M915A1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
PLACING VEHICLE IN MOTION - CONTINUED
CAUTION
For M915 through M920, never allow truck to coast in
neutral. Severe transmission damage can result and engine
braking action is not available during a neutral coast.
14. Apply service brake pedal (Figure 4, Item 4) and release parking brake control
(Figure 4, Item 3) (WP 0005).
15. If coupled to trailer, release trailer air supply control
(Figure 4, Item 2) (WP 0005).
16. Put tractor in motion by releasing service brake pedal (Figure 4, Item 4) and
gradually depressing accelerator pedal (Figure 4, Item 1).
2
3
1
4
Figure 4. Service, Park, and Trailer Brake Controls and Accelerator Pedal.
END OF TASK
0010-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
USE OF TRANSMISSION GEAR RANGES (M915A1)
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on
vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator
must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and
adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment or possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Never allow vehicle to coast in neutral (N) position. Engine
braking action is not available when transmission is out of
gear, and damage to equipment and possible injury or death
to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in the event
of an injury.
Do not start engine with parking brake control pushed in
(released). The vehicle could roll in either direction once
brake system reaches operating pressure and spring brakes
release. Always pull out parking brake control prior to
starting engine or damage to equipment and possible injury
or death to personnel may result. Seek medical attention in
the event of an injury.
NOTE
In low gear ranges 1, 1-2, 1-3, and 1-4, the transmission will
not upshift above the highest gear selected unless engine
governed speed is excessive.
1. Use reverse (R) position (1) to back up tractor. Stop tractor completely before
shifting gears from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward. Reverse has
only one gear and provides the greatest traction advantage.
2. Use neutral (N) position (Figure 5, Item 7) when starting engine and when tractor
will be left unattended with engine running and parking brake applied. The
neutral safety switch prevents engine from starting in all gear range positions
other than neutral.
0010-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
USE OF TRANSMISSION GEAR RANGES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
3. Use 1-5 position (Figure 5, Item 6) for all normal driving conditions. When
driving in 1-5 position (Figure 5, Item 6), the transmission will start in 1st gear,
and as the accelerator is depressed, the transmission will upshift to 2nd, 3rd, 4th,
and 5th gears automatically. As the tractor is slowed, the transmission will
downshift to the correct gear automatically
4. Use 1-4 position (Figure 5, Item 2), 1-3 position (Figure 5, Item 3), or 1-2
position (Figure 5, Item 4) to limit the automatic shifting to a lower range when
road, load, or traffic conditions make it necessary or desirable to do so.
5. Use 1 position (Figure 5, Item 5) and R position (Figure 5, Item 1) when pulling
through mud and snow or driving on steep grades. This is low gear, and
maximum engine braking is accomplished in this position.
1
7
6
2
3
4
5
Figure 5. Transmission Control Lever and Range Indicator.
END OF TASK
0010-7
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
BASIC DRIVING GUIDELINES
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on
vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator
must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and
adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment or possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
During long idling periods, engine coolant temperature will
fall below normal range. The incomplete combination of
fuel in a cold engine will cause dilution of crankcase oil,
formation of carbon on valves, pistons, and rings, and
sludge build-up in engine. If prolonged engine idling is
necessary, maintain at least 800 rpm.
1. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
NOTE
If gauges or indicators show any abnormal conditions, bring
tractor to a safe stop, shut down engine, and investigate
cause of problem.
2. Frequently check oil pressure gauge (Figure 6, Item 1). During normal driving
conditions with engine running 1,800–2,100 rpm, engine oil pressure gauge
(Figure 6, Item 1) should register 40–75 psi (276–517 kPa) for M915 through
M920 or 35–50 psi (241–345 kPa) for M915A1.
1
M915 THROUGH M920
M915A1
Figure 6. Oil Pressure Gauge.
0010-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
BASIC DRIVING GUIDELINES - CONTINUED
3. Frequently check engine water temperature gauge (Figure 7, Item 1). Normal
water temperature should range from 165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through
M920 or 180–200° F (82–93° C) for M915A1. Water temperature should be
above 160° F (71° C) at low end, and up to 212° F (100° C) at high end. If
temperature reaches 220° F (104° C), shut down engine and check cooling
system.
1
M915 THROUGH M920
M915A1
Figure 7. Water Temperature Gauge.
4. Check front air pressure gauge (Figure 8, Item 1) and rear air pressure gauge
(Figure 8, Item 2). The normal operating range is 105–140 psi (724–965 kPa). Air
pressure should be at least 80 psi (552 kPa) for M915 through M920 or
90 psi (621 kPa) for M915A1. The low pressure warning lamp (Figure 8, Item 3)
and buzzer will come on at approximately 64–76 psi (441–524 kPa).
2
1
3
M915 THROUGH M920
2
1
M915A1
Figure 8. Air Pressure Gauges and Low Air Pressure Indicator.
0010-9
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
BASIC DRIVING GUIDELINES - CONTINUED
5. Frequently check transmission oil temperature gauge (Figure 9, Item 1). Normal
operating temperature range is 40–220° F (4–104° C) for M915 through M920 or
100–250° F (38–121° C) for M915A1.
1
M915A1
M915 THROUGH M920
Figure 9. Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge.
6. Frequently check voltmeter (Figure 10, Item 1). Normal battery voltage should be
12–15 volts.
1
M915 THROUGH M920
M915A1
Figure 10. Voltmeter.
7. Check fuel gauge (Figure 11, Item 1) for adequate fuel supply.
0010-10
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
BASIC DRIVING GUIDELINES - CONTINUED
1
M915 THROUGH M920
M915A1
Figure 11. Fuel Gauge.
8. Monitor engine rpm on tachograph for appropriate ranges. Refer to Optimum Use
of Tachograph in this work package.
9. After prolonged engine operation above 1,500 rpm, run engine at idle for a
minimum of 3 minutes to allow sufficient cool down of turbocharger.
10. The recommended and most efficient cruising speed for highway use is the posted
legal speed limit at an engine speed of 1,800–1,900 rpm. Refer to Efficient and
Economic Driving Techniques in this work package.
11. To conserve fuel and reduce high rpm engine noise when operating in city traffic
or other reduced speed zones, match engine speed to road speed by selecting a
gear range that permits operating engine near, but not lower than 1,500 rpm.
12. When climbing uphill grades with the M915A1, accelerate at full throttle in gear
range 1-5 and allow transmission to upshift automatically, or for all vehicles
manually upshift transmission once engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, one gear at a
time. Refer to Efficient and Economic Driving Techniques in this work package.
CAUTION
Never allow the engine to be pushed above the governed
rpm when rolling down a grade. Failure to comply may
result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
If a manual downshift or reverse shift is made at too high a
road speed, the transmission hydraulic system will prevent
the shift from occurring until the maximum lower speed is
reached.
13. When manually descending downhill grades, avoid over speeding engine by
manually downshifting to next lower gear range before reaching maximum rpm.
0010-11
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
BASIC DRIVING GUIDELINES - CONTINUED
CAUTION
Holding steering wheel at full lock position for more than 10
seconds will cause oil to overheat, loss of oil from power
steering reservoir, and damage to power steering pump.
14. When maneuvering tractor in limited space, avoid holding steering wheel at full
lock position.
END OF TASK
DRIVING GUIDELINES FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH CREW PROTECTION KIT
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on
vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator
must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and
adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment or possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1. With Crew Protection Kit installed, vehicle is heavier than usual. Due to this
increased weight, adjust driving to allow for greater stopping distance.
2. Vehicle may steer differently with Crew Protection Kit installed. Adjust vehicle
speed accordingly and exercise caution.
WARNING
Center of gravity is higher on vehicles equipped with Crew
Protection Kit. Always use slower speeds when driving
vehicle. DO NOT operate vehicle on steep hills or inclines.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and
possible injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
3. Due to higher center of gravity, use slower speeds when making turns or
changing lanes. Also, use extreme caution when operating vehicle on any incline.
The higher center of gravity increases the chance of a vehicle rollover.
WARNING
Visibility is reduced on vehicles equipped with Crew
Protection Kit. Always use a ground guide when
maneuvering vehicle near obstacles. Failure to comply may
result in damage to equipment and possible injury or death
to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
0010-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
DRIVING GUIDELINES FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH CREW
PROTECTION KIT - CONTINUED
4. Visibility is reduced on vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit. Operate
vehicle with caution and use ground guides.
WARNING
Vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit have different
door handles and latching hardware. Exercise caution when
opening and closing armor doors to not allow clothing or
equipment to catch on door hardware. Failure to comply may
result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
5. When entering or exiting vehicle, use three-point contact procedure at all times.
Keep clothing and equipment away from door hardware.
WARNING
DO NOT park vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit
on a hill or incline. The parking brake may have insufficient
braking capacity to hold vehicle due to increased vehicle
weight. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
6. Always park vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit on a level surface, set
parking brake, and chock wheels.
7. Operate heater/air conditioning system as needed to ensure proper cab ventilation.
Refer to Operating Air Conditioning Kit (WP 0013).
8. Maintain good visibility during vehicle operation. Keep all ballistic glass clean.
Follow cleaning instructions for ballistic glass (WP 0027).
END OF TASK
STARTING OUT ON GRADE (M915 THROUGH M920)
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on
vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator
must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and
adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment or possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
0010-13
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
STARTING OUT ON GRADE (M915 THROUGH M920) - CONTINUED
CAUTION
With transmission engaged, do not operate vehicle with the
engine speed below 1,200 rpm or above 2,100 rpm. Failure
to comply many result in transmission damage.
When staring with a load, engine speed must accelerate
through 1,200 rpm in three seconds or less to prevent
damage to front clutch. If rpm does not increase above
1,200 rpm in three seconds, ease off accelerator and shift to
a lower gear. Failure to comply may result in transmission
damage.
Do not start trucks in gears one, two, or three with fast
acceleration. If it is necessary to start in these lower gears,
fradually accelerate when starting while shifting through
these gears. Failure to comply may result in transmission
damage.
M915 through M920 vehicles are equipped with strip heaters
to warm transmission during cold weather. The strip heaters
are thermostatically controlled for automatic operation at
temperatures below 30° F (-1° C). The indicator light on the
console lights when the strip heaters are on. DO not operate
the transmission until indicator light goes off. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
If gear grinding is heard during a shift immediately move
shift lever to the left and then back into the detent. If gear
grinding persists, stop vehicle immediately and notify your
supervisor. Do not operate vehicle.
1. Upshifts can be made at any engine speed above 1,750 rpm. Ease up on
accelerator when shift selector is placed into the detent. This provides a smooth
shit.
2. Downshift must always be made when the engine speed is at or below 1,650 rpm.
Accelerate when shift selector is placed into the detent.
END OF TASK
OPTIMUM USE OF TACHOGRAPH
CAUTION
The maximum governed engine speed is 2,100 rpm under
load. Never allow the engine to exceed this rpm or damage
to engine may result.
0010-14
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
OPTIMUM USE OF TACHOGRAPH - CONTINUED
NOTE
It is not necessary to operate the engine at maximum rpm for
good performance. The engine performs efficiently at low
and middle speed ranges and offers a definite fuel advantage
at these reduced speeds. Control rpm by tailoring engine
speed to the load requirements and desired road speed.
1. Use tachometer hand (Figure 12, Item 3) of tachograph (Figure 12, Item 1) to
monitor engine rpm in all gear ranges. When manually downshifting transmission
while tractor is moving, monitor tachometer hand (Figure 12, Item 3) to ensure
maximum 2,100 rpm engine speed is not exceeded.
2. Control engine rpm through proper use of accelerator and gear selection for load
requirements and desired road speed. For the M915A1 in normal driving
situations, use gear range 1-5 and allow automatic transmission to control gear
selection and engine speed.
3. Use speedometer hand (Figure 12, Item 2) of tachograph (Figure 12, Item 1) to
monitor tractor ground speed in miles per hour (mph). Ground speed and engine
speed can be compared to help determine gear selection for any given condition
(WP 0005).
4. Use odometer (Figure 12, Item 5) on tachograph (Figure 12, Item 1) to record
distance traveled. Fuel consumption in miles per gallon (mpg) is calculated by
dividing the number of miles traveled by the number of gallons consumed.
5. Use clock hands (Figure 12, Item 4) on tachograph (Figure 12, Item 1) to estimate
destination time based on miles per hour (mph). For example, if traveling at a
ground speed of 60 mph, it will take one minute to travel one mile.
2
1
1
3
3
2
4
5
M915 THROUGH M920
4
5
M915A1
Figure 12. Tachograph.
END OF TASK
0010-15
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915 THROUGH M920)
The following driving techniques should be learned to achieve efficiency, economy, and
safe operation in the M915 through M920.
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on
vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator
must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and
adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment or possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Driving at Highway Speed
1. When driving conditions permit, maintain the legal highway speed in gear that
permits running the engine below governed speed. This is engine cruising range
and it affords better fuel economy than higher engine speeds. Recommended
normal highway cruising range is 1,800–1,900 rpm.
2. Operate in the economy range at full throttle if satisfied with how the vehicle
performs. There are times when hilly terrain, high winds, or other conditions
make it impractical to operate without reserve power. Such conditions are better
met if the truck is operated in a lower gear with reserve power available for
changes in terrain, wind, etc.
Driving in the City
CAUTION
Engine rpm should not be less than 1,500 rpm for city
driving. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
1. Operate the truck in high gear at reduced engine rpm to maintain the lawful
speed. Reducing engine speed conserves fuel and lowers the noise level of the
vehicle. When slowing down for towns and other posted speed zones along
highway route, remain in running gear and reduce engine rpm. Avoid
downshifting until ready to return truck to highway speed. Depending on gear
selection recommended rpm range must not be less than 1,500 rpm for city
driving.
0010-16
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915 THROUGH M920) CONTINUED
Hauling Uphill
1. The engine works hardest when moving loaded truck up a grade. The proper use
of gears shortens time on hills and minimizes the amount of shifting.
2. Proceed uphill and depress the accelerator pedal completely, keeping it there as
the truck moves up the grade. If there is sufficient power to maintain a
satisfactory rpm, remain in that gear for the entire grade.
3. If the hill causes a steady decline in engine rpm, downshift when engine rpm is at
or below 1,650 rpm. Continue to downshift in this manner until engine rpm can
be maintained.
4. By remaining in each gear until arriving at the next lower shift point, truck will
top the grade in the best possible time on less fuel and fewer shifts.
0010-17
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915 THROUGH M920) CONTINUED
Using Engine for Braking
WARNING
Do not use engine retarder on slippery road surfaces. Using
engine retarder on wet, icy, or snow covered roads may
result in loss of vehicle control. Failure to comply may result
in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Do not use engine retarder in first, second, or third gears
except when descending steep grades. Never allow engine
speed to drop below 1,200 rpm with the engine retarder
applied. Do not engage the engine retarder when shifting or
when the transmission is in neutral. Failure to comply may
result in transmission damage.
1. Vehicle is equipped with retarder system which enables the engine to act as a
brake. The engine retarder should be used for descending grades in city traffic or
any situation where slowing is required but not on slipper road surfaces such as
rain, snow, or ice. Using the engine brake on slippery surfaces can cause the
vehicle to skid. Excessive use of the service brakes is not desirable. The engine
retarder is most effective between 1,750–2,000 rpm. The following procedures
should be applied when appropriate:
a. Place engine retarder switch on the instrument panel in the low position. If
more engine braking is needed, place engine retarder switch to the medium
position. If more engine braking is needed, set the engine retarder switch to
high.
b. Keep vehicle in a gear that allows driver to maintain 1,750–2,000 rpm. This
provides maximum engine braking effect.
0010-18
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915 THROUGH M920) CONTINUED
Downhill Braking
WARNING
Failure to comply to downhill driving procedures may cause
loss of vehicle control and result in injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Excessive use of the service brake to control downhill speed
will result in loss of braking power due to heat build up.
Failure to comply may result in severe injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1. Follow proper downhill procedure by selecting a gear which allows the engine
with the engine retarder applied to control truck speed with engine rpm at or
below 2,000 rpm and service brakes not applied. When approaching a downgrade,
progressively select a gear when combined with the engine retarder allows driver
to maintain an engine speed of 1,750–2,000 rpm.
2. As engine speed exceeds 2,000 rpm, use one positive application of the service
brakes to slow the engine speed to 1,650 rpm, release engine retarder, downshift
one gear, and reapply engine retarder. Repeat procedure until engine speed can be
maintained between 1,750–2,000 rpm.
3. In the event engine over speeds (above 2,100 rpm), make one positive firm
application of the service brakes to slow vehicle speed.
4. In the event transmission over speeds (above 2,300 rpm) and total transmission
disengagement, perform the following:
a. Release engine retarder.
b. Upshift
c. Make one positive application of the service brakes to slow vehicle speed
and regain control of the vehicle.
5. If the transmission totally disengages from the engine due to a shift being made
with the engine retarder applied and engine speed has returned to low idle free
wheeling, accelerate the engine to engage transmission.
6. If experiencing a total loss of braking due to heat buildup:
a. Apply engine retarder (place switch in high mode).
b. Upshift as engine speed approaches 2,100 rpm. Prior to each upshift, release
engine retarder.
c. In 16th gear, continue to apply engine retarder and maintain directional
control of vehicle.
END OF TASK
0010-19
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1)
The following driving techniques should be learned to achieve efficiency, economy, and
safe operation in the M915A1.
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on
vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator
must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and
adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment or possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Driving at Highway Speeds
NOTE
The transmission lockup clutch automatically engages after
load is rolling and torque demand is low, and automatically
disengages at lower tractor speeds. When engaged, increased
fuel economy is achieved at highway cruising speeds.
1. Learn to identify transmission lockup clutch engagement/disengagement. Lockup
engagement is felt similar to transmission gear range shifts. In addition, a slight
change in engine sound can be heard when lockup occurs, due to a drop in rpm.
With experience it is possible to tell the difference between gear range changes
and lockup engagement/disengagement.
2. When driving conditions permit, maintain legal highway speed in gear range 1-5
(Figure 13, Item 1). Gear range 1-5 (Figure 13, Item 1) permits running the
engine below its governed speed (preferably 10–20 percent below governed
speed), and affords better fuel economy than at higher engine speeds. The
recommended normal highway cruising range is 1,800–1,900 rpm.
0010-20
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
2
1
Figure 13. Transmission Control Lever Range Indicator.
NOTE
Running in a low gear at a high rpm when restricted to
25–30 mph wastes fuel and creates a higher noise level than
necessary.
3. When driving conditions do not permit operating in economy range, it may be
necessary to run engine at higher engine speeds (full throttle) or manually shift to
a lower gear. When operating in hilly terrain, high winds, or at maximum GCWR,
additional power to meet these conditions may require operating in gear range 1-4
(Figure 13, Item 2) or lower.
0010-21
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
Driving in City Stop-and-Go Traffic
CAUTION
Operating tractor below 1,500 rpm in gear range 1-5 will lug
the engine, and is not recommend for city driving. Failure to
comply may result in damage to engine.
1. Operate the vehicle in gear range 1-5 (Figure 14, Item 1) or 1-4
(Figure 14, Item 2) for normal stop-and-go city driving. Operating in gear range
1-5 (Figure 14, Item 1) or 1-4 (Figure 14, Item 2) when conditions permit, will
lower engine speed and increase fuel economy. Vehicle should not be operated in
high gear ranges at engine speeds below 1,500 rpm for city driving.
NOTE
The automatic transmission can be manually upshifted
through all gear ranges while accelerating at full throttle.
Manually down shifting is limited to the maximum allowable
engine speed for the next lower gear range. However, if a
manual down shift or reverse shift is made at too high a road
speed, the transmission hydraulic system will prevent the
shift from occurring until the maximum lower speed is
reached.
2. If traffic, road, or load conditions warrant, it may be desirable to limit the
automatic upshift by selecting gear range 1-3 (Figure 14, Item 3). This prevents
the engine from running below 1,500 rpm in gear range 1-4 (Figure 14, Item 2) or
1-5 (Figure 14, Item 1) at slower road speeds. When conditions allow for faster
road speeds, manually upshift to gear range 1-4 (Figure 14, Item 2) followed by
1-5 (Figure 14, Item 1). This practice lowers engine speed and provides increased
fuel economy.
Hauling on Uphill Grades
CAUTION
Use service brakes to hold tractor while stopped on a grade.
Never use the transmission to hold tractor on grade or severe
overheating and damage to transmission will result.
1. When starting from a stop on maximum uphill grades pulling maximum load, use
gear range 1 (Figure 14, Item 4), accelerate at full throttle, and manually upshift
once engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm one gear range at a time. If uphill grade
prevents engine speed from reaching 1,700 rpm, downshift to next lower gear
range to maintain at least 1,700 rpm.
0010-22
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
2. When starting from a stop on uphill grades pulling normal loads, use gear range
1-5 (Figure 14, Item 1) and accelerate at full throttle. Allow transmission to
upshift automatically until desired road speed is attained. If there is sufficient
power to maintain the desired road speed, remain in gear range 1-5
(Figure 14, Item 1). Manually downshift transmission to gear range 1-4
(Figure 14, Item 2) or lower if the desired road speed cannot be attained.
3. When operating at desired road speed and an uphill grade causes a steady
decrease in road speed, manually downshift to the next lower gear range once
engine speed reaches 1,700 rpm. Continue to downshift in this manner to match
the power demands of the grade. Once at top of hill, return to gear range 1-5
(Figure 14, Item 1).
2
1
3
4
Figure 14. Transmission Range Indicator.
0010-23
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
Using Engine for Braking
WARNING
The engine brake loses its effectiveness to control speed of
tractor when tractor is pushed by additional weight of trailer
on downhill grades. Failure to downshift transmission to
lower gear range and use service brakes to keep tractor and
engine speeds under control may result in damage to
equipment and possible injury or death to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
Do not use engine retarder on slippery road surfaces. Using
engine retarder on wet, icy, or snow covered roads may
result in loss of vehicle control. Failure to comply may result
in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1. To operate the engine retarder, switch ENGINE RETARDER switch
(Figure 15, Item 4) to the number of cylinders desired for braking action
(WP 0005). To slow tractor, move foot completely off accelerator pedal
(Figure 16, Item 1) and depress engine retarder control pedal (Figure 16, Item 2).
2. To maximize the braking effect of the engine retarder, keep transmission in a gear
range that matches road speed and rated engine rpm. Engine braking is increased
by either downshifting to the next lower gear range and/or placing the ENGINE
RETARDER switch (Figure 15, Item 4) to MED position (Figure 15, Item 2) or
HIGH position (Figure 15, Item 1).
3. When using the engine retarder on a downhill grade, select the same gear range
necessary for climbing the same grade. To increase braking effect of engine
retarder, either downshift transmission to the next lower gear range and/or switch
the ENGINE RETARDER switch (Figure 15, Item 4) to MED position
(Figure 15, Item 2) or HIGH position (Figure 15, Item 1). To decrease braking
effect of engine retarder, either upshift transmission to higher gear range and/or
switch ENGINE RETARDER switch (Figure 15, Item 4) to MED position
(Figure 15, Item 2) or LOW position (Figure 15, Item 3).
ENGINE
RETARDER
1
2
4
Figure 15. Engine Retarder Switch.
0010-24
3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
EFFICIENT AND ECONOMICAL DRIVING TECHNIQUES (M915A1) - CONTINUED
WARNING
Never downshift to a gear range lower than the tractor road
speed on slippery pavement. Sudden increase in engine rpm
may cause drive wheels to lose traction with pavement and
result in loss of control of tractor or jackknifing of trailer.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment and
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Do not use engine retarder on slippery road surfaces. Using
engine retarder on wet, icy, or snow covered roads may
result in loss of vehicle control. Failure to comply may result
in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Engagement of differential lockup may be helpful on
slippery pavement (WP 0005).
4. The engine retarder should never be used on slippery surfaces such as wet, icy, or
snow covered pavement. Initial braking force when applying the engine retarder
may cause tractor drive wheels to lose traction with road surface. Use service
brake pedal and/or trailer brake hand control when slowing or stopping tractor on
slippery surfaces. Refer to Trailer Brake Hand Control, in this work package and
Snow and Ice in Unusual Terrain Operation (WP 0018).
1
2
Figure 16. Accelerator and Engine Retarder Control Pedals.
END OF TASK
0010-25
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
OPERATING TRAILER BRAKE HAND CONTROL
CAUTION
After use, always return the trailer brake hand control to its
off position (all the way up), or the trailer brakes will burn.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Use the trailer brake hand control to help avoid jackknifing. This control applies the
trailer brakes only. To apply the trailer brakes, pull down on the control. Be sure to
return the trailer brake hand control to its off position (all the way up) when finished.
END OF TASK
OPERATING INTER-AXLE DIFFERENTIAL LOCKUP
CAUTION
Do not operate the truck on hard surfaces any longer than
necessary with the differential lockup engaged. Driveline
windup may occur and damage the differential.
Inter-axle differential lockup provides additional traction by applying full torque to both
rear axles. On M916 through M920 models, the front driving axle is also engaged. This
feature should be used any time tractive conditions are poor, e.g., rainy or icy
pavement. For M916 through M920 models, it should also be used in off-road
operations.
The Differential Lock/Unlock control (Figure 16, Item 1) is located on instrument panel
(Figure 16, Item 2) to the right of driver. Use the following instructions to engage and
disengage the system.
Engage Inter-axle Differential Lockup All Models
1. Pull to the side of the road and stop truck.
2. Place Differential Lock/Unlock control (Figure 17, Item 1) in the LOCK position.
3. Observe that Differential Lockout indicator light (Figure 17, Item 3) comes on.
The truck is now ready for operation.
NOTE
On all models, if the Differential Lockup indicator light does
not go off it may be necessary to back up slowly, go forward
again, and repeat until the light goes off.
Disengage Interaxle Differential Lockup (M915)
1. Remove foot from the accelerator pedal.
2. Place Differential Lock/Unlock control (Figure 17, Item 1) in the LOCK position.
3. Observe that Differential Lockup indicator light (Figure 17, Item 3) goes off. The
system is now disengaged.
0010-26
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATING INTER-AXLE DIFFERENTIAL LOCKUP - CONTINUED
Disengage Inter-axle Differential Lockup (M916 through M920)
1. Remove foot from the accelerator pedal.
2. Place Differential Lock/Unlock control (Figure 17, Item 1) in the UNLOCK
position momentarily and observe that Differential Lockup indicator light
(Figure 17, Item 3) goes off.
3. Place Differential Lock/Unlock control (Figure 17, Item 1) in the center OFF
position. Do not operate truck if Differential Lockup indicator light
(Figure 17, Item 3) stays on.
1
2
M915 THROUGH M915A1
M915 THROUGH M920
3
Figure 17. Inter-axle Differential Lockup Controls.
END OF TASK
OPERATING PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920)
WARNING
Do not use the pusher axle as a step when in the raised
position. When pusher axle wheels are off the ground, it
freewheels. Failure to comply may result in injury to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Do not use pusher axle during off-highway operations.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
0010-27
0010
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
OPERATING PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920) - CONTINUED
When operating the M917, M919, and M920 with payload on a highway, use (lower)
pusher axle to comply with local requirements regarding maximum allowable load per
axle.
Lowering Pusher Axle
1. Rotate CONTROL PRESSURE valve knob (Figure 18, Item 1) to the full left
position (toward –) until pressure gauge (Figure 18, Item 2) reads 0 psi.
2. Place pusher axle control lift knob (Figure 18, Item 3) in AXLE DOWN position.
Adjusting Load On Pusher Axle
1. Refer to pusher axle air pressure load chart located in vehicle glove box
(Figure 19 or 20) and determine required pressure setting.
2. Rotate CONTROL PRESSURE valve knob (Figure 18, Item 1) right (toward +)
until pressure gauge (Figure 18, Item 2) indicates proper pressure setting for
desired load.
3. Using screw driver, tighten setscrew (Figure 18, Item 4) at center of CONTROL
PRESSURE valve knob (Figure 18, Item 1) to lock knob in position at selected
pressure.
4. With setscrew (Figure 18, Item 4) tightened at selected pressure, CONTROL
PRESSURE valve knob (Figure 18, Item 1) can be closed (toward –) and reset to
previous setting.
Raising Pusher Axle
1. Place pusher axle control lift knob (Figure 18, Item 3) in AXLE LIFT position.
This should be done when turning sharp corners to shorten turning radius and
avoid dragging tires. This can be done when the vehicle is in motion.
2
1
CONTROL
PRESSURE
GRANNING
SUSPENSIONS
60
40
10
4
3
80
100
120
140
160
AXLE
LIFT
AXLE
DOWN
Figure 18. Pusher Axle Controls.
0010-28
TM 9-2320-273-10
0010
OPERATING PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920) - CONTINUED
MAX. GVWR
70
65
60
55
20,000 LB-MAX.
PUSHER AXLE LOAD
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT (1000 LB)
75
50
45
40
35
30
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
AIR PRESSURE GAUGE SETTING
(PSI)
Figure 19. M917 & M919 Pusher Axle Air Pressure for Vehicle Weight Load Chart.
MAX. GVWR
70
65
60
55
20,000 LB-MAX.
PUSHER AXLE LOAD
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT (1000 LB)
75
50
45
40
35
30
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
AIR PRESSURE GAUGE SETTING
(PSI)
Figure 20. M920 Pusher Axle Air Pressure for Vehicle Weight Load Chart.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0010-29/30 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
0011
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
STOPPING, SHUTTING DOWN ENGINE, AND PARKING VEHICLE
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0005
WP 0010
STOPPING, SHUTTING DOWN ENGINE, AND PARKING VEHICLE
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on
vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator
must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and
adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment or possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Before shutting down the engine, idle (550–650 rpm) with
no load for at least 3 minutes to allow turbocharger to cool.
Cooling time will depend on how hard the engine has been
worked. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
To stop vehicle, perform the following:
1. Release accelerator pedal, refer to WP 0005.
2. Allow reduction in engine RPM and automatic downshifting of transmission to
help slow vehicle, refer to WP 0010.
3. Apply service brakes to bring tractor to complete stop, refer to WP 0005.
4. Continue to depress and hold service brake pedal, shift transmission control lever
to neutral (N) position, and apply parking brakes, refer to WP 0010.
5. Idle engine for at least 3 minutes to allow turbocharger to cool.
6. Turn OFF engine run switch, refer to WP 0005.
0011-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0011
STOPPING, SHUTTING DOWN ENGINE, AND PARKING VEHICLE - CONTINUED
WARNING
Never park tractor on a steep grade. It is never good practice
to park a heavy truck on a steep slope even when parking
brake holding capability exceeds federal safety standards.
Failure to comply may result in tractor moving unexpectedly,
damage to equipment, and injury or death to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Parking brakes will provide sufficient holding force if parked
on a normal, level surface.
To park the vehicle, perform the following:
1. Stop truck.
2. Pull parking brake control knob (WP 0005).
3. If truck is parked on normal surfaces, parking brakes will provide sufficient
holding force.
4. If truck is parked on unusual surfaces, chock wheels and take any other steps to
keep vehicle from moving.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0011-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION AND COUPLING AND UNCOUPLING TRAILERS
INITIAL SETUP: Not Applicable
This work package covers fifth wheel operation and all procedures involved with
coupling and uncoupling trailers for the M915, M916, M920, and M915A1 tractors. All
tractors are similar, but the M915A1 is equipped with a cab controlled sliding fifth
wheel and the M916 and M920 are equipped with a winch for use with light and
medium equipment trailers.
0012-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
M915 FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION
WARNING
All personnel must stand clear of tractor and trailer during
coupling operations. Failure to comply may result in injury
or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of
an injury.
The M915 line haul tractor is equipped with a 36 in. (91.4 cm) fore and aft oscillating
fifth wheel for use with a 2 in. (50.8 mm) kingpin. The single oscillating fifth wheel
will pitch 15 degrees forward and 10 degrees aft. It is rated at 40,000 lb (18,144 kg)
vertical load and 150,000 lb (68,000 kg) drawbar pull. There are two manual kingpin
lock release handles on the right side of the fifth wheel as shown in figure 1. The
primary release handle must be pulled first before releasing the secondary handle to
uncouple the trailer.
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
SECONDARY RELEASE
HANDLE
LOCK GUARD
Figure 1. M915 Fifth Wheel Controls.
END OF TASK
0012-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
M916 AND M920 FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION
WARNING
All personnel must stand clear of tractor and trailer during
coupling operations. Failure to comply may result in injury
or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of
an injury.
The M916 and M920 equipment transporter tractors are equipped with a
36 in. (91.4 cm) four way oscillating fifth wheel for use with a 3.5 in. (88.9 mm)
kingpin. It is rated at 70,000 lb (31,752 kg) vertical load and 200,000 lb (90,720 kg)
drawbar pull. There are two manual kingpin lock release handles on the left side of the
fifth wheel as shown in figure 2. The secondary release handle must be pulled first
before releasing the primary handle.
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
SECONDARY RELEASE
HANDLE
Figure 2. M916 and M920 Fifth Wheel Controls.
END OF TASK
0012-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
M915A1 FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION
WARNING
To avoid unintentional fifth wheel movement during tractor
operation, always ensure fifth wheel control is in the LOCK
position before placing tractor in normal operation. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment and serious
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Never move fifth wheel control to the UNLOCK position
during normal tractor operation. Failure to comply may
result in loss of control, damage to equipment, and serious
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
All personnel must stand clear of tractor and trailer during
coupling operations. Failure to comply may result in injury
or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of
an injury.
The M915A1 truck tractor is equipped with a cab controlled sliding fifth wheel for use
with trailers having a 2 in. (50.8 mm) diameter kingpin. The fifth wheel is
36 in. (91.4 cm) in diameter and can oscillate or pitch 15 degrees fore and aft. Rated
vertical load capacity is 40,000 lb (18,144 kg). Drawbar pull capacity is 150,000 lb
(68,039 kg). There are two kingpin lock releases on the left side of the fifth wheel, as
shown in figure 3. To uncouple trailer kingpin from the fifth wheel, first pull the
primary lock release handle, then pull the secondary lock release handle.
Moving fifth wheel control lever inside the cab to the UNLOCK position operates an
air cylinder under the fifth wheel which allows it to travel on the slide track a total of
12 in. (30.5 cm) forward or backward. This feature allows for adjustment of the
amount of cargo load carried by the rear tandem axles, within rated capacity.
With trailer coupled to the fifth wheel and the control in the UNLOCK position,
adjustment is made by driving forward or backward slowly with the trailer brake hand
control applied. After sliding adjustment is made, move fifth wheel control lever to the
LOCK position and release trailer brake hand control.
Use of the sliding fifth wheel for axle weight distribution requires scales to determine
weight placed on each axle of the tractor and trailer. The normal position of the sliding
fifth wheel is between the two rear tandem axles of the tractor with an unloaded or
loaded trailer. From this starting position, weight on the front axle of the tractor can be
increased by moving the sliding fifth wheel forward, and decreased by moving the
sliding fifth wheel backward. See normal location decals on both sides of the fifth
wheel assembly for correct positioning when towing the M872 trailer.
0012-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
M915A1 FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION - CONTINUED
CONTROL LEVER
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
SECONDARY RELEASE
HANDLE
LOCK GUARD
AIR LINE
SLIDE TRACK
Figure 3. M915A1 Fifth Wheel Controls.
END OF TASK
0012-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHOCKING TRAILER WHEELS BEFORE COUPLING
CAUTION
Use chock blocks on trailers equipped with chock blocks.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Remove chock blocks from brackets and place as specified below.
UPHILL GRADE
Place chock blocks behind wheels on both sides of axle.
DOWNHILL GRADE
Place chock blocks on front of wheels on both sides of axle.
LEVEL GROUND
Chock front wheels of one axle and the rear side on the opposite side of axle.
CHOCK BLOCKS
Figure 4. Chock Block Placement (Level Ground).
END OF TASK
0012-6
0012
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
EQUIPMENT CHECKS
Check tractor and trailer as follows before backing tractor under trailer.
1. Visually check fifth wheel for cracked, damaged, or missing parts.
2. Check mountings for good condition and mounting bolts for tightness.
3. Ensure all moving parts and top of fifth wheel are properly lubricated.
4. Check lock guard for proper operation. Notify your supervisor to have lock guard
replaced if damaged or missing.
5. Ensure both primary and secondary lock release handles are pulled out and lock
guard is open to accept trailer kingpin.
6. Ensure fifth wheel ramps are down, level with, or slightly below, angle of trailer
pickup ramps.
7. Adjust trailer height so fifth wheel picks up trailer on fifth wheel ramps.
8. On the M915A1, ensure sliding fifth wheel control lever is in LOCK position.
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
SECONDARY
RELEASE
HANDLE
LOCK GUARD
M915
LOCK GUARD
SECONDARY
RELEASE
HANDLE
M916 and M920
Figure 5. Fifth Wheel Equipment Checks.
END OF TASK
0012-7
LOCK GUARD
M915A1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
COUPLING AND CONNECTING TRACTOR TO TRAILER
WARNING
Ensure no one is standing behind tractor or trailer during the
coupling procedure. Failure to comply may result in serious
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Ensure the kingpin couples with the fifth wheel. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment, and possible
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
CAUTION
Ensure the kingpin does not contact fifth wheel ramps when
coupling. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
For M915A1 the M967/M969 fuel tankers must be hauled
with fifth wheel placed two notches rearward from HAUL
position. Failure to comply may result in damage to
equipment.
NOTE
Two lamp cables, one 12V and one 24V, are stored in the
tool box under the passenger seat. The cover at either end of
the 24V cable should be locked in the open position, by
sliding the metal tab back, before connecting the lamp cable.
1. Ensure tractor is centered in front of trailer at centerline as shown in figure 6.
2. Back tractor under trailer gooseneck until fifth wheel ramps meet trailer kingpin
in throat of fifth wheel.
3. Stop, shift to neutral (N), and apply parking brake.
4. Verify correct alignment as shown in figure 6.
5. Ensure contact between trailer and fifth wheel ramps. If kingpin is positioned too
high, it will not engage fifth wheel correctly.
6. Connect trailer service and emergency air hoses on tractor pressure couplings.
7. Enter cab and push in trailer air supply control knob and set trailer brake hand
control.
8. Release parking brake control.
9. Shift transmission control lever to reverse (R) and back up until fifth wheel locks
firmly on kingpin.
10. Shift transmission control lever to first gear (1) and pull against load with trailer
brake hand control set. This applies pressure against kingpin and provides a test
to ensure a secure coupling.
11. Set parking and service brakes.
12. Release trailer brake hand control and shift transmission control lever to neutral
(N).
0012-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
COUPLING AND CONNECTING TRACTOR TO TRAILER - CONTINUED
13. Leave cab and verify primary and secondary release controls on fifth wheel are in
and fifth wheel has not moved from position selected.
14. Kingpin must be in fifth wheel locks. Daylight should not be seen between upper
fifth wheel plate of trailer and fifth wheel.
15. Ensure kingpin is not hooked over front of fifth wheel.
16. Lift and secure trailer landing gear and stow crank handle in holder.
17. Connect necessary lamp cables, 12V for normal lamps and/or 24V for blackout
lamp operation.
18. Check operation of trailer lights.
19. Using hand control in cab, check operation of trailer brakes.
20. Check all tires.
21. Ensure air supply is adequate before starting out.
TRACTOR
KINGPIN
AIR HOSES
FIFTH
WHEEL
CENTERLINE
HOLDER
KINGPIN
TRAILER
CRANK
HANDLE
Figure 6. Tractor and Trailer Coupling.
0012-9
TRAILER
LANDING
GEAR
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
COUPLING AND CONNECTING TRACTOR TO TRAILER - CONTINUED
TRAILER EMERGENCY
AIR HOSE
TRAILER SERVICE
AIR HOSE
24 VOLT
LAMP CABLE
12 VOLT
LAMP CABLE
Figure 7. M915, M916, and M920 Air Hose and Cable Connections.
TRAILER EMERGENCY
AND SERVICE AIR HOSES
12 VOLT
LAMP CABLE
24 VOLT
LAMP CABLE
Figure 8. M915A1 Air Hose and Cable Connections.
END OF TASK
0012-10
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHOCKING TRAILER WHEELS BEFORE UNCOUPLING
CAUTION
Use chock blocks on trailers equipped with chock blocks.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Remove chock blocks from brackets and place as specified below.
UPHILL GRADE
Place chock blocks behind wheels on both sides of axle.
DOWNHILL GRADE
Place chock blocks on front of wheels on both sides of axle.
LEVEL GROUND
Chock front wheels of one axle and the rear side on the opposite side of axle.
CHOCK BLOCKS
Figure 9. Chock Block Placement (Level Ground).
END OF TASK
0012-11
0012
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
UNCOUPLING AND DISCONNECTING TRACTOR FROM TRAILER
CAUTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
M967/M969 fuel tankers must be hauled with fifth wheel
placed two notches rearward from HAUL position. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment.
Shift transmission control lever to neutral (N) and apply parking brake. Verify
that parking brake indicator lamp comes on. This prevents tractor from running
out from under trailer when unlocking fifth wheel.
Pull out trailer air supply valve.
Leave cab and block trailer wheels with chocks.
Lower trailer landing gear until bases or wheels touch ground. Turn crank two
more revolutions so when trailer is uncoupled, it will not drop down sharply and
will be nearly level.
Disconnect and secure trailer service and emergency air hoses and lamp cable(s).
Unlock fifth wheel by first pulling primary lock release handle and then secondary
lock release handle.
CAUTION
Do not pull all the way out from under the trailer until
verifying the landing gear will support the trailer. If it
collapses, the rear frame area of the tractor will be able to
catch the front of the trailer before equipment damage
occurs.
7. Enter cab and slowly pull tractor forward until trailer kingpin is free from lock
guard and landing gear is supporting trailer weight. Stop the tractor.
8. Have crew member observe trailer kingpin to ensure it clears properly during
separation. Ensure kingpin clears tractor rear frame crossmember when pulling
tractor out from under trailer.
9. Pull tractor slowly forward, allowing the trailer gooseneck and kingpin to
completely clear the rear frame area of tractor.
0012-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
UNCOUPLING AND DISCONNECTING TRACTOR FROM TRAILER - CONTINUED
PRIMARY RELEASE
HANDLE
LOCK GUARD
PRIMARY
RELEASE
HANDLE
SECONDARY
RELEASE
HANDLE
SECONDARY
RELEASE
HANDLE
M915
M916 and M920
Figure 10. Fifth Wheel Controls.
END OF TASK
0012-13
M915A1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
PINTLE TOWING
1. Attach trailer or tow bar to pintle hook.
2. Connect trailer or vehicle electrical lamp cables to electric lamp cable receptacle
at rear of tractor.
3. Connect trailer air hoses to air hose quick disconnect couplings at rear of tractor.
PINTLE
ELECTRICAL LAMP
CABLE RECEPTACLE
AIR HOSE QUICK
DISCONNECT COUPLINGS
Figure 11. Pintle Towing Trailer Connections.
END OF TASK
0012-14
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
MUD FLAP STOWAGE
NOTE
When towing an M127 trailer, the rear mud flaps must be
removed from normal position and stowed on stowage
brackets.
1. Remove retaining pin from each mud flap.
NOTE
It may be necessary to tap upward on the mud flap spring
with a hammer or similar tool.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove mud flaps by pulling up on spring.
Insert mud flaps in stowage brackets on right frame rail.
Insert retaining pins in springs.
When towing operations are complete, install mud flaps and retaining pins in
normal position.
SPRING
SPRING
STOWAGE
BRACKET
MUD
FLAP
RETAINING
PIN
RETAINING PIN
Figure 12. Mud Flap Stowage.
END OF TASK
0012-15
MUD
FLAP
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
PREPARATION FOR LOADING LIGHT AND MEDIUM EQUIPMENT TRAILERS
(M916 AND M920)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Align tractor and semi-trailer as close as possible to front of payload equipment.
Place transmission ratio selector in neutral (N).
Apply parking brakes.
Prepare semi-trailer for loading.
END OF TASK
WINCH (M916 AND M920)
The M916 and M920 are each equipped with a full hydraulic winch mounted on the
frame behind the cab as shown below. The winch has a fail-safe spring-loaded brake
which automatically sets any time the winch control valve is in neutral or in case of
power failure (hydraulic pressure drops to less than 200 psi). The winch operates at
2,100 psi hydraulic pressure from a dual pump which is driven by a power takeoff on
the transmission. The rated capacity of the winch is 45,000 lb (20,250 kg).
WINCH HYDRAULIC
OIL RESERVOIR WINCH BRAKE
WINCH WIRE ROPE
WINCH
OPERATOR CONTROLS
STATION
Figure 13. Winch Components.
END OF TASK
0012-16
WINCH DRUM
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
WINCH CONTROLS (M916 AND M920)
The winch operator station is located on the left side of the tractor behind the cab.
Operator stands on the platform provided and operates winch using the controls on top
of the panel.
WINCH
CONTROL
LEVER 1
WINCH
OPERATOR
STATION
WINCH
CONTROL
LEVER 2
Figure 14. Winch Controls.
END OF TASK
0012-17
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
OPERATING WINCH AT TEMPERATURES BELOW -25° F (-32° C)
(M916 AND M920)
CAUTION
Avoid winching operations that cause sudden shock loads.
At extremely cold temperatures, metals become brittle and
sudden shock loads can cause equipment damage. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment.
1. After the winch has been serviced by Field Maintenance and before operating the
winch, warm up hydraulic system by engaging PTO and operating tractor at fast
idle for 30 minutes.
2. After warming hydraulic system, operate the winch in no-load condition by
paying out about 100 feet of the wire rope at low speed. Take up the wire rope at
low speed. Winch should be ready for normal operation.
END OF TASK
ENGAGING POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) FOR WINCH OPERATION (M916 AND M920)
WARNING
Hearing protection is required during winching operations.
Failure to comply may result in damage to hearing. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
Avoid quick jerking action on cables when operating winch
to prevent excessive loading on the cable. Keep personnel
not involved in winching away from winch cables and
payload. A snapping cable or shifting load can cause serious
injury. Stop winching immediately if shifting payload
presents a hazard, or if any component fails, and notify Field
Maintenance. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
CAUTION
The winch is not to be used for moving or lifting people. Do
not shift the transmission with the power take-off (PTO)
engaged. The gears stop during shifting, which could cause
excessive loading of power take off. Failure to comply may
result in damage to equipment.
Keep engine speed above 1,100 rpm after engaging PTO.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1. Place transmission ratio selector in neutral (N).
2. Operate engine at low idle and set parking brakes.
3. Move ratio selector to 1st speed and pull PTO knob to engage the PTO. Return
ratio selector back to neutral (N).
0012-18
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
ENGAGING POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) FOR WINCH OPERATION (M916 AND M920)
- CONTINUED
4. At the winch control panel, increase engine speed to desired speed ABOVE 1,100
rpm. Normal operation is 2,100 rpm.
TRANSMISSION
RATIO
SELECTOR
PTO
CONTROL
KNOB
PTO INDICATOR
LIGHT
PARKING BRAKE
CONTROL
Figure 15. PTO Control Knob and Indicator Light.
END OF TASK
0012-19
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
OPERATING WINCH (M916 AND M920)
WARNING
Hearing protection is required during winching operations.
Failure to comply may result in damage to hearing. Seek
medical attention in the event of injury.
Always wear heavy gloves when handling the winch wire
rope. Never allow the cable to run through your hands as
broken wires can cause painful injuries. Failure to comply
may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in
the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Do not pull up on control lever 2. This position is for
operating equipment not used on the M915 series vehicles.
Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Observe drum to ensure wire rope is not completely paid
out. Never operate winch with less than four turns of line on
drum. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
The rated winch pull is set by limiting the hydraulic system
relief valve pressure to a maximum of 2,100 psi which
provides 45,000 lb (20,250 kg) pull on the bare drum. As the
winch drum is loaded with line, the effective line pull is
reduced. The line pull per cable layer with 7/8 inch wire
rope is:
1st layer 45,000 lb (20,250 kg)
2nd layer 39,265 lb (17,810 kg)
3rd layer 34,775 lb (15,773 kg)
4th layer 31,210 lb (14,156 kg)
5th layer 28,310 lb (12,841 kg)
Loading procedures will vary depending on the size and type
of equipment to be transported.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The winch speed is normal in low speed. High speed is
recommended for paying line out or taking up slack only.
Lower pusher axle.
Have crew member disconnect the wire rope clevis from its anchor.
Pull up on winch control lever 2 to the middle position.
To pay out the line, pull up and hold winch control lever 1 in full up position.
The winch will unwind in low speed. Have crew member walk end of the wire
rope out.
0012-20
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
OPERATING WINCH (M916 AND M920) - CONTINUED
NOTE
High speed winch operation is recommended for paying out
line or taking up slack only.
5. To run winch in high speed, push down and hold winch control lever 2. This
doubles winch speed.
6. When the desired amount of line has been paid out, stop winch by releasing both
control levers.
WINCH
CONTROL
LEVER 1
WINCH
OPERATOR
STATION
WINCH
CONTROL
LEVER 2
Figure 16. Winch Operator Station.
END OF TASK
0012-21
TM 9-2320-273-10
0012
SECURING WINCH WIRE ROPE (M916 AND M920)
1. Direct crew member to disconnect wire rope from payload.
2. With crew member pulling on wire rope to keep it fairly taut, begin rewinding the
drum by pushing down on winch control lever 1.
3. Check that wire rope winds neatly onto drum without tangling, kinking, twisting,
or overlapping. Ensure coils on the drum are tight and close together.
4. Direct crew member to signal when enough slack has been taken up to anchor the
clevis.
5. Have crew member anchor wire rope clevis on winch wire rope hook.
WINCH WIRE
ROPE
WIRE
ROPE
CLEVIS
WINCH WIRE
ROPE HOOK
Figure 17. Securing Winch Wire Rope.
END OF TASK
NORMAL SHUTDOWN OF WINCH PTO (M916 AND M920)
1. Release winch controls. Push in winch throttle control.
2. Reduce engine rpm using throttle control at the winch station.
3. Move PTO control to the disengage position.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0012-22
TM 9-2320-273-10
0013
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
OPERATING AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
WP 0003
WP 0005
WP 0008
TOWING PINTLE
To open pintle:
1. Remove cotter pin.
2. Move latch and lift lock to open position.
To close pintle:
1. Move latch and push lock down. Latch will engage in closed position.
2. Insert cotter pin to secure lock.
LATCH
COTTER PIN
LOCK
Figure 1. Towing Pintle.
END OF TASK
0013-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0013
TIE DOWNS AND LIFTING SHACKLES
WARNING
Improper use of lifting equipment and attachment of cables
to tractor may result in injury or death to personnel or
damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of
an injury.
Lifting sling must have a weight capacity greater than the
weight of the vehicle. Refer to specified vehicle weight in
Equipment Description and Data (WP 0003). Failure to
comply may result in injury or death to personnel or damage
to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
1. To lift truck, attach lifting sling to designated lifting shackles. Refer to
figures 2 through 5.
TIE DOWNS
LIFTING SHACKLE
TIE DOWNS
LIFTING
SHACKLE
LIFTING SHACKLE
M915
Figure 2. M915 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs.
0013-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0013
TIE DOWNS AND LIFTING SHACKLES - CONTINUED
TIE DOWNS
LIFTING SHACKLES
TIE DOWNS
LIFTING
SHACKLES
M916 and M918
Figure 3. M916 and M918 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs.
0013-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0013
TIE DOWNS AND LIFTING SHACKLES - CONTINUED
WARNING
Ensure lifting area is clear of all non-essential personnel
prior to lifting and no personnel enters during lifting
operation. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
2. Lift truck slowly and have observers watch for any signs of cable failure, unusual
load shifts, and obstructions.
3. During air or sea transport, secure truck by attaching cables to designated tie
down points. Refer to figures 2 through 5.
TIE DOWNS
TIE DOWNS
LIFTING SHACKLE
LIFTING
SHACKLES
M917, M919, and M920
Figure 4. M917, M919, and M920 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs.
0013-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0013
TIE DOWNS AND LIFTING SHACKLES - CONTINUED
LIFTING SHACKLES
AND TIE DOWNS
TOWING EYES,
LIFTING
SHACKLES,
AND TIE DOWNS
TOWING EYES,
LIFTING
SHACKLES,
AND TIE DOWNS
LIFTING SHACKLES
AND TIE DOWNS
M915A1
Figure 5. M915A1 Towing Eyes, Lifting Shackles, and Tie Downs.
END OF TASK
0013-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0013
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
WARNING
Contact with fire extinguisher chemicals may cause skin
irritation. Use caution while discharging chemicals. Do not
spray on or at any personnel. Use chemical resistant gloves.
In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated clothing
and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Wash
contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact may cause
irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield or
goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of eye contact,
flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least 15
minutes or until irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause
irritation to upper respiratory passages. DO NOT have food
or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
To operate:
1. Remove extinguisher from bracket located at rear of tool box to left of passenger
seat.
2. Hold extinguisher upright. Point nozzle toward base of fire and pull safety pin.
3. Press top lever, discharging chemical at base of fire. Use side-to-side motion.
4. After using fire extinguisher, notify Field Maintenance that a replacement for used
extinguisher is necessary.
SAFETY PIN
LEVER
NOZZLE
EXTINGUISHER
Figure 6. Fire Extinguisher.
END OF TASK
0013-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0013
NATO SLAVE RECEPTACLE
NATO slave receptacle is mounted on side of battery box toward the front of the truck.
This receptacle is used primarily as a cable connection for jump starting your truck or
another truck.
NATO
SLAVE
RECEPTACLE
BATTERY
Figure 7. NATO Slave Receptacle.
END OF TASK
0013-7
TM 9-2320-273-10
AIR CONDITIONING (AIR CONDITIONING KIT EQUIPPED VEHICLES ONLY)
To operate:
1. Start engine and allow engine to reach operating temperature (WP 0008).
2. Move A/C ON/OFF switch to ON position (WP 0005).
3. Adjust fan speed switch as necessary (WP 0005).
4. Adjust blower unit vents as desired.
A/C ON/OFF
SWITCH
FAN SPEED
SWITCH
BLOWER UNIT
VENTS
Figure 8. Air Conditioning.
END OF TASK
0013-8
0013
TM 9-2320-273-10
0013
ESCAPE HATCH (CREW PROTECTION KIT EQUIPPED VEHICLES ONLY)
To operate:
1. Pull escape hatch latch out.
NOTE
Escape hatch latch will engage when escape hatch is moved
to full open position.
2. Pull grab handle toward passenger side of cab, and slide escape hatch to full open
position.
ESCAPE HATCH
LATCH
ESCAPE
HATCH
GRAB HANDLE
Figure 9. Opening Escape Hatch.
0013-9
TM 9-2320-273-10
0013
ESCAPE HATCH (CREW PROTECTION KIT EQUIPPED VEHICLES ONLY) CONTINUED
3. Release rear window latch, and slide rear sliding window toward passenger side
of vehicle to full open position.
REAR SLIDING
WINDOW
REAR WINDOW
LATCH
Figure 10. Opening Cab Rear Sliding Window.
0013-10
TM 9-2320-273-10
0013
ESCAPE HATCH (CREW PROTECTION KIT EQUIPPED VEHICLES ONLY) CONTINUED
NOTE
On vehicles equipped with rear window stone shield, stone
shield pins can be removed from inside cab through sliding
rear window.
4. On driver side of cab, remove two pins from rear window stone shield.
5. Open stone shield and exit vehicle through opening in escape hatch and sliding
rear window.
STONE SHIELD
PINS
Figure 11. Opening Stone Shield.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0013-11/12 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
0014
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES
INITIAL SETUP: Not Applicable
GENERAL
Locations and descriptions of data plates and decals found on the vehicles are provided
under this heading. If any data plate or decal is worn, broken, unreadable, painted over,
or missing, it must be replaced. Notify your supervisor.
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES
Engine Retarder Instruction Decal - This decal, located on driver sun visor, describes
engine retarder operation.
Noise Emission Control Information Decal - This decal, located on driver sun visor,
describes transmission operation.
Power Take-Off Instruction Decal - This decal, located on driver sun visor, describes
power take-off (PTO) operation for M916 through M920 vehicles.
Transmission Instruction Decal - This decal, located on driver sun visor, describes
transmission operating instructions.
ENGINE RETARDER
INSTRUCTION DECAL
TRANSMISSION
INSTRUCTION DECAL
NOISE EMISSION
CONTROL INFORMATION
DECAL
POWER TAKE-OFF
INSTRUCTION DECAL
Figure 1. Sun Visor Instruction and Information Decals.
0014-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge Decal - This decal, located on instrument
panel, describes transmission oil temperature gauge reading.
Ether Quick Start Instruction Decal - This decal, located on instrument panel,
describes ether quick start system operation.
Differential Lockup Instruction Decal - This decal, located on instrument panel,
describes inter-axle differential control operation.
Vehicle Warranty Decal - This decal, located on instrument panel, describes vehicle
warranty.
TRANSMISSION OIL
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE DECAL
ETHER QUICK START
INSTRUCTION DECAL
DIFFERENTIAL
LOCKUP
INSTRUCTION
DECAL
VEHICLE WARRANTY
DECAL
Figure 2. Instrument Panel Instruction and Information Decals.
0014-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Rust Proofing Data Decal - This decal, located on inside of driver door, describes
vehicle rust proofing data.
Transmission Service Instructions Decal (M915 through M920) - This decal, located
on inside of the driver door, describes transmission service instructions.
Towing Instruction Decal (M915A1) - This decal, located on inside of driver door,
describes towing instructions.
No Spin Operating Instructions Decal (M915 through M920) - This decal, located
on inside of driver door, describes no spin operating instructions.
Vehicle Identification Data - This decal, located on inside of driver door, identifies
vehicle identification data.
Certification FMVSR Data - This decal, located on inside of driver door, identifies
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Regulation (FMVSR) data.
TRANSMISSION SERVICE
INSTRUCTION DECAL
RUST PROOFING
DATA DECAL
TOWING INSTRUCTION
DECAL
CERTIFICATION
FMVSR DATA
VEHICLE
IDENTIFICATION
DATA
NO SPIN OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS DECAL
Figure 3. Driver Door Data Plates and Instruction Information Decals.
0014-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Relay Identification Decal (M915A1) - The decal, located below each relay, identifies
the function controlled by the relay. Maintenance uses these decals to identify electrical
circuits so repairs can be made.
Circuit Breaker Identification Decal (M915A1) - The decal, located under each
circuit breaker, identifies them by number. Maintenance uses this decal to identify
electrical circuits so repairs can be made.
RELAY
IDENTIFICATION
DECAL
CIRCUIT BREAKER
IDENTIFICATION
DECAL
Figure 4. M915A1 Circuit Breaker and Relay Identification Decals.
0014-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Transmission Air Pressure Control Operating Data (M915 through M920) - This
data plate, located on side of shift console, describes transmission air pressure control
operating instructions.
Seat Adjustment Instruction Decals - These decals, located on side of driver seat,
describe how to operate seat adjustment controls.
Transmission Operating Instructions (M915 through M920) - This data plate,
located on top of shift console, describes transmission operating instructions.
Cab Controlled Fifth Wheel Instruction Data (M915A1) - This data plate, located
on fifth wheel control, identifies when fifth wheel control is in Locked or Unlocked
position.
TRANSMISSION AIR
PRESSURE CONTROL
OPERATING DATA
CAB CONTROLLED
FIFTH WHEEL
INSTRUCTION DATA
TRANSMISSION
OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SEAT ADJUSTMENT
INSTRUCTION DECALS
M915 THROUGH M920
SEAT ADJUSTMENT
INSTRUCTION DECALS
M915A1
Figure 5. Driver Seat Instruction Decals.
0014-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) Air Filter Warning
Decal - This decal, located on the air cleaner, warns if CBRN exposure is suspected.
All air filter media should be handled by personnel wearing protective equipment.
Consult your unit CBRN officer or noncommissioned officer for appropriate handling or
disposal instructions.
Hood Latching Safety Precautions Decal - This decal, located under the hood,
describes proper instructions for raising and supporting the hood safely.
CBRN AIR FILTER
WARNING DECAL
HOOD LATCHING SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS DECAL
Figure 6. Engine Compartment Decals.
0014-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Fan Clutch Actuator Safety Precautions Decal - This decal, located on the fan
shroud, alerts personnel to fan clutch actuator safety precautions.
FAN CLUTCH ACTUATOR
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DECAL
Figure 7. Fan Shroud Decals.
0014-7
0014
TM 9-2320-273-10
0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
M872 Trailer Fifth Wheel Alignment Arrow Decals (M915A1) - These decals,
located on both sides of fifth wheel, identify proper position of fifth wheel for towing
the M872 trailer.
Fifth Wheel Positioning Instructions Decal (M915A1) - This decal, located on both
sides of fifth wheel, describes sliding fifth operation.
M872 TRAILER FIFTH WHEEL
ALIGNMENT ARROW DECALS
FIFTH WHEEL POSITIONING
INSTRUCTIONS DECAL
Figure 8. Fifth Wheel Decals.
0014-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
0014
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES - CONTINUED
Winch Control Operating Instructions Decal (M916 and M920) - These decals,
located on top of the winch control station, describe the operation of winch controls.
Tank Capacity and Filling Instruction Decal (M916 and M920) - This decal,
located on the winch hydraulic reservoir tank, identifies tank capacity and instructions
for filling tank to the proper level.
Winch Identification Data Plate (M916 and M920) - This data plate, located on right
side of winch frame, lists the winch manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
WINCH CONTROL
OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
DECAL
TANK CAPACITY
AND FILLING
INSTRUCTION DECAL
WINCH
IDENTIFICATION
DATA PLATE
Figure 9. Winch Decals and Data Plates.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0014-9/10 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
0015
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
AR 70-1
FM 55-30
FM 21-305
WP 0013
WP 0016
WP 0017
WP
WP
WP
WP
WP
0018
0019
0020
0021
0034
WARNING
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and
efficiently within the limits specified in the TM in
accordance with (IAW) AR 70-1. Operation beyond these
limits without written approval from the Commander, U.S.
Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN:
AMSTA-CG, Warren, MI 48397-5000, is prohibited. Failure
to comply may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
GENERAL
NOTE
For maintenance under unusual conditions, refer to
WP 0034.
This work package (WP), and WP 0016 through WP 0021 and WP 0034, provide
operating and maintenance procedures for operating the vehicle under unusual
conditions, including extreme temperatures, humidity, difficult terrain, fording, spring
brake operation, and towing the vehicle.
For information on operation under unusual conditions for M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit and Air
Conditioning Kit, refer to WP 0016 through WP 0021 and WP 0034. For emergency
use of Crew Protection Kit escape hatch, refer to WP 0013.
0015-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0015
GENERAL - CONTINUED
When operating under unusual conditions, it is especially important to keep vehicle
clean and adequately lubricated. Become familiar with these WPs and the referenced
publications. FM 55-30 contains important information on driver selection and training.
FM 21-305 provides basic instruction for operators of wheeled vehicles. Use the
information in these manuals along with the guidelines in the following WPs to operate
the vehicle properly under unusual conditions.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0015-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0016
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
EXTREME COLD CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
FM 9-207
WP 0003
WP 0009
WARNING
The driver and passenger must wear seatbelts during vehicle
operation. Ensure seatbelts are fastened and properly
adjusted before placing vehicle in motion. Failure to comply
may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
OPERATION IN EXTREME COLD CONDITIONS
1. M915 through M920 and M915A1 vehicles require special attention and care
during periods of extreme cold weather. Remember that in extreme cold:
a.
Lubricants thicken.
b.
Batteries may lose power or freeze.
c.
Electrical insulation can crack causing short circuits.
d.
Fuel may not combine properly with air to form the necessary mixture for
starting the engine.
e.
Metals and other materials may become hard or brittle.
f.
The cooling system requires adequate protection from extreme cold.
g.
Fuels, lubricants, and antifreeze compounds require special storage, handling,
and use.
2. Read and become familiar with the material in the referenced publications. They
cover information needed when operating a vehicle in extreme cold. Keep in mind
the problems characteristic of operation in cold weather, and ensure vehicle is
adequately prepared and protected for existing weather conditions. Follow these
guidelines when operating vehicle in conditions of extreme cold.
3. For detailed guidance on antifreeze protection, lubrication, electrical system
service, and other maintenance requirements for extreme cold operations, refer to
FM 9-207.
0016-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0016
OPERATION IN EXTREME COLD CONDITIONS - CONTINUED
CAUTION
Never use a scraper to remove frost or ice from ballistic
glass. Failure to comply may result in damage to outer layer
of ballistic glass.
NOTE
To clear frost and ice from ballistic glass, perform step 3 for
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1
vehicles.
Clearing frost and ice from ballistic glass requires more time
than standard glass.
It will require more effort in extreme cold to open and close
armor doors, egress window, and access door.
4. On vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, extend vehicle warm-up time and
operate heater and defroster to clear frost or ice from all ballistic glass.
END OF TASK
ARCTIC WINTERIZATION KIT
CAUTION
Do not attempt to use extension cords in conjunction with
the supplied winterization auxiliary power cable unless wire
size is sufficient to carry 40 amps of current. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment.
1. When operating in arctic conditions, ensure vehicle is equipped with Arctic
Winterization Kit. All vehicles assigned to arctic regions must be equipped with a
winterization kit for protection of vehicle systems from freeze damage and to
enable engine starting in extreme cold. The kit consists of four separate heaters
which are:
a.
Engine coolant heater (thermostatically controlled)
b.
Transmission heater (immersion type)
c.
Engine oil heater (immersion type - thermostatically controlled)
d. Battery heater (coil type - thermostatically controlled)
2. The arctic winterization system is powered by use of an external alternating
current (ac) power source. A 25 ft (7.6 m) auxiliary power cable, equipped with
ground wire, is provided with the Arctic Winterization Kit. The auxiliary power
cable is designed to connect to the receptacle located adjacent to the vehicle
battery box and a compatible ac outlet. Each of the four heaters is turned on by a
separate circuit breaker located inside a waterproof circuit breaker box. The
heaters function automatically until the system is turned off. To turn on system:
0016-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0016
ARCTIC WINTERIZATION KIT - CONTINUED
a.
When low temperatures are expected and vehicle will not be driven again
while still warm, park vehicle within 25 ft (7.6 m) of auxiliary power
source.
b.
Ensure engine coolant heater shutoff valve (Figure 1, Item 2), located on
right side of engine below turbocharger (Figure 1, Item 1), is open.
1
2
Figure 1. Engine Coolant Shutoff Valve.
c.
Open cover (Figure 2, Item 1) and connect auxiliary power cable to heater
receptacle (Figure 2, Item 2). Connect opposite end of auxiliary power cable
to external power source.
1
2
Figure 2. Heater Receptacle.
0016-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0016
ARCTIC WINTERIZATION KIT - CONTINUED
d.
Open circuit breaker box door (Figure 3, Item 1) and switch four circuit
breakers (Figure 3, Item 3) to ON position.
e.
Close circuit breaker box door (Figure 3, Item 1) to keep weather out.
2
4
1
3
Figure 3. Circuit Breakers.
3. To turn off system:
a.
Open circuit breaker box door (Figure 3, Item 1) and switch four circuit
breakers (Figure 3, Item 3) to OFF position.
b.
Close circuit breaker box door (Figure 3, Item 1).
c.
Disconnect auxiliary power cable from heater receptacle (Figure 3, Item 4)
and close cover (Figure 3, Item 2). Disconnect opposite end of auxiliary
power cable from external power source.
END OF TASK
0016-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0016
STARTING OUT
CAUTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
M915 through M920 vehicles are equipped with strip heaters
to warm transmission during cold weather. The strip heaters
are thermostatically controlled for automatic operation at
temperatures below 30° F (-1° C). The indicator light on the
console lights when the strip heaters are on. Do not operate
the transmission until indicator light goes off. Failure to
comply may result in damage to equipment.
Use your cold weather starting procedure (WP 0009), and give the engine time to
reach an operating temperature range of at least 120–140° F (49–60° C) for M915
through M920 or 140–160° F (60–71° C) for M915A1.
Adjust the amount of winter front coverage over the radiator grille to maintain a
normal coolant operating range of 165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through
M920 or 180–200° F (82–93° C) for M915A1.
Start driving very slowly. Be alert to the possibility that tires may be frozen to the
ground, frozen in the shape of flat spots, or that one or more brake shoes may be
frozen and require preheating. Notify your supervisor if necessary.
Drive very slowly for approximately 100 yards, being careful not to let the engine
stall. By starting out slowly and carefully, you can more easily detect any initial
problems caused by the cold weather, and your tractor’s fluids and components
will have sufficient warm-up time.
END OF TASK
PROTECTING VEHICLE WHEN PARKED
1. If you shut down your tractor for a short period, park in a sheltered area out of
the wind. If there is no shelter available, park so that tractor does not face into the
wind. Install the winter front.
2. If parking your vehicle for a long shutdown period, try to park on high ground
and use planks or brush to make a raised and relatively dry surface for the tires in
case weather conditions worsen. Keep the tires out of snow, water, ice, and mud,
if possible.
3. Clean snow, ice, and mud from vehicle as soon as possible after shutdown.
4. If your vehicle will be parked for an extended period of time during cold weather,
notify your supervisor to have maintenance personnel remove batteries and store
in a warm place. Fill fuel tank to guard against condensation. Drain any
accumulated water from air reservoirs and fuel filter. Install winter front cover.
5. Ensure tires are properly inflated (WP 0003).
0016-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0016
PROTECTING VEHICLE WHEN PARKED - CONTINUED
6. Notify your supervisor to have maintenance personnel check and service the
cooling system to ensure vehicle is adequately protected against extreme cold.
Ensure transmission is in neutral (N) and that vehicle tires are blocked before
leaving the area.
END OF TASK
POWER STEERING
The power steering system incorporates a cooler designed to reduce power steering
fluid temperatures during normal or unusually warm conditions. In extremely cold
weather, the cooler becomes restrictive and must be bypassed to prevent over pressure
and possible rupture of the cooler. Notify supervisor to perform this maintenance when
0° F (–18° C) or below is expected.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0016-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0017
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
EXTREME HOT CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0003
WP 0035
WARNING
The driver and passenger must wear seatbelts during vehicle
operation. Ensure seatbelts are fastened and properly
adjusted before placing vehicle in motion. Failure to comply
may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
OPERATING IN EXTREME HOT CONDITIONS
1. During hot weather, it may be necessary to alter driving procedures to prevent
vehicle from overheating. The following types of operation can cause vehicle to
overheat:
a.
Continuous high speeds
b.
Long, hard pulls
c. Continuous use of low gear ranges on steep grades or in soft terrain
2. Check water and transmission temperature gauges and stop vehicle if unusually
high temperature readings are observed. Allow vehicle to cool.
3. Check cooling system, air cleaner, engine oil level, and radiator fins frequently.
Perform necessary services and notify Field Maintenance of unusual gauge
readings or other problems.
4. Shorten differential oil change interval (WP 0035).
NOTE
Perform steps 5 through 7 for M915P1, M915A1P1,
M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1 vehicles.
The armored cab absorbs and retains more heat than a
standard cab.
5. Park vehicle away from direct sunlight whenever possible.
6. Extend vehicle startup times in order to operate air conditioner to cool down
interior of cab before performing mission.
7. Extended operation of air conditioner is required to cool the interior of cab in
extreme hot weather.
END OF TASK
0017-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0017
PROTECTING VEHICLE WHEN PARKED
1. Park vehicle under cover, if possible to protect against the effects of sun, sand,
and dust. If no shelter is available, cover vehicle with tarpaulins. Ensure
tarpaulins cover the engine compartment and radiator to keep out sand and dust.
Cover window glass to protect against sandblasting.
2. Check tires for damage and ensure all tires are inflated to proper pressures
(WP 0003).
3. Check frequently for rust and fungus growth, which are common problems in hot,
humid weather. Clean and lubricate vehicle to help prevent deterioration.
END OF TASK
POWER STEERING
The power steering system incorporates a cooler designed to reduce power steering
fluid temperatures during normal or unusually warm conditions. Check oil level in
power steering pump reservoir more often during periods of operation in extreme hot
weather (WP 0035).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0017-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0018
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
UNUSUAL TERRAIN OPERATION
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
FM 21-305
WP 0010
WARNING
The driver and passenger must wear seatbelts during vehicle
operation. Ensure seatbelts are fastened and properly
adjusted before placing vehicle in motion. Failure to comply
may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
GENERAL
Become familiar with the procedures in FM 21-305 for driving on unusual terrain. The
information on unusual terrain listed in this work package is applicable to all models
except where noted. The M915 and M915A1 are not designed or intended for off-road
use. However, if the adverse conditions described in this work package are
unavoidable, the recommended procedures given should be applied.
CAUTION
Do not use pusher axle during off-highway operations.
Failure to comply may result in decreased traction and
possible damage to equipment.
NOTE
Perform step 1 for M917, M917P1, M919, M920, and
M920P1 vehicles having pusher axle.
When engaging the locking system, the driving axles will
receive equal torque.
1. Relieve air pressure load on pusher axle and raise pusher axle. This will increase
traction by shifting weight to the driving axles.
2. In areas where the ground surface provides poor traction, move differential
LOCK/UNLOCK lever to the LOCK position, refer to WP 0010.
3. Use the differential LOCK/UNLOCK control as needed for better traction.
Disengage differential lockup when conditions return to normal. For instructions
on operating the inter-axle differential lockup system, refer to WP 0010.
END OF TASK
0018-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0018
WOODS AND ROCKY TERRAIN
1. Ensure vehicle can clear ground obstructions such as stumps or rocks before
driving over them. Objects can damage components underneath vehicle. Avoid
hanging limbs which might cause damage.
NOTE
M915, M915A1, and M916 vehicles are equipped with a
spare wheel and tire assembly. M917 through M920 vehicles
are not equipped with a spare.
2. When driving over rocky terrain, there will be a greater chance of tire punctures.
Ensure a spare wheel and tire assembly is available.
END OF TASK
MUD OR OTHER SOFT SURFACES
1. Before entering mud or soft surfaces, check conditions and select the appropriate
transmission gear to allow vehicle through the area. Enter the soft area at a
medium speed for the gear you have selected.
2. Maintain steady pressure on accelerator pedal to keep your vehicle rolling until
solid ground is reached. Do not accelerate to the point of spinning the wheels.
3. If vehicle becomes stuck, try to pull out slowly in a lower gear. If necessary,
place boards, brush, or similar material under tires to provide traction.
NOTE
M916 and M920 vehicles are equipped with a winch.
Perform step 4 for self-recovery or to assist another stuck
vehicle using winch.
4. If vehicle is not coupled to a trailer, it may be possible to use the vehicle’s winch
for self-recovery or to assist in pulling another stuck vehicle out. Attach winch
cable to another vehicle or other stationary object that will not move under load
when pulling on it.
END OF TASK
SAND
NOTE
If operating the M915 through M920 or M915A1 in sand,
follow the guidelines in steps 1 through 4 below.
1. Maintain steady, even movement with the transmission in low gear. Keep vehicle
rolling without straining the engine and power train.
2. If vehicle becomes stuck, adjust tire pressure to gain additional traction. Reduce
pressure in the front tires to 50 psi (345 kPa) and reduce pressure in the rear tires
to 45 psi (310 kPa). When vehicle is free, inflate all tires to normal pressure.
3. If vehicle bogs down after reducing tire pressure, place boards, brush, canvas, or
similar materials under and in front of tires to provide better traction.
0018-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0018
SAND - CONTINUED
4. If these efforts fail and operator cannot free vehicle under its own power, use
another vehicle to assist in pulling out stuck vehicle or for M916 and M920, use
winch for self-recovery or to assist in pulling another stuck vehicle out.
NOTE
If operating the M915 through M920 or M915A1 in sandy
or dusty areas, follow the guidelines in steps 5 through 10
below.
5. Ensure each tire has a valve cap.
6. Check engine and transmission temperature and engine oil pressure gauges
frequently.
7. If vehicle overheats, stop vehicle, assess the problem, or notify your supervisor to
have maintenance assess the problem.
8. Clear engine oil level tube and transmission fluid level/filler tube before removing
dipsticks to check fluids. Clean accumulations of sand and dirt from around fluid
filler locations before checking or adding fluids.
9. Clean spouts of fuel containers and areas around filler cap on fuel tank before
adding fuel. Under extreme sandy or dusty conditions, filter fuel when filling tank.
10. When parking vehicle overnight or for an extended period in sandy conditions,
park so rear of vehicle faces toward the wind or cover the radiator and all
window glass with canvas.
END OF TASK
SNOW AND ICE DRIVING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the tires.
Drive at slower speeds.
Give signals sooner.
Lightly pump brakes once or twice to give early warning of intention to stop.
This will also help to avoid skidding.
Maintain at least double the normal distance from the vehicle ahead.
Keep windshields, windows, mirrors, headlamps, stoplamps, and body lamps clean
and free of snow and ice. Use defrosters and fans to help keep glass free of snow
and ice.
Descend moderate grades in the gear normally used to ascend the same grade. On
steep or very slippery grades, lock differential, use at least one gear lower, and
activate engine retarder system.
After driving through slush or water, drive slowly and test the brakes. Continue
driving slowly, maintaining moderate pressure on the service brake pedal to create
a slight drag. Resume normal speed when brakes are dry and operating properly.
0018-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0018
SNOW AND ICE DRIVING - CONTINUED
9. If you come to a difficult stretch of road, stop and inspect it carefully before
driving on it. Select the transmission gear most likely to allow vehicle over that
stretch of road and lock differential.
10. If tires start spinning, stop, back up, and try again. If necessary, rock out by
locking the differential, shifting to forward gear and accelerating lightly. Shift into
reverse when vehicle’s forward motion stops. Repeat alternate shifting and
acceleration until vehicle can use the momentum to rock out of the slippery area.
Avoid spinning the tires and do not exceed 800–900 engine rpm.
END OF TASK
STOPPING
WARNING
Do not use engine retarder on slippery road surfaces. Using
engine retarder on wet, icy, or snow covered roads may
result in loss of vehicle control. Failure to comply may result
in damage to equipment and injury to death to personnel.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1. Ease up on accelerator, leaving vehicle in gear already selected.
2. Apply brakes evenly to slow vehicle, and gradually pump brakes to avoid
skidding.
3. Avoid sudden braking on slick roads which may cause vehicle to skid and trailer
to jackknife.
END OF TASK
PARKING
1. When parking vehicle on an icy, slushy, wet, or muddy surface, place boards,
brush, or other material underneath tires to provide traction. This guards against
tires freezing to the ground or becoming pocketed in ice, and provides traction
when vehicle is started and moving again.
2. Block tires and leave transmission control lever in neutral (N) rather than setting
parking brake.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0018-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0019
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
FORDING OPERATION
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0010
WP 0034
WP 0035
BEFORE FORDING
WARNING
Due to increased weight and raised center of gravity on
vehicles equipped with Crew Protection Kit, vehicle operator
must be aware of differences in driving characteristics and
adjust driving accordingly. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment or possible injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1. Before fording with the vehicle, check bottom surface condition of the water
body. Ensure bottom surface is hard enough to ford without exceeding the
maximum fording depth of 20 inches (51 cm). If the bottom surface is too soft,
do not attempt fording. Ford to the maximum depth for short periods or short
distances only.
2. Ensure engine is operating properly before entering water.
3. Lubricate unpainted surfaces properly before entering water.
0019-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0019
BEFORE FORDING - CONTINUED
4. Engage driveline locking system. Move inter-axle differential control
(Figure 1, Item 2) to the LOCK position. For instructions on operating the
inter-axle differential lockup system, refer to WP 0010.
1
2
3
Figure 1. Fording.
END OF TASK
DURING FORDING
1. Put transmission selector lever (Figure 1, Item 1) in a low gear range.
2. Enter water slowly.
3. Observe speedometer (Figure 1, Item 3) and ford at speeds of no more than
3–4 mph (5–6 kph).
4. When vehicle emerges from water, apply brakes repeatedly to dry brake linings.
Ensure brakes are working properly before driving vehicle at normal speeds.
END OF TASK
0019-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0019
AFTER FORDING
NOTE
All models can ford up to 20 in. (51 cm) for five minutes
without maintenance for vehicle to continue operation.
1. During fording, water may enter vehicle or its components and contaminate the
fluid systems. Ensure any accumulated water is removed from vehicle before it
causes damage to systems, surfaces, or equipment.
2. As soon as possible after fording, check vehicle using the following guidelines:
a.
Let the engine run for sufficient time to drive out any accumulated water.
b.
Drain or dry areas on vehicle where water has accumulated.
c.
Check each fluid system in vehicle for evidence of water contamination. If
water is found in one or more fluid systems, notify your supervisor to drain,
flush, and refill the contaminated system.
d.
Notify your supervisor of any necessary service or repairs before returning
vehicle to normal use, refer to After Fording in WP 0034.
e.
Notify your supervisor if lubrication is needed after fording is complete,
refer to Lubrication Instructions in WP 0035.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0019-3/4 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
0020
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
SPRING BRAKE POWER SPRING OPERATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools
Equipment Condition
Wheels chocked (WP 0012).
Adjustable wrench, 12 in.
(WP 0037, Table 5, Item 7)
WARNING
Chock wheels to keep vehicle from moving before brakes
are released. Failure to comply may result in serious injury
or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of
an injury.
GENERAL
NOTE
M915A1 vehicles equipped with anti-lock brake system
(ABS) have spring brake chambers added to rear-rear axle
brakes.
In the event of an air system pressure loss, the spring brake chambers on the
forward-rear axle will apply the forward-rear axle brakes on the M915A1. On M915
through M920 vehicles, the spring brake chambers on the forward-rear axle and
rear-rear axle will apply the forward-rear axle and rear-rear axle brakes. If the vehicle
must be moved and there is not enough air system pressure to compress the power
spring in the spring brake chambers and release the brakes, you must do this manually.
0020-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0020
MANUALLY COMPRESSING SPRING BRAKE POWER SPRING
1. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 3), washer (Figure 1, Item 2), and release stud
(Figure 1, Item 1) from stowage pocket (Figure 1, Item 7) of failed spring
chamber (Figure 1, Item 6).
2. Remove dust cover (Figure 1, Item 4) from spring chamber (Figure 1, Item 6).
3. Insert cross-pin end of release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) into opening under dust
cover (Figure 1, Item 4) on spring chamber (Figure 1, Item 6).
4. After release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) has been inserted far enough to engage
pressure plate (Figure 1, Item 5), turn release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) ¼ turn to
lock cross-pin end of release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) into pressure plate
(Figure 1, Item 5).
5. Install washer (Figure 1, Item 2) and nut (Figure 1, Item 3) on release stud
(Figure 1, Item 1).
NOTE
Chock wheels to prevent vehicle from moving before brakes
are released. Failure to comply may result in serious injury
or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of
an injury.
Observe that push rod retracts while tightening nut. This
indicates pressure plate has been properly engaged.
6. Tighten nut (Figure 1, Item 3) until 2.5–2.75 in. (6.4–7 cm) of release stud
(Figure 1, Item 1) remains visible above nut (Figure 1, Item 3). Spring brake is
then fully engaged.
1
2
3
1
4
7
6
2
3
Figure 1. Spring Brake Power Spring.
END OF TASK
0020-2
5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0020
MANUALLY RELEASING SPRING BRAKE POWER SPRING
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
4.
If power springs have been manually compressed, perform
steps 1 through 4 to release them before returning vehicle to
service.
Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 3) and washer (Figure 1, Item 2) from release stud
(Figure 1, Item 1).
Disengage cross-pin end of release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) from pressure plate
(Figure 1, Item 5) and remove release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) from spring
chamber (Figure 1, Item 6).
Install dust cover (Figure 1, Item 4) on spring chamber (Figure 1, Item 6).
Install release stud (Figure 1, Item 1) in stowage pocket (Figure 1, Item 7) with
washer (Figure 1, Item 2) and nut (Figure 1, Item 3).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0020-3/4 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
0021
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
TOWING VEHICLE
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools
References
WP 0010
FM 20-22
FM 21-305
Medium duty tow bar (WP 0038)
Personnel Required
Two
CAUTION
If the M915 or M915A1 must be towed with rear wheels on
the ground, the transmission-to-rear axle prop shaft must be
removed. Failure to comply may result in serious damage to
automatic transmission and rear tandem axle differentials.
If the M916 through M920 vehicles must be towed with
front wheels on the ground, the transmission-to-front axle
prop shaft must be removed. Failure to comply may result in
serious damage to automatic transmission and front axle
differential.
NOTE
For cross-country towing, all tires should be on the ground.
GENERAL
Refer to FM 21-305 for general guidelines on vehicle recovery and use of warning kits
and signals. FM 21-305, FM 20-22, and the following procedures provide instructions
for towing.
PREPARATION FOR TOWING
M915 AND M915A1
1. If possible, tow with rear wheels suspended. This eliminates the need for removal
of prop shaft or axle shafts.
2. If vehicle must be towed with rear wheels on the ground, set inter-axle differential
control to the UNLOCK position (WP 0010) and notify your supervisor to remove
transmission and forward-rear axle prop shaft at universal joints. After removal of
prop shaft, secure prop shaft to truck undercarriage.
3. If prop shaft cannot be removed, notify your supervisor to remove all four axle
shafts from two rear axle assemblies. Secure axle shafts to vehicle to prevent
damage.
0021-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0021
M916 THROUGH M920
1. If possible, tow with rear wheels suspended. This eliminates need for removal of
rear prop shaft or axle shafts.
2. If vehicle must be towed with rear wheels on ground, set inter-axle differential
control to UNLOCK position (WP 0010) and notify your supervisor to remove the
transmission and forward-rear axle prop shaft at universal joints and front axle
prop shaft at universal joint. After removal of prop shafts, secure prop shafts to
vehicle undercarriage.
3. If prop shafts cannot be removed, notify your supervisor to remove all four axle
shafts from two rear axle assemblies and two front axle shafts from front axle.
Secure axle shafts to vehicle to prevent damage.
END OF TASK
USE OF TOW BAR
NOTE
Vehicle may be towed short distances (half mile to a
maximum of 10 miles), at low speeds without removing prop
shafts or axle shafts. Engine must be running at idle to turn
transmission oil pump.
Ensure towing device is long enough to allow for complete
turning radius.
Towing vehicle speed with prop or axle shafts removed
should be restricted to a maximum of 15 mph (24 kph) on
primary roads and 8 mph (13 kph) on secondary roads.
1. Install medium duty tow bar (NSN 2540-01-267-2912) on pintle of towing vehicle
and towing eyes of towed vehicle.
NOTE
2.
3.
4.
5.
Quick disconnect couplings are provided in the bumper for
air brake operation.
Connect air pressure hoses between towed vehicle and towing vehicle for air
brake operation.
Place transmission control lever in neutral (N).
Release parking brakes.
Turn on appropriate lights.
0021-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
USE OF TOW BAR - CONTINUED
Figure 1. Air Pressure Hose Connections.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0021-3/4 blank
0021
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 3
TROUBLESHOOTING MASTER INDEX
TM 9-2320-273-10
0022
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
TROUBLESHOOTING MASTER INDEX
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Symptom
Page
AIR CONDITIONING (M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1)
A/C unit does not function ..............................................................................WP 0023-22
A/C unit not producing cool air ......................................................................WP 0023-22
Compressor noise or vibration .........................................................................WP 0023-23
AIR SYSTEM AND BRAKES
Air system loses pressure during tractor operation or low air pressure
warning lamp and buzzer come on during tractor operation ......................... WP 0023-10
Low pressure in air system
(low air pressure warning lamp and buzzer are on) .........................................WP 0023-9
Trailer brakes will not apply when brake pedal is used or hand control
on steering column is used ................................................................................WP 0023-9
Trailer brakes will not release .........................................................................WP 0023-10
DRIVELINE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
Driveline will not disengage (indicator lamp stays on) when differential
LOCK/UNLOCK is moved to UNLOCK position .........................................WP 0023-11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
One or more electrical systems not working ..................................................WP 0023-14
ENGINE
Engine cranks but does not start ....................................................................... WP
Engine cranks but does not start below 32° F (0° C) ......................................WP
Engine does not crank when starter switch is activated ...................................WP
Engine does not idle properly ............................................................................WP
Engine lacks power ............................................................................................WP
Engine retarder does not reduce tractor speed ..................................................WP
Engine starts but misfires or runs rough after proper warmup period .............WP
Engine temperature exceeds 210° F (99° C) .................................................... WP
Excessive engine oil consumption .....................................................................WP
Excessive exhaust noise or fumes in or near cab .............................................WP
Excessive exhaust smoke after engine reaches normal operating
temperature of 160–185° F (71–85° C) for M915 through M920 or
180–200° F (82–93° C) for M915A1 ................................................................WP
Low or no engine oil pressure ...........................................................................WP
0022-1
0023-2
0023-3
0023-2
0023-3
0023-5
0023-6
0023-3
0023-4
0023-5
0023-6
0023-6
0023-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0022
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES - CONTINUED
Symptom
Page
PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, and M920)
Pusher axle will not come up ..........................................................................WP 0023-18
Pusher axle will not go down ..........................................................................WP 0023-19
Pusher axle will not maintain load reaction ....................................................WP 0023-19
POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) (M916 THROUGH M920)
PTO does not engage .......................................................................................WP 0023-20
PTO indicator light stays on even though the PTO control knob is pushed
completely in ............................................................................................WP 0023-20
SLIDING FIFTH WHEEL AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (M915A1)
Fifth wheel cannot be locked in desired position when LOCK/UNLOCK
control is moved to LOCK position (tractor coupled to trailer) ....................WP 0023-12
Fifth wheel cannot be unlocked from previous position when control is
moved to UNLOCK position ...........................................................................WP 0023-13
STEERING
Hard steering, shimmy, or wandering .............................................................WP 0023-14
Vehicle steering slow to respond or intermittent ............................................WP 0023-15
TRANSMISSION
Fluid leaking from transmission breather ..........................................................WP
Foamy fluid on transmission dipstick ................................................................WP
Slow or erratic transmission engagement ..........................................................WP
Transmission fluid temperature gauge indicates overheating ...........................WP
0023-8
0023-7
0023-8
0023-8
WINCH (M916 AND M920)
Winch drum will not operate ...........................................................................WP 0023-21
Winch unusually noisy when operating ..........................................................WP 0023-21
WHEELS AND TIRES
Excessive or uneven tire wear .........................................................................WP 0023-17
Vehicle wanders or pulls to one side on level pavement ...............................WP 0023-17
Wheel vibrates or wobbles .............................................................................. WP 0023-16
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0022-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 4
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
DA Form 2404
DA Form 5988-E
DA Form 5504
WP 0003
WP 0005
WP 0009
WP
WP
WP
WP
WP
0012
0025
0029
0033
0035
INTRODUCTION
This work package contains operator level troubleshooting procedures for correcting
unsatisfactory operation and basic equipment malfunctions.
Each troubleshooting procedure lists a fault symptom describing a specific problem.
Under each symptom is a list of possible malfunctions in the order of probability that
may be the cause of the problem. Finally, a corrective action is provided for each
malfunction followed by a work package or TM reference or instruction to notify
supervisor to correct the problem.
Prior to performing any troubleshooting procedure, the following recommendations
must be observed.
NOTE
This manual cannot list all possible malfunctions that may
occur. If the symptom for a particular problem or
malfunction is not listed in this work package, notify your
supervisor.
1. Isolate component where malfunction occurs by finding the symptom that most
accurately describes the problem.
2. Perform troubleshooting procedure in the order in which steps are listed.
3. Consider the possibility that the problem could be simple in origin and may
require only minor adjustment; use common sense.
4. If a problem cannot be corrected after performing all corrective actions listed for
a given symptom, notify supervisor.
5. If the corrective action is not authorized at the operator level, operators must
provide a brief written description of the problem using Equipment Inspection and
Maintenance Worksheet, DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E, and Maintenance
Request Form, DA Form 5504.
0023-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
ENGINE
WARNING
Hearing protection is required for personnel when engine is
running for an extended period of time and personnel are
close to vehicle. Noise levels produced by vehicle may
exceed 85 dB. Long-term exposure to this noise level may
cause hearing loss. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
NOTE
If corrective action does not correct malfunction, notify
supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Engine does not crank when starter switch is activated.
MALFUNCTION
Engine run switch is not in ON position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Move engine run switch to ON position.
MALFUNCTION
Transmission range selector is not in neutral position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Move transmission range selector lever to neutral (N) position.
MALFUNCTION
Loose battery cables or terminals.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Tighten loose connections and clean dirty cables. If cables are broken, notify
supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Engine cranks but does not start.
MALFUNCTION
Empty fuel tank or fuel system malfunction.
0023-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
ENGINE - CONTINUED
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Visually check for fuel system leaks before completely filling fuel tank.
2. When fuel tank is completely drained and then refilled, the fuel system
must be bled. If fuel system needs to be bled, notify supervisor.
3. Check fuel gauge (WP 0005). Fill fuel tank, as required.
4. Check air filter restriction gauge. If gauge indicates restriction (red
instead of green), notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Engine cranks but does not start below 32° F (0° C).
MALFUNCTION
Ether starting aid is not being used correctly.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Follow proper cold weather starting procedures using ether starting aid
(WP 0009).
SYMPTOM
Engine starts but misfires or runs rough after proper warmup period.
MALFUNCTION
Restricted air filter.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check air filter restriction gauge. If gauge indicates restriction (red instead of
green), notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Engine does not idle properly.
MALFUNCTION
Restricted air filter.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check air filter restriction gauge. If gauge indicates restriction (red instead of
green), notify supervisor.
0023-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
ENGINE - CONTINUED
MALFUNCTION
Ether starting aid is not being used correctly.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Follow proper cold weather starting procedures using ether starting aid
(WP 0009).
SYMPTOM
Engine temperature exceeds 210° F (99° C).
MALFUNCTION
Radiator coolant level is low, cooling system leaking, clogged radiator fins,
engine drive belts loose or missing, engine oil level is low, or transmission fluid
level is low.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
WARNING
Hot coolant is under pressure. Be careful when removing
coolant filler cap or inspecting cooling system. Engine
cooling system is under pressure and may cause severe
injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
Let radiator cool before removing cap. Remove radiator cap
in two steps. First, place a thick cloth over the cap and
slowly rotate cap left to its first stop, pause, and let pressure
escape from cooling system. Then rotate cap further left until
you can remove it. Failure to comply may result in serious
burns. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1. Check coolant level in radiator sight glass. Add coolant to fill radiator to
proper level (WP 0029).
2. Check for leaks in coolant system. If any coolant leaks are found, notify
supervisor.
3. Check radiator fins are free of mud, ice, snow, or debris. Remove any
material clogging radiator fins. Shine flashlight through engine side and
note light at radiator. Check cooling fins are not bent or clogged. Notify
supervisor to straighten bent fins.
4. Check for loose, cracked, worn, or missing fan drive belts. If belt is
loose, cracked, worn, or missing, notify supervisor.
5. Check engine oil is at proper level on dipstick. Add engine oil if
necessary (WP 0035).
6. Check transmission fluid is at proper level on dipstick. Add transmission
fluid if necessary (WP 0035).
0023-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
ENGINE - CONTINUED
SYMPTOM
Engine lacks power.
MALFUNCTION
Restricted air filter.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check air filter restriction gauge. If gauge indicates restriction (red
instead of green), notify supervisor.
2. Check to make sure PTO is disengaged. Disengage PTO.
SYMPTOM
Low or no engine oil pressure.
MALFUNCTION
Low oil level.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check engine oil is at proper level on dipstick. Add engine oil (WP 0035) if
necessary. If no or low oil pressure is still present, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Excessive engine oil consumption.
MALFUNCTION
Engine oil leaks.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check engine for loose oil lines or oil leaks. If any leaks are found, notify
supervisor.
0023-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
ENGINE - CONTINUED
SYMPTOM
Excessive exhaust smoke after engine reaches normal operating temperature of
160–185° F (71–85° C) for M915 through M920 or 180–200° F (82–93° C) for
M915A1.
MALFUNCTION
Restricted air filter, contaminated fuel, or engine malfunction.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check air filter restriction gauge. If gauge indicates restriction (red
instead of green), notify supervisor.
2. Open fuel tank filler cap and check for obvious fuel contamination. If
fuel is contaminated, notify supervisor.
3. Check for smell of unburned fuel in or around engine cab area. If smell
of unburned fuel is present, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Engine retarder does not reduce tractor speed.
MALFUNCTION
Engine retarder is not being operated correctly.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check engine retarder is engaged. Press down on engine retarder foot pedal
and take foot completely off of accelerator pedal. If operating retarder
control correctly but retarder system is not slowing vehicle, notify
supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Excessive exhaust noise or fumes in or near cab.
MALFUNCTION
Faulty exhaust system components.
0023-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
ENGINE - CONTINUED
CORRECTIVE ACTION
WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless, deadly poison
which, when breathed, deprives the body of oxygen and
causes suffocation. Exposure to air containing carbon
monoxide produces symptoms of headache, dizziness, loss of
muscular control, apparent drowsiness, and coma. Permanent
brain damage or death to personnel may result from severe
exposure. Carbon monoxide occurs in exhaust fumes of
internal combustion engines.
Carbon monoxide may become dangerously concentrated
under conditions of inadequate ventilation. Refer to page a
of Warning Summary for further precautions that must be
observed to ensure safety of personnel.
1. Check exhaust manifold, pipes, flex tubes, muffler and stack for leaks
and rusted through areas with engine running. If any leaks are found,
notify supervisor that rusted leaking parts require replacement.
2. Check exhaust system clamps for leakage with engine running. If any
leaks are found, notify supervisor that clamps require tightening or
replacement.
END OF TASK
TRANSMISSION
SYMPTOM
Foamy fluid on transmission dipstick.
MALFUNCTION
Transmission oil level is low or transmission requires service.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
Perform corrective action 1 for M915 through M920
vehicles. Perform corrective action 2 for M915A1.
1. Check level on dipstick with engine off and vehicle on level ground. If
fluid level is above FULL mark on dipstick, notify supervisor.
2. Check level on dipstick with engine at idle and vehicle on level ground.
If transmission is 100–250° F (38–121° C) and fluid level is above HOT
RUN band, or if temperature is below 100° F (38° C) and fluid level is
below COLD RUN band, notify supervisor.
0023-7
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
TRANSMISSION - CONTINUED
SYMPTOM
Slow or erratic transmission engagement.
MALFUNCTION
Transmission oil level is low.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
Perform corrective action 1 for M915 through M920
vehicles. Perform corrective action 2 for M915A1.
1. Check level on dipstick with engine off and vehicle on level ground. If
fluid is low, add fluid as necessary to maintain proper level. If fluid is
sufficient, notify supervisor.
2. Check level on dipstick with engine at idle and vehicle on level ground.
If transmission is 100–250° F (38–121° C) and fluid level is above HOT
RUN band, or if temperature is below 100° F (38° C) and fluid level is
below COLD RUN band, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Transmission fluid temperature gauge indicates overheating.
MALFUNCTION
Transmission oil level is low or transmission requires service.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check level on dipstick with engine off on M915 through M920 or with
engine at idle on M915A1 and vehicle on level ground. Check dipstick
for evidence of foamy fluid. If transmission is 100–250° F (38–121° C)
and fluid level is above HOT RUN band, or if temperature is below
100° F (38° C) and fluid level is below COLD RUN band, notify
supervisor.
2. Check dipstick for evidence of discoloration that could indicate
water/antifreeze in fluid. If there is discoloration of fluid, notify
supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Fluid leaking from transmission breather.
MALFUNCTION
Transmission oil level is low or transmission requires service.
0023-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
TRANSMISSION - CONTINUED
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check level on dipstick with engine at idle and vehicle on level ground. If
transmission is 100–250° F (38–121° C) and fluid level is above HOT RUN
band, or if temperature is below 100° F (38° C) and fluid level is below
COLD RUN band, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
AIR SYSTEM AND BRAKES
SYMPTOM
Low pressure in air system (low air pressure warning lamp and buzzer are on).
MALFUNCTION
Leak in air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check all reservoir drains are closed. Close any open reservoir drains.
2. If tractor is not coupled to trailer, check trailer air supply control is
pulled out (OFF). Pull air supply control out (OFF).
3. Check for possible air leaks at air reservoirs, hoses, fittings, and at
inter-vehicular air hose connections. If any leaks are found, notify
supervisor.
4. If tractor is coupled to trailer, and your test and inspections of tractor do
not reveal any trouble with tractor, troubleshoot trailer. If tests,
inspections, and corrective actions for both tractor and trailer do not
resolve low air pressure problem, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Trailer brakes will not apply when brake pedal is used or hand control on steering
column is used.
MALFUNCTION
Inter-vehicular air hoses are not securely connected or trailer has air system leak.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check both inter-vehicular air hoses are connected securely between tractor
and trailer (WP 0012). Connect air hoses securely to trailer. Charge trailer
air system by pushing in (ON) trailer air supply control. If trouble continues,
notify supervisor.
0023-9
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
AIR SYSTEM AND BRAKES - CONTINUED
SYMPTOM
Air system loses pressure during tractor operation or low air pressure warning lamp
and buzzer come on during tractor operation.
MALFUNCTION
Leak in vehicle air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check trailer air supply control is pulled out (OFF).
2. Operate engine until warning lamp and buzzer go off and release
parking brake.
3. Stop engine and note reservoir pressure.
4. Fully depress and hold service brakes for 2 minutes.
5. Check for leaks. Reservoir pressure loss should not exceed 5 psi in
2 minutes. Close any open reservoir drains. Check trailer air supply
control is pulled out (OFF). If any leaks are found, notify supervisor.
6. If pressure loss does not exceed 5 psi in 2 minutes, check trailer air
system in the next malfunction.
MALFUNCTION
Leak in trailer air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Push trailer supply control in (ON) to charge trailer air reservoirs.
2. Operate engine until warning lamp and buzzer go off, then release
parking brake.
3. Stop engine and note reservoir pressure.
4. Fully depress and hold service brakes for 2 minutes.
5. Check for leaks. Reservoir pressure loss should not exceed 5 psi in
2 minutes. Note any trailer air leaks. If reservoir pressure loss exceeds
5 psi in 2 minutes, notify supervisor to troubleshoot trailer.
SYMPTOM
Trailer brakes will not release.
MALFUNCTION
Trailer brake control is in ON position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check trailer brake control is in OFF position. Move control to OFF position
(WP 0005).
0023-10
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
AIR SYSTEM AND BRAKES - CONTINUED
MALFUNCTION
Trailer air supply control is not pushed in (ON).
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check trailer air supply control is pushed in (charging position). Push in air
supply control (WP 0005).
MALFUNCTION
Inter-vehicular air hoses are not securely connected between tractor and trailer.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check both inter-vehicular air hoses are connected securely between tractor
and trailer (WP 0012). Connect hoses securely (WP 0012).
MALFUNCTION
Leaks in air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for obvious leaks in tractor air system. If any leaks are found, notify
supervisor. If no leaks are found, notify supervisor to troubleshoot trailer.
END OF TASK
DRIVELINE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM
Driveline will not disengage (indicator lamp stays on) when differential
LOCK/UNLOCK is moved to UNLOCK position.
MALFUNCTION
Driveline has not had enough time to disengage since activated or excessive
driveline wind up has occurred.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check system has been unlocked long enough for system to disengage.
Put LOCK/UNLOCK control in UNLOCK position and wait for lamp to
go off (WP 0005).
2. If LOCK indicator lamp stays on, excessive driveline wind up may have
occurred. Back up slowly and check if LOCK indicator lamp goes off. If
indicator lamp stays on, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
0023-11
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
SLIDING FIFTH WHEEL AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (M915A1)
SYMPTOM
Fifth wheel cannot be locked in desired position when LOCK/UNLOCK control is
moved to LOCK position (tractor coupled to trailer).
MALFUNCTION
Obstructions between fifth wheel plate and slide track rack.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for obstructions between fifth wheel plate and slide track rack. Clean
or remove objects from area as necessary and check again.
MALFUNCTION
Air cylinder has not had sufficient time to engage.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check air cylinder has sufficient time to engage. Leave LOCK/UNLOCK
control in LOCK position, wait for 10 seconds, and check again (WP 0005).
MALFUNCTION
Fifth wheel hung up between segments of slide track rack.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Move LOCK/UNLOCK control to UNLOCK position, apply trailer brake
hand control, and place gear range selector in (1) or (R). Move tractor
slowly forward or backward an inch or two, stop and shift range selector to
NEUTRAL (N). Check fifth wheel is now locked. Release trailer brake hand
control.
MALFUNCTION
Air leak in fifth wheel air control system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
If fifth wheel will not lock in position, check air line connections at cab
mounted control and at air cylinder under fifth wheel plate. Check for sound
of escaping air and loose fitting connections. If any leaks are found in air
system connections at control or air cylinder, notify supervisor.
0023-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
SLIDING FIFTH WHEEL AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (M915A1) - CONTINUED
SYMPTOM
Fifth wheel cannot be unlocked from previous position when control is moved to
UNLOCK position.
MALFUNCTION
Obstructions between fifth wheel plate and slide track rack.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for obstructions between fifth wheel plate and slide track rack. Clean
or remove objects from area as necessary and check whether fifth wheel
position can be adjusted.
MALFUNCTION
Air cylinder has not had sufficient time to disengage.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check air cylinder has sufficient time to disengage. Leave LOCK/UNLOCK
control in LOCK position, wait for 10 seconds, and check again (WP 0005).
MALFUNCTION
Fifth wheel hung up between segments of slide track rack.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Move LOCK/UNLOCK control to UNLOCK position, apply trailer brake
hand control, and place gear range selector in (1) or (R). Move tractor
slowly forward or backward an inch or two, stop and shift range selector to
NEUTRAL (N). Check fifth wheel is now locked. Release trailer brake hand
control.
MALFUNCTION
Air leak in fifth wheel air control system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
If fifth wheel will not lock in position, check air line connections at cab
mounted control and at air cylinder under fifth wheel plate. Check for sound
of escaping air and loose fitting connections. If any leaks are found in air
system connections at control or air cylinder, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
0023-13
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM
One or more electrical systems not working.
MALFUNCTION
Switch(es) are not in the ON position or inter-vehicular cable is not securely
connected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check appropriate switch(es) are in ON position and, if a lamp system, that
blackout switch is in NORMAL position. If tractor is coupled to trailer and
problem is with trailer lamp system, ensure inter-vehicular cable is
connected securely between tractor and trailer. Turn appropriate switch(es) in
ON position. If necessary, securely connect inter-vehicular cable.
MALFUNCTION
Resettable circuit breakers have tripped (M915A1).
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
M915A1 is equipped with resettable circuit breakers.
1. Check resettable circuit breakers have not popped out, indicating a
momentary overload or short circuit. Open access panel and push in to
reset any circuit breakers which have popped out.
2. Recheck failing electrical system. If resetting fails to correct problem or
breaker button pops out again, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
STEERING
SYMPTOM
Hard steering, shimmy, or wandering.
MALFUNCTION
Incorrect tire air pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check cold air pressure in all tires. Fill as required. Refer to Tire Pressure in
WP 0003 for proper pressures.
0023-14
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
STEERING - CONTINUED
MALFUNCTION
Loose lug nuts.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for loose lug nuts. Tighten lug nuts, and notify supervisor to have lug
nuts tightened to specified torque value.
MALFUNCTION
Worn, loose or damaged suspension parts, steering parts, wheels, or vehicle
frame.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check front axle and suspension for worn, loose, or damaged parts. Check
steering linkage, wheels, and front tractor frame. If any parts are loose or
damaged, notify supervisor.
MALFUNCTION
Loose or damaged shock absorbers (M915 and M915A1).
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
M915 and M915A1 are equipped with front shock absorbers.
Check for loose or damaged shock absorbers. If shocks are loose or
damaged, notify supervisor.
MALFUNCTION
Power steering fluid level is low.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check power steering fluid reservoir for proper fluid level (WP 0025). Add
fluid if necessary (WP 0035).
SYMPTOM
Vehicle steering slow to respond or intermittent.
MALFUNCTION
Power steering fluid level is low.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Fill power steering reservoir to proper level and check for leaks (WP 0035).
If leak(s) are found, notify supervisor.
0023-15
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
STEERING - CONTINUED
MALFUNCTION
Power steering malfunction.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for proper power steering operation. With tractor standing still, turn
wheels from stop to stop and hold against stop for 5 seconds. Repeat several
times. If steering problem continues, notify supervisor.
MALFUNCTION
Loose lug nuts and loose or damaged suspension components.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for loose lug nuts and loose or damaged suspension components.
Tighten lug nuts and notify supervisor that lug nuts need to be tightened to
specified torque value. If any parts are loose or damaged, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
WHEELS AND TIRES
SYMPTOM
Wheel vibrates or wobbles.
MALFUNCTION
Loose or missing lug nuts.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check wheels for loose or missing lug nuts. Tighten loose lug nuts and
notify supervisor that lug nuts need to be tightened to specified torque value.
If any lug nut or stud is broken or missing, notify supervisor.
MALFUNCTION
Bent wheel.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check that wheel is not bent. If wheel is bent, change wheel and tire
assembly. Notify supervisor that a replacement wheel is needed.
MALFUNCTION
Loose, worn, or damaged suspension components.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check suspension for loose, worn, or damaged components. If any
components are damaged, notify supervisor.
0023-16
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
WHEELS AND TIRES - CONTINUED
SYMPTOM
Vehicle wanders or pulls to one side on level pavement.
MALFUNCTION
Incorrect tire air pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
Check air pressure when tires are cold.
Check air pressure in all tires. Fill as required. Refer to Tire Pressure in
WP 0003 for proper pressures.
MALFUNCTION
Improper tire size or type.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check that all tires are proper size and type. If tires are not properly
matched and if more than one tire is involved, notify supervisor. If only one
tire is improper and spare tire is of correct size and type, replace improper
wheel and tire assembly with spare, and notify supervisor that a replacement
is needed.
MALFUNCTION
Loose, worn, or damaged steering or suspension components.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check steering and suspension for loose, worn, or damaged components. If
any components are damaged, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Excessive or uneven tire wear.
MALFUNCTION
Incorrect tire air pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check cold air pressure in all tires. Inflate or deflate tires to proper tire
pressure. Refer to Tire Pressure in WP 0003 for proper pressures.
0023-17
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
WHEELS AND TIRES - CONTINUED
MALFUNCTION
Bent wheel.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check that wheel is not bent. If wheel is bent, change wheel and tire
assembly. Notify supervisor that a replacement wheel is needed.
MALFUNCTION
Loose wheel, worn, loose, or damaged suspension components.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Tighten loose lug nuts and notify supervisor that lug nuts need to be
tightened to specified torque value. If any suspension parts are loose or
damaged, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920)
SYMPTOM
Pusher axle will not come up.
MALFUNCTION
Low air system pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that air system pressure is sufficient (low pressure
warning light and buzzer are both off). Let air pressure build up until
warning light and buzzer go off.
MALFUNCTION
Raise/lower control in incorrect position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that raise/lower control is at the AXLE LIFT position.
Move pusher axle raise/lower controls to proper position for raising axle.
MALFUNCTION
Leaks in air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for air leaks in the area of hoses and check for cracks or holes in the
air bags. If any air leaks in hoses or cracks or holes in air bags are found,
notify supervisor.
0023-18
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920) - CONTINUED
SYMPTOM
Pusher axle will not go down.
MALFUNCTION
Low air system pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that air system pressure is sufficient (low pressure
warning light and buzzer are both off). Let air pressure build up until
warning light and buzzer go off.
MALFUNCTION
Raise/lower control in incorrect position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that raise/lower control is set at the AXLE DOWN
position. Set raise/lower control to AXLE DOWN position.
MALFUNCTION
Leaks in air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for air leaks in the area of hoses and check for cracks or holes in the
air bags. If any air leaks in hoses or cracks or holes in air bags are found,
notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Pusher axle will not maintain load reaction.
MALFUNCTION
Low air system pressure.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that air system pressure is sufficient (low pressure
warning light and buzzer are both off). Let air pressure build up until
warning light and buzzer go off.
MALFUNCTION
Air control pressure adjuster is in incorrect position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check to make sure that air control pressure adjuster is turned fully to the
right. Turn air control pressure adjuster fully to the right.
0023-19
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
PUSHER AXLE (M917, M919, AND M920) - CONTINUED
MALFUNCTION
Leaks in air system.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check for air leaks in the area of hoses and check for cracks or holes in the
air bags. If any air leaks in hoses or cracks or holes in air bags are found,
notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) (M916 THROUGH M920)
SYMPTOM
PTO does not engage.
MALFUNCTION
PTO control is in incorrect position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check that cable is connected to the PTO. It may become loose from
road vibrations
2. Check that PTO control is in ENGAGE position and bring engine rpm
above 1100 rpm.
3. Move PTO control to ENGAGE position. If PTO still does not engage,
notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
PTO indicator light stays on even though the PTO control knob is pushed completely
in.
MALFUNCTION
Throttle control is in incorrect position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check the throttle control on the winch control console to determine that it
has been pushed down. Push the winch throttle control all the way down.
END OF TASK
0023-20
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
WINCH (M916 AND M920)
SYMPTOM
Winch drum will not operate.
MALFUNCTION
PTO not engaged, engine not at maximum rpm, or low oil level.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
WARNING
Do not remove fill cap when hydraulic oil is hot. The
hydraulic tank is pressurized to 5 psi (35 kPa). Remove fill
cap slowly. Failure to comply may result is severe injury to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
1. Check position of PTO and engine throttle controls. Ensure PTO control
is engaged and engine throttle on winch control console is pulled out for
maximum rpm.
2. Check hydraulic fluid level. Add fluid to reservoir if necessary. If winch
will not operate properly, notify supervisor.
SYMPTOM
Winch unusually noisy when operating.
MALFUNCTION
Winch cable is twisted, tangled, or causing drum to bind.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
WARNING
Always wear heavy gloves when handling the winch wire
rope. Never allow the cable to run through your hands as
broken wires can cause painful injuries. Failure to comply
may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in
the event of an injury.
Check to make sure that cable is not twisted, tangled, or causing drum to
bind. Pay out or reel in cable as necessary to straighten it. If winch is still
unusually noisy when operating, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
0023-21
TM 9-2320-273-10
0023
AIR CONDITIONING (M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1)
SYMPTOM
A/C unit does not function.
MALFUNCTION
Faulty switch or circuit breaker.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Verify A/C ON/OFF switch is in ON position. Position switch in ON
position.
2. Verify circuit breaker on evaporator assembly is not tripped. Reset
circuit breaker.
3. Notify supervisor to troubleshoot A/C ON/OFF switch or circuit
breaker.
SYMPTOM
A/C unit not producing cool air.
MALFUNCTION
Faulty switch or loose wiring connection.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Verify A/C ON/OFF switch is in ON position. Position switch in ON
position.
2. Verify circuit breaker on evaporator assembly is not tripped. Reset
circuit breaker.
3. Notify supervisor to troubleshoot A/C ON/OFF switch or circuit
breaker.
MALFUNCTION
Evaporator filter dirty or obstructed.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Inspect evaporator assembly filter. Replace filter if dirty or obstructed
(WP 0033).
2. If filter is not obstructed, notify supervisor to troubleshoot A/C system.
0023-22
TM 9-2320-273-10
AIR CONDITIONING (M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, AND M920P1) CONTINUED
SYMPTOM
Compressor noise or vibration.
MALFUNCTION
Compressor or drive belt loose.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set A/C ON/OFF switch to OFF position (WP 0005).
Turn engine run switch to OFF position.
Check for loose drive belt. If drive belt is loose, notify supervisor.
Check compressor for loose or missing bolts. If bolts are loose or
missing, notify supervisor.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0023-23/24 blank
0023
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 5
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
TM 9-2320-273-10
0024
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) INTRODUCTION
GENERAL
PMCS are required to keep the equipment in good operating condition. Operator level
PMCS is performed before, during, and after operation to ensure the equipment is fully
operational and ready at all times. Failure to perform PMCS as required may result in
major damage or a failure which could compromise the mission or cause injury to
personnel. Operators will perform PMCS as follows:
Ensure operator PMCS is performed each time vehicle is operated.
When equipment is operated for the first time or has not been operated for a three
month period, notify Field Maintenance to perform PMCS inspection.
Observe all warnings, cautions, and notes when performing PMCS.
Always perform PMCS in the same order as written. With practice, this enables
operators to become familiar with the equipment and quickly identify anything wrong
with the equipment.
Before operating vehicle, perform all “Before” PMCS steps.
During operation of vehicle, perform all “During” PMCS steps.
After operating vehicle, perform all “After” PMCS steps.
Weekly, perform all “weekly” PMCS steps.
Monthly, perform all “monthly” PMCS steps.
At any PMCS interval, if the item checked or serviced is found not ready or available,
the problem must be corrected by troubleshooting and, if necessary, by notifying Field
Maintenance to perform the task.
When equipment is found to be not ready or available and the problem cannot be
resolved at operator level, describe what is wrong with the equipment using DA Form
5988-E. This documents the problem and helps Field Maintenance locate and correct it.
For information on how to use this form, see DA PAM 750-8.
0024-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0024
PURPOSE OF PMCS TABLE
The purpose of the PMCS table is to provide a systematic method of inspection and
servicing of equipment. In this way, small defects can be detected early and corrected
before they become major problems causing equipment failure. The PMCS table is
arranged with the individual PMCS procedures listed in sequence under assigned
intervals. The most logical time (before, during, and after operation) to perform each
procedure determines the interval to which it is assigned. Make a habit of performing
the checks in the same order each time; anything wrong will be identified quickly.
Refer to WP 0025 for Operator PMCS.
The following is a list and description of the column headings in the PMCS table.
Item Number - This column shows the sequence in which the checks and services
are to be performed and is used to identify equipment area on the Equipment
Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet, DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E.
Interval - This column indicates when each check is to be performed.
Item to be Checked or Serviced - This column identifies the item and location to
be checked by part, component, or assembly name.
Procedure - This column explains what type of service, specific damage, or defect
is to be checked.
Equipment Not Ready/Available If: - This column lists conditions that make the
equipment unavailable for use as a result of damage, missing parts, or improper
functioning that presents a safety hazard. Do not accept or operate equipment with
a condition noted in this column.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL (CPC) (PMCS)
Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) is a continuing concern. It is important that
any corrosion problems with this equipment be reported so improvements can be made
and future problems eliminated.
Corrosion is typically associated with rusting of metals or galvanic corrosion, which
produces a white powder. This category of corrosion also includes deterioration of
other materials such as rubber and plastic. Unusual cracking, softening, swelling, or
breaking of materials may be the result of corrosion. If a corrosion problem is
identified, it can be reported using SF 368, Product Quality Deficiency Report. Use of
key words such as “corrosion,” “rust,” “deterioration,” or “cracking” ensure the
information is identified as a CPC problem. Submit the form to the address specified in
DA PAM 750-8.
0024-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0024
FLUID LEAKAGE
It is necessary for you to know how fluid leakage affects the status of the M915
through M920 and M915A1 vehicles. Following are types/classes of leakage you need
to know to be able to determine the status of the M915 through M920 and M915A1
vehicles. Learn these leakage definitions and remember - when in doubt, notify your
supervisor. Equipment operation is allowed with minor leakage (Class I or II).
Consideration must be given to fluid capacity in the item/system being
checked/inspected. When in doubt, notify your supervisor.
When operating with Class I or II leaks, continue to check fluid levels as required in
the PMCS.
Class III leaks should be reported immediately to your supervisor.
(1) Class I Seepage of fluid (as indicated by wetness or discoloration) not great
enough to form drops.
(2) Class II Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops, but not enough to cause
drops to drip from item being checked/inspected.
(3) Class III Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops that fall from item being
checked/inspected.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
The Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services Work Package (WP 0025) includes
inspection and service procedures that must be performed to maintain the vehicle in
good operating condition.
TROUBLE SPOTS
Check bolts, nuts, and screws. If loose, tighten. If bent, broken, or missing, notify your
supervisor.
Check painted surfaces. If paint is loose or chipped, or rust is observed on bare metal
surfaces, notify your supervisor.
Check welds. If cracked or broken, notify your supervisor.
Check electrical wiring. If connection is loose, tighten. If insulation is cracked or
broken, wires are bare, or connections are broken, notify your supervisor.
Check hoses and fluid lines. Ensure clamps and fittings are tight. If hoses or lines are
worn, damaged, or leaking, notify your supervisor. Refer to Class Leakage Definitions
for information about leaks.
0024-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0024
CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
Cleaning solvent is combustible. DO NOT use or store near
heat, sparks, flame, or other ignition sources. Use mechanical
ventilation whenever product is used in a confined space,
heated above ambient temperatures, or agitated. Keep
container sealed when not in use. Failure to comply may
result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Contact with cleaning solvent may cause skin irritation. Use
chemical resistant gloves. In case of skin contact, remove
any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with
soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of
vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may
occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts
of water for at least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides.
Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages.
DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to
comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Dirt, grease, oil, and debris may cover up a serious problem.
Check as you clean. Follow precautions printed on container.
Use cleaning solvent to clean metal surfaces. Use soap and
water to clean rubber and plastic.
Cleaning is an after-operation service performed by operators to maintain vehicle
readiness. Vehicles must be kept as clean as possible, depending on the available
cleaning equipment and materials and tactical situation.
General Cleaning Precautions
Perform all cleaning procedures in well-ventilated areas.
Wear protective gloves, clothing, and respiratory equipment when using caustic,
toxic, or flammable cleaning materials.
Never use diesel fuel or gasoline for cleaning.
A fire extinguisher must be readily available during all cleaning operations using
flammable cleaning materials.
0024-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0024
GENERAL CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS - CONTINUED
Special Precautions
Do not allow cleaning materials to come in contact with rubber, leather, vinyl, or
canvas.
Do not allow corrosion-removing cleaning materials to contact painted surfaces.
Do not use steam or high-pressure air to clean cab or van body interiors.
Do not steam clean rustproofed surfaces.
Remove mildew from canvas with a bristle brush before cleaning canvas.
Use low-pressure air or water to clear debris from radiator core. Force debris out
front of radiator by applying low-pressure air or water to rear of radiator first.
General Guidelines
Table 1 provides general guidelines for the use of cleaning materials and equipment for
removing contaminants from vehicle surfaces.
SURFACE
Body
Cab Interior
(Metal)
Cab Interior/
Cab Top (Fabric)
Frame
Table 1. Cleaning Instructions.
CONTAMINANT
DIRT/MUD/DUST/
SURFACE RUST/
OIL/GREASE
SALT
CORROSION
CLEANING MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT/METHOD
Grease-cleaning
compound, running
water, and damp and
dry rags
Grease-cleaning
compound, running
water, and damp and
dry rags
Saddle soap, warm
water, soft brush, and
dry rags
Grease-cleaning
compound, running
water, and damp and
dry rags
High-pressure water,
warm soapy water,
soft brush, and damp
and dry rags
Damp and dry rags
Soft brush, warm
soapy water, and
damp or dry rags
High-pressure water,
warm soapy water,
wire brush, and damp
and dry rags
0024-5
Corrosion-removing
compound, bristle
brush, dry rags, and
lubricating oil*
Corrosion-removing
compound, bristle
brush, dry rags, and
lubricating oil*
—
Corrosion-removing
compound, wire
brush, dry rags, and
lubricating oil*
TM 9-2320-273-10
0024
GENERAL CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS - CONTINUED
SURFACE
Engine/
Transmission
Table 1. Cleaning Instructions - Continued.
CONTAMINANT
DIRT/MUD/DUST/
SURFACE RUST/
OIL/GREASE
SALT
CORROSION
CLEANING MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT/METHOD
Cleaning solvent and
damp and dry rags
High-pressure water,
warm soapy water,
soft wire brush, and
damp or dry rags
Glass
Glass cleaning
Glass cleaning
(Vehicles w/o
solution and clean
solution and clean dry
Crew Protection)
dry rags
rags
Ballistic Glass
General Purpose
General Purpose
(Vehicles
Liquid Detergent and Liquid Detergent and
w/Crew Protection) water with soft clean water with soft clean
cloth
cloth
Radiator
—
Low-pressure water
or air, warm soapy
water, and damp and
dry rags
Rubber Insulation Damp and dry rags
Damp and dry rags
Tires
Warm soapy water
High-pressure water
and bristle brush
and bristle brush
Wire Rope
Cleaning solvent and Wire brush
wire brush
Wood
Detergent, warm
Low-pressure water,
water, and damp and warm soapy water,
dry rags
and damp and dry
rags
Bristle brush, warm
soapy water, and dry
rags
—
—
—
—
—
Wire brush and
lubricating oil*
—
* After cleaning, apply a light grade of lubricating oil to all unprotected surfaces to
prevent further rusting and corrosion.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0024-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
References - Continued
Two
WP
WP
WP
WP
WP
References
AR 385-55
WP 0003
WP 0005
0008
0009
0027
0029
0033
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS).
ITEM
NO.
INTERVAL
ITEM TO BE
CHECKED OR
SERVICED
PROCEDURE
WARNING
Observe all warnings,
cautions, and notes
while performing
Preventive Maintenance
Checks and Services
(PMCS). Failure to
comply may result in
injury to personnel or
damage to equipment.
Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Vehicle operation with a
class I or II leak is
permitted; however,
system fluid capacities
must be considered and
fluid levels must be
checked more
frequently. All leaks
must be reported to your
supervisor. Failure to
comply may result in
further damage to
equipment.
0025-1
EQUIPMENT NOT
READY/AVAILABLE
IF:
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
NOTE
Perform Weekly and
Before PMCS if you are
the assigned operator but
have not operated the
vehicle since the last
weekly inspection or
you are operating the
vehicle for the first time.
1
Before
WALKAROUND
CHECKS
EXTERIOR
Exterior Left
Front
Visually check for
under-inflated and
unserviceable tires
including spare. Check
tires for leaks, cuts,
gouges, cracks, or
bulges. Remove all
penetrating objects.
Tires have
leaks, cuts,
gouges, cracks,
or bulges which
could result in
tire failure
during
operation. Two
or more tires,
including the
spare, missing
or
unserviceable.
NOTE
Fuel heater is located
below driver-side door
and above fuel tank on
M915A1 only.
2
Before
Fuel Heater
Check fuel heater
(Figure 1, Item 1) for
leaks or damage.
0025-2
Any Class III
leak is evident.
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
1
Figure 1. Fuel Heater.
NOTE
Perform step 3 for
M915, M915A1, M916,
and M920 vehicles.
3
Before
Trailer Coupling
Air Hoses and
Connectors
Inspect tractor-to-trailer
coupling air hoses for
cracking or damaged
connectors. Inspect
trailer cable and
electrical connectors
(Figure 2, Item 1) and
(Figure 2, Item 2).
2
1
12 VOLT
24 VOLT
Figure 2. Trailer Coupling Air Hoses.
0025-3
Air hose(s) or
couplers
missing,
leaking,
coupler(s)
unserviceable,
trailer electrical
connectors
damaged or
cable missing.
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Lockjaw pin
4
Before
Fifth Wheel and
a. Check that lockjaw
extends more
Ramps
pins
(Figure 3, Item 7) do than
1/16 in. (1.6 mm)
not protrude more
or has lateral or
than
vertical
1/16 in. (1.6 mm)
above surface of top movement.
plate, or have any
lateral or vertical
movement.
b. Check for bent, worn, Bent, worn,
broken, or
broken, or missing
missing parts
parts.
NOTE
Perform step c for the
M915A1 only.
c. Check slide track
(Figure 3, Item 1) for
damage and free
movement of fifth
wheel assembly
(Figure 3, Item 2).
d. Check primary
(Figure 3, Item 4)
and secondary
(Figure 3, Item 3)
release handles for
operation and
damage.
Primary or
secondary
release handles
are damaged or
do not function.
NOTE
Air lines and cylinders
are located under fifth
wheel top plate.
Any air leak is
e. Check air lines
evident.
(Figure 3, Item 6)
and air cylinder
(Figure 3, Item 5) for
damage.
0025-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
1
2
3
4
~
5
6
3
7
4
M915A1
4
3
7
7
7
M916 and M920
M915
Figure 3. Fifth Wheel Controls.
NOTE
If leakage is detected,
further investigation is
required to determine
location and cause of
leak.
0025-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Any Class III
5
Before
Left Side and
a. Look under vehicle
Rear of Vehicle
for evidence of fluid leak is evident.
Under Vehicle
(fuel, oil, or coolant)
leak.
Tires have
b. Visually check for
leaks, cuts,
under-inflated and
gouges, cracks,
unserviceable tires
or bulges which
including spare.
Check tires for leaks, could result in
cuts, gouges, cracks, tire failure
or bulges. Remove all during
operation. Two
penetrating objects.
or more tires,
including the
spare, missing
or
unserviceable.
c. Check that mud flaps
are in place and
intact.
Visually check for
Tires have
6
Before
Right Side and
under-inflated and
leaks, cuts,
Front Tires
unserviceable tires
gouges, cracks,
including spare. Check
or bulges which
tires for leaks, cuts,
could result in
gouges, cracks, or
tire failure
bulges. Remove all
during
penetrating objects.
operation. Two
or more tires,
including the
spare, missing
or
unserviceable.
Look under vehicle for
Any Class III
7
Before
Front of Vehicle
evidence of fuel, oil, or leak is evident.
coolant leak.
NOTE
Cracked or broken
windshield may violate
AR 385-55.
0025-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Check windshield for
Windshield
8
Before
Windshield
any cracks that impair
cracked,
Wipers and
Blades
vision. Check wiper
shattered, or
arms and blades for
missing.
presence and damage.
9
Before
ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
Cooling System
WARNING
After raising engine
compartment hood,
ensure S-shaped safety
hook is properly inserted
through two matching
holes in prop channel to
prevent hood from
accidentally falling.
Failure to comply may
result in injury to
personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of
an injury.
Let radiator cool before
removing cap. Remove
radiator cap in two
steps. First, place a thick
cloth over the cap and
slowly rotate cap left to
its first stop, pause, and
let pressure escape from
cooling system. Then
rotate cap further left
until you can remove it.
Failure to comply may
result in serious burns.
Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
NOTE
If leakage is detected,
further investigation is
required to determine
location and cause of
leak.
0025-7
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Check coolant level in
Any Class III
radiator sight glass
leak is evident.
(Figure 4, Item 1). If
level is low, add coolant
(WP 0029).
1
10
Before
Figure 4. Radiator Sight Glass.
INTERIOR
Cab Fire
a. Check for missing or
Extinguisher
damaged fire
extinguisher
(Figure 5, Item 1)
under dashboard on
driver side.
b. Check gauge
(Figure 5, Item 2) for
proper pressure of
approximately 150
psi (1,034 kPa).
Ensure mounting
bracket is secure.
c. Check for damaged
or missing seal.
2
1
Figure 5. Cab Fire Extinguisher.
NOTE
Missing, torn, or
inoperative seatbelt may
be in violation of AR
385-55.
0025-8
Fire
extinguisher
missing or
damaged.
Pressure gauge
needle in
RECHARGE
area.
Seal damaged
or missing.
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Check seat and seatbelt
11
Before
Interior of
for proper adjustment
Vehicle
and ability to lock,
security of pins and
bolts, and tears.
12
Before
Controls and
Instruments
WARNING
If Chemical, Biological,
Radiological, and
Nuclear (CBRN)
exposure is suspected,
personnel wearing
protective equipment
should handle all air
cleaner media. Consult
your CBRN Officer or
CBRN NCO for
appropriate handling or
disposal procedures.
CBRN contaminated
filters must be handled
using adequate
precautions and must be
disposed of by trained
personnel. Failure to
comply may result in
injury or death to
personnel. Wear eye
protection when
removing A/C air filter.
Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
While performing PMCS
with engine running,
wear approved hearing
protection. Failure to
comply may result in
injury to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the
event of an injury.
CAUTION
A sudden rise in
temperature during
engine warm up
indicates defective
cooling system.
0025-9
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
NOTE
The engine must be
running to perform the
following checks.
a. Start engine and run
at idle speed.
b. Check air cleaner
indicator. If in red,
clean filter and reset.
c. Check voltmeter
(Figure 6, Item 1)
needle. Should be in
green area. Normal
operating range is
12–15V.
d. Check transmission
oil temperature gauge
(Figure 6, Item 2).
Normal operating
range is 40–220° F
(4–104° C) for
M915–M920 or
120–250° F
(49–121° C) for
M915A1.
e. Check air pressure
gauges front
(Figure 6, Item 4)
and rear
(Figure 6, Item 6).
Normal operating
range is 90–120 psi
(621–827 kPa) for
M915–M920 or
95–125 psi
(655–862 kPa) for
M915A1. Ensure
warning light
(Figure 6, Item 5)
and buzzer are
operational.
0025-10
Engine does not
operate.
Air cleaner
indicator stays
in red.
Voltmeter reads
above or below
the green area.
Oil temperature
gauge exceeds
220° F (104° C)
for M915–M920
or 250° F
(121° C) for
M915A1.
Reads less than
60 psi
(414 kPa).
Warning light
and/or buzzer
stays on or not
operational.
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Temperature
f. Check engine
gauge reads less
temperature gauge
than 165° F
(Figure 6, Item 7).
(74° C) or
Normal operating
exceeds 195° F
range is 165–195° F
(91° C) for
(74–91° C) for
M915–M920 or
M915–M920 or
reads less than
160–220° F
160° F (71° C)
(71–104° C) for
M915A1 with engine or exceeds
220° F (104° C)
warmed up.
for M915A1
after engine
warms up.
Reads less than
g. Check engine oil
40 psi
pressure gauge
(276 kPa) for
(Figure 6, Item 3).
M915 through
Normal operating
M920 or 35 psi
range is 40–75 psi
(241 kPa) for
(276–517 kPa) for
M915A1 at
M915–M920 or
2,100 rpm or
35–50 psi
30 psi
(241–345 kPa) for
(207 kPa) for
M915A1 at
M915 through
2,100 rpm and
M920 10 psi
5–20 psi
(34–138 kPa) at idle. (69 kPa) for
M915A1 at at
idle.
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 6. Instrument Panel.
0025-11
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Transmission or
h. Check transmission
ratio selector
and ratio selector.
inoperative or
Shift in all ranges
checking for unusual binding.
stiffness, abnormal
operation, or binding.
NOTE
Perform step i for the
M917, M919, and M920
only.
Gauges or
pusher axle are
inoperative.
j. Check engine retarder Engine retarder
is inoperable.
for braking ability.
Steering binds
k. Check steering
or is
response.
unresponsive.
l. Listen for leakage in Pipe, clamp, or
hardware
exhaust system.
damaged or
missing.
Tachograph
m. Check tachograph
indicates less
rpm needle for
than 580 rpm or
proper response to
more than
throttle. Check idle
speed 580–650 rpm 650 rpm at idle
with engine at
with engine at
normal
normal operating
operating
temperature.
temperature.
n. Check tachograph for Disk is missing.
recording paper disk.
o. Check parking brake; Parking brake is
inoperative.
pull out to apply,
push in to release.
With parking brake
applied, place
transmission in gear.
Vehicle should not
move.
i. Check pusher axle
controls and gauges.
0025-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
p. Check service brakes Brakes do not
for pulling, grabbing, stop vehicle.
or other abnormal
operation by moving
vehicle approximately
10 ft.
13
Before
EXTERIOR
Air Dryer
Check automatic drain
Automatic drain
valve (Figure 7, Item 1) valve
operation. With engine
inoperative.
running, when air
pressure reaches 120 psi
(827 kPa), a sharp burst
of air will be heard at
the drain valve each
time the compressor
unloads.
1
Figure 7. Automatic Drain Valve.
0025-13
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
14
Before
NOTE
Trailer Brakes
Perform this check with
the trailer loaded after
the tractor and trailer are
coupled.
a. Check for air leaks at
the intervehicular
connecting hoses,
relay valve, and air
reservoirs.
b. Apply trailer brakes
only and attempt to
move the
tractor/trailer
combination.
Any air leaks
are evident.
Brakes fail to
hold
tractor/trailer
combination
from moving.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped
with Crew Protection
Kit, perform steps 15–22
before operation.
15
Before
Front Armor
a. Inspect wheel well
armor
(Figure 8, Item 3) for
damaged, loose, or
missing armor plate
and mounting bolts.
b. Open left hood and
inspect exterior
firewall armor
(Figure 8, Item 2) for
damaged, loose, or
missing armor plate
and mounting bolts.
c. Inspect windshield
ballistic glass
(Figure 8, Item 1)
mounting hardware
for damaged, loose,
or missing brackets
and mounting bolts.
0025-14
Armor plate is
damaged, loose,
or missing, or
mounting bolts
are loose or
missing.
Armor plate is
damaged, loose,
or missing, or
mounting bolts
are loose or
missing.
Any windshield
ballistic glass
mounting
hardware is
damaged, loose,
or missing, or
mounting bolts
are loose or
missing.
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Cracks,
d. Inspect exterior
surface of windshield scratches, or
pitting in the
ballistic glass
(Figure 8, Item 1) for exterior layer of
windshield
cracks, scratches, or
ballistic glass
pitting.
that penetrates
through to the
inner layer.
e. If dirty, clean
windshield ballistic
glass
(Figure 8, Item 1)
(WP 0027).
1
2
~
~
3
Figure 8. Front Armor.
0025-15
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Any armor
16
Before
Side Armor
a. Inspect door
panel or door
(Left Side)
assembly
assembly is
(Figure 9, Item 2)
damaged or
and door frame
(Figure 9, Item 3) for mounting
hardware is
damaged, loose, or
loose or
missing mounting
missing.
hardware.
Cracks,
b. Inspect exterior
scratches, or
surface of door
pitting in the
ballistic glass
(Figure 9, Item 1) for exterior layer of
door ballistic
cracks, scratches, or
glass that
pitting.
penetrates
through to the
inner layer.
c. Open door and enter Door binds or
cab. Close door using does not latch.
grab handle. Ensure
door closes without
binding and latches
correctly (WP 0005).
d. Ensure door ballistic Door ballistic
glass will not
glass
close or lock.
(Figure 9, Item 1)
can open, close, and
securely lock.
Cracks,
e. Inspect interior
scratches, or
surface of door
pitting on the
ballistic glass
interior surface
(Figure 9, Item 1)
of the door
and windshield
ballistic glass or
ballistic glass for
windshield
cracks, scratches, or
ballistic glass.
pitting.
0025-16
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Door assembly
f. Open door assembly
(Figure 9, Item 2) and binds or does
enter cab. Close door not latch.
assembly
(Figure 9, Item 2)
using grab handle.
Ensure door assembly
(Figure 9, Item 2)
closes without
binding and latches
correctly.
g. If dirty, clean door
ballistic glass
(Figure 9, Item 1)
(WP 0027).
1
~
2
3
Figure 9. Side Armor (Left Side).
0025-17
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Inspect left side floor
Any floor or
17
Before
Floor and
armor
firewall armor is
Firewall Armor
(Left Side)
(Figure 10, Item 2) and damaged, loose,
firewall armor
or missing, or
(Figure 10, Item 1) for
mounting bolts
damage or loose or
are loose or
missing armor plates and missing.
mounting bolts.
1
~
~
~
2
Figure 10. Floor and Firewall Armor (Left Side).
0025-18
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Roof armor is
18
Before
Roof Armor
a. Inspect roof armor
damaged.
(Figure 11, Item 1)
for damage or
missing components.
Roof armor
b. Inspect roof armor
mounting
(Figure 11, Item 1)
hardware is
mounting hardware
loose or
for loose or missing
missing.
components.
1
~
~
Figure 11. Roof Armor.
0025-19
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Armor panel or
19
Before
Side Armor
a. Inspect door
door assembly
(Right Side)
assembly
is damaged or
(Figure 12, Item 4)
mounting
and door frame
hardware is
(Figure 12, Item 3)
loose or
for damage or loose
or missing mounting missing.
hardware.
Cracks,
b. Inspect exterior
scratches, or
surface of door
pitting in the
ballistic glass
exterior layer of
(Figure 12, Item 1)
for cracks, scratches, door ballistic
glass that
or pitting.
penetrates
through to the
inner layer
Any windshield
c. Inspect windshield
ballistic glass
ballistic glass
mounting
(Figure 12, Item 2)
hardware is
mounting hardware
damaged, loose,
for damaged, loose,
or missing, or
or missing brackets
mounting bolts
and mounting bolts.
are loose or
missing.
Cracks,
d. Inspect exterior
surface of windshield scratches, or
pitting in the
ballistic glass
exterior layer of
(Figure 12, Item 2)
for cracks, scratches, windshield
ballistic glass
or pitting.
that penetrates
through to the
inner layer
Cracks,
e. Inspect exterior
surface of windshield scratches, or
pitting in the
ballistic glass
exterior layer of
(Figure 12, Item 2)
for cracks, scratches, windshield
ballistic glass
or pitting.
that penetrates
through to the
inner layer
0025-20
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
f. Ensure door ballistic Door ballistic
glass will not
glass
close or lock.
(Figure 12, Item 1)
can open, close, and
securely lock.
Cracks,
g. Inspect interior
scratches, or
surface of door
pitting on the
ballistic glass
interior surface
(Figure 12, Item 1)
of the door
and windshield
ballistic glass or
ballistic glass
windshield
(Figure 12, Item 2)
for cracks, scratches, ballistic glass
or pitting.
h. Open door assembly Door assembly
binds or does
(Figure 12, Item 4)
and enter cab. Close not latch.
door assembly
(Figure 12, Item 4)
using grab handle.
Ensure door assembly
(Figure 12, Item 4)
closes without
binding and latches
correctly.
i. If dirty, clean ballistic
glass (WP 0027).
2
~
1
~
~
4
~
3
Figure 12. Side Armor (Right Side).
0025-21
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
20
Before
Floor and
a. Inspect left side floor Any floor or
firewall armor is
Firewall Armor
armor
(Right Side)
damaged, loose,
(Figure 13, Item 3)
or missing or
and firewall armor
mounting bolts
(Figure 13, Item 2)
for damaged or loose are loose or
missing.
or missing armor
plates and mounting
bolts.
Any armor
b. Inspect glove box
panel is
armor
damaged, loose,
(Figure 13, Item 1)
for damaged, loose or or missing or
missing armor plates mounting bolts
are loose or
and mounting bolts.
missing.
Glove box
c. Ensure glove box
armor will not
armor
(Figure 13, Item 1) is close or latch
securely.
securely latched
(WP 0005).
1
~
3
~
2
Figure 13. Floor and Firewall Armor (Right Side).
0025-22
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Rear cab armor
21
Before
Rear Armor and
a. Inspect rear armor
is damaged,
Escape Hatch
(Figure 14, Item 1)
loose, or
for damage or loose
missing, or
or missing armor
mounting bolts
plates and mounting
are loose or
bolts.
missing.
b. Inspect escape hatch Escape hatch is
damaged or
(Figure 14, Item 2)
mounting
for damage.
hardware is
loose or
missing.
c. From inside the cab, Escape hatch
will not open or
check that escape
latch closed
hatch
securely.
(Figure 14, Item 2)
will open and
securely latch closed.
Ensure there is no
damage to latch and
mounting hardware
(WP 0005).
1
~
2
~
Figure 14. Roof Armor and Escape Hatch.
0025-23
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
INTERIOR
NOTE
The Air Conditioning
Kit is installed on
vehicles equipped with
Crew Protection Kit
only.
If vehicle is equipped
with air conditioning,
perform during operation
step 22.
22
During
A/C Blower
Unit
a. Start engine, refer to
WP 0008 or WP 0009.
b. Turn A/C switch
(Figure 15, Item 1)
ON and fan speed
switch
(Figure 15, Item 3) to
HIGH position
(WP 0005).
c. Operate A/C system
for five minutes and
check temperature of
air coming out of
blower unit vents
(Figure 15, Item 2).
1
3
2
Figure 15. A/C Blower Unit.
0025-24
Temperature of
air coming out
of vents is not
cold and A/C is
required for
mission.
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Observe any unusual
Loose or
23
During
Steering/Swaying
sway, dip, or unstable
binding steering
handling. Check vehicle action or
steering response for
steering wheel
unusual free-play,
difficult to turn.
binding, wandering, or
Steering is
shimmy.
unstable or
inoperative.
Monitor all gauges and Any gauge is
24
During
Gauges
warning buzzers during not functioning
operation.
properly.
When shutting down
Unusual or
25
After
Turbocharger
engine, listen to
rattling noises
turbocharger
or a defective
(Figure 16, Item 1) for
turbocharger
rattling noises.
1
Figure 16. Turbocharger.
0025-25
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
NOTE
Operation of vehicles
with inoperative horn
may violate AR 385-55.
26
After
Horns
27
After
EXTERIOR
Lights
28
After
Exterior of
Vehicle
Check operation of
horns if tactical situation
permits.
Check operation of
headlights, taillights,
turn signals, brake
lights, and blackout
lights.
Check for obvious
damage to vehicle.
Check under vehicle for
signs of leaks.
Visually check for
under-inflated and
unserviceable tires
including spare. Check
tires for leaks, cuts,
gouges, cracks, or
bulges. Remove all
penetrating objects.
0025-26
Mission requires
blackout lights
and lights are
not operating.
Any damage
that prevents
operation
Any Class III
leak is evident.
Tires have
leaks, cuts,
gouges, cracks,
or bulges which
could result in
tire failure
during
operation. Two
or more tires,
including spare,
missing or
unserviceable.
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Check left-side view and
29
After
Exterior of
spotter mirrors and
Vehicle (Left
Side)
arms.
Drain air reservoirs
Any air leaks,
30
After
Air Reservoirs
completely. Check air
damage to air
and System
lines and reservoirs for
lines or
leaks and damage.
reservoirs, or oil
coming from air
tanks is noted
during draining.
Check
right-side
view
31
After
Exterior of
and spot mirrors and
Vehicle (Right
Side)
arms.
0025-27
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
32
After
NOTE
Transmission
Perform step a for the
M915 through M920
only.
a. Shut off engine and
let vehicle sit for five
minutes before
checking transmission
oil level. The level
should be between
the ADD and FULL
marks on
transmission dipstick
(Figure 17, Item 1).
If necessary to
service, fill to within
1/4 in. (6.4 mm) of
FULL mark.
NOTE
Perform steps b and c
for the M915A1 only.
The hot check method is
preferred, but oil level
may be checked with
transmission temperature
below 120° F (49° C)
by reading cold run
band on dipstick.
b. With transmission
temperature gauge
120°–250° F
(49°–121° C) while
idling in neutral with
brake applied,
remove dipstick
(Figure 17, Item 1)
and check oil level.
Dipstick
(Figure 17, Item 1)
should read between
high and low mark
on hot run band.
0025-28
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
c. If below low mark on
hot run band, add oil
to bring level to
mid-point of band.
Approximately one
quart will raise level
from bottom line to
middle of band.
1
33
After
Figure 17. Transmission Dipstick.
Winch and
a. Visually inspect
Winch Reservoir
winch, reservoir
(M916 and
lines, and hoses for
M920)
leakage and damage.
b. Check fluid level.
Fluid level should be
at full mark on sight.
c. Check cable for
kinks, frays, and
breaks in wire.
Hoses/lines are
damaged. Class
III leaks are
evident.
Winch cable
frayed, has
kinks that
cannot be
removed, is
broken, or
missing.
No control
d. During operation,
check for oil leakage response. Class
and adequate control III leaks
evident.
response.
0025-29
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
WARNING
After raising engine
compartment hood,
ensure S-shaped safety
hook is properly inserted
through two matching
holes in prop channel to
prevent hood from
accidentally falling.
Failure to comply may
result in injury to
personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of
an injury.
When working in engine
compartment with
engine running, keep
clear of cooling fan. The
fan can engage at any
time and serious injury
to personnel may result.
Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
The engine must be shut
off before performing
PMCS steps 34 through
44. Failure to comply
may result in injury to
personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of
an injury.
CAUTION
Do not overfill engine
oil crankcase. Failure to
comply may result in
damage to equipment.
0025-30
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Check oil dipstick
Engine has used
34
After
Engine Oil
(Figure 18, Item 1) for
more than one
Level
proper oil level. Dipstick quart of oil per
(Figure 18, Item 1)
100 miles.
should read between low
and high marks. If
below low mark, add oil
through oil fill cap
(Figure 18, Item 2) to
bring level to high mark.
2
1
Figure 18. Engine Oil Dipstick.
CAUTION
If one quart or more of
fuel must be drained
from fuel filter before
fuel is clear, fuel tank
and fuel system must be
inspected carefully.
Report fuel
contamination to your
supervisor. Failure to
comply may result in
damage to equipment.
0025-31
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
NOTE
Some fuel filters may
not be equipped with
drains.
With engine running,
perform step 35.
35
After
Fuel Filter
a. Open drain (Figure
19, Item 2) on
bottom of fuel filter
(Figure 19, Item 1).
Drain fuel into
suitable container
until fuel runs clear.
Close drain (Figure
19, Item 2) securely.
Dispose of fuel in
accordance with
local requirements.
b. Check for leaks or
damage.
Any Class III
leak is evident.
Any Class III
leak is evident.
1
2
36
After
Figure 19. Engine Fuel Filter.
Engine
a. Check for fluid
Compartment
leakage and damage.
b. Check oil filters for
leaks.
c. Visually check
radiator, mounting
brackets, and hoses
for damages or
coolant leaks.
0025-32
Any Class III
leak is evident.
Any Class III
leak is evident.
Any Class III
leak is evident.
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Any drive belt
37
After
Drive Belts
a. Check for frayed or
missing, broken,
cracked belts
or cracked to
(Figure 20, Item 1).
belt fiber. More
than one crack
1/8 in. (3.2 mm)
deep (50% belt
thickness)
within a 6 in.
(152.4 mm)
length. Frays
greater than 2
in. (50.8 mm)
or excessive
play.
Deflection more
b. Check belt
than 1/2 in.
adjustment.
Deflection should not (12.7 mm).
be more than 1/2 in.
(12.7 mm). If belts
are loose, notify your
supervisor.
Any pulley with
c. Check pulleys
large chips or
(Figure 20, Item 2)
for damage or cracks. cracked belt
walls.
2
1
Figure 20. Drive Belts.
0025-33
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Any Class III
d. Check water pump
leak is evident.
for coolant leaks.
e. Check air compressor Any Class III
leak or damage
for oil leaks or
is evident.
damage.
38
After
Fan Clutch and
Actuator
WARNING
Engine must be off to
check the fan clutch and
actuator. Failure to
comply may result in
severe injury or death to
personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of
an injury.
a. Check fan clutch for
damage. Look for
loose attaching bolts.
b. Inspect hoses for
looseness at fittings,
for air leaks, fraying,
cracks, and abrasions.
c. Check fan clutch
actuator
(Figure 21, Item 1)
for signs of leaks and
loose hose
connections.
0025-34
Damaged or
loose hardware.
Any air leak is
evident.
Air leakage
from the
exhaust port
when engine
temperature is
below 185° F
(85° C).
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
1
Figure 21. Fan Clutch and Actuator.
0025-35
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
WARNING
If Chemical, Biological,
Radiological, and
Nuclear (CBRN)
exposure is suspected,
personnel wearing
protective equipment
should handle all air
cleaner media. Consult
your CBRN Officer or
CBRN NCO for
appropriate handling or
disposal procedures.
CBRN contaminated
filters must be handled
using adequate
precautions and must be
disposed of by trained
personnel. Wear eye
protection when
removing A/C air filter.
Failure to comply may
result in injury or death
to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the
event of an injury.
39
Weekly
NOTE
Air Cleaner
Perform step a for
M915–M920. Perform
step b for M915A1.
a. Empty automatic dust Dust unloader
missing or
unloader.
damaged.
Air cleaner
b. Remove dust and
canister dust
moisture boot, and
and moisture
empty air cleaner
boot missing or
canister.
damage is
evident.
0025-36
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Inspect for loose
Any Class III
40
Weekly
Steering Pump
steering pump mounting leak or steering
and Reservoir
or damage. Check pump pump mounting
for leakage. Inspect
damage is
pump hoses for
evident.
deterioration and leaks.
CAUTION
Do not overfill steering
pump reservoir. Failure
to comply may result in
damage to equipment.
With engine hot and
engine off, check fluid
level in steering pump
for proper level. If level
is low, add fluid to bring
level to full mark on
dipstick (Figure 22, Item
1).
1
Figure 22. Power Steering Pump Reservoir.
0025-37
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Check for leaks,
Any Class III
41
Weekly
Fan Clutch and
damaged fins, loose or
leak is evident.
Actuator
damaged hoses, debris,
or dirt in radiator fins.
Inspect turbocharger
Any Class III
42
Weekly
Turbocharger
(Figure 23, Item 1), oil leak is evident.
lines
(Figure 23, Item 2), and
fittings for signs of leaks
or damage. Check air
intake and exhaust ducts
for loose bolts and
clamps. Look for signs
of hose damage.
1
2
Figure 23. Turbocharger.
0025-38
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Check oil bypass filter
Any Class III
43
Weekly
Oil Bypass
(Figure 24, Item 1) lines leak is evident.
Filter
and fittings for leaks,
looseness, and damage.
1
Figure 24. Oil Bypass Filter.
0025-39
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Check for leaks,
Class III leak is
44
Weekly
Cooling System
damaged fins, loose or
evident.
damaged hoses, and
debris or dirt in radiator
fins.
Inspect ether quick-start Any leak or
45
Weekly
Ether
assembly
reservoir
Quick-Start
Assembly
(Figure 25, Item 1)
damage is
mounting for loose
evident.
hardware. Check lines,
fittings, and canister for
damage.
1
46
Weekly
47
Weekly
48
Weekly
Figure 25. Ether Quick-Start Assembly.
EXTERIOR
Tires
a. Check tire tread
depth. Tread should
not be worn beyond
level of wear bar.
b. Check for correct air
pressure, refer to tire
pressure data
(WP 0003).
Ensure all wheel stud
Wheels, Studs,
nuts are tight using
and Nuts
wheel stud nut wrench
and handle.
With air system charged
Air System
and engine off, check air
lines and fittings for
leaks and damage.
0025-40
Tire worn to or
beyond wear
bar.
Any wheel stud
is missing or
stud nut is
loose.
Any reservoir,
line, or fitting
leaks or damage
is evident.
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Visually inspect frame
Loose or broken
49
Weekly
Frame
side rails, crossmembers, side rails, cab
cab supports, and
supports,
underbody supports for crossmembers,
loose or missing bolts
missing bolts,
and cracked or broken
or broken welds
welds.
NOTE
Perform step 50 for
M915, M915A1, M916,
M917, and M920.
50
Weekly
Fuel Tank
51
Weekly
Trailer
Couplings
Check fuel tank, lines,
and fittings for leakage.
a. Check electrical
connectors
(Figure 26, Item 2)
and cable for damage.
b. Check trailer air lines
and quick disconnect
couplings
(Figure 26, Item 1)
for damage (front and
rear).
2
1
Figure 26. Trailer Couplings.
0025-41
Any Class III
leak is evident.
Electrical cable
missing or
damaged.
Air lines leak or
damage is
evident.
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Check spare tire hoist
Spare tire hoist
52
Weekly
Spare Tire Hoist
and winch operation.
and winch
and Winch
damaged or
does not
operate.
Check spare tire hoist
Spare tire hoist
53
Weekly
Winch (M916
and winch operation.
and winch
and M920)
damaged or
does not
operate.
Check pusher axle air
Air bags do not
54
Weekly
Pusher Axle Air
bags for gouges, cracks, hold air or leak.
Bags (M917,
M919 & M920)
cuts, and exposed cord
fabric. Check for
interference with
surrounding structures.
Check for oil or diesel
fuel on air bag. Clean as
required. Air bags may
be checked with pusher
axle in the raised or
lowered position.
WARNING
During normal operation
the exhaust pipe and
muffler will become
very hot. Exercise
caution not to make
body contact or touch
hot exhaust components
with bare hands. Failure
to comply may result in
severe burns to
personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of
an injury.
NOTE
Operation of vehicle
with damaged exhaust
may violate AR 385-55.
0025-42
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Inspect exhaust stack
Any pipe,
55
Weekly
Exhaust System
(Figure 27, Item 1) and clamp, or hose
muffler
leak; damaged,
(Figure 27, Item 2) for
missing, or rust
leaks, damage, and
through is
rusted through
evident.
conditions.
1
2
Figure 27. Exhaust System.
0025-43
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
WARNING
Do not smoke, have
open flame, or make
sparks when performing
battery maintenance.
Batteries may explode
causing severe injury to
personnel. Failure to
comply may result in
injury to personnel
and/or damage to
equipment. Seek medical
attention in the event of
an injury.
Remove all jewelry such
as rings, bracelets, and
identification tags. If
jewelry comes in contact
with battery terminals, a
direct short can occur
resulting in instant
heating of jewelry or
tools and damage to
electrical system. Failure
to comply may result in
damage to equipment
and injury to personnel.
Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
Battery acid (electrolyte)
is extremely harmful.
Always wear safety
goggles and rubber
gloves when performing
battery maintenance.
Failure to comply may
result in severe injury to
personnel if acid
contacts eyes or skin.
Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
0025-44
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Check electrolyte level. Battery is
56
Weekly
Batteries
Electrolyte should be
unserviceable,
filled to level/split ring
missing, or
in battery filler opening leaking;
(vent). If fluid is low,
terminals or
fill with distilled water
cables are loose,
to level ring. Run
corroded, or
vehicle at least 15
holddowns are
minutes to charge
not secure.
battery. If fluid is
gassing (boiling), notify
your supervisor.
Check body and cab for
57
Weekly
Body
damage or rusted
through conditions that
could impair operation.
58
Weekly
Cab
a. Check cab mounts for Cab mounts or
welds cracked
cracks, breaks, and
or broken.
damage.
b. Check doors, latches,
and auxiliary
equipment for proper
operation.
Inspect front suspension Any cracks,
59
Weekly
Front
springs and mounting
breaks, or loose
Suspension
hardware for cracks,
hardware or
breaks, or loose or
damage to
missing hardware and/or suspension
shackles. Notify your
springs is noted.
supervisor of any
damage found.
Inspect front and rear
60
Weekly
Cab Mounts
cab mounts for evidence
of deterioration, over
compression, or loose
mounting hardware.
Notify your supervisor
of any damage or
looseness found.
0025-45
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Inspect wheel lug nuts
Two or more
61
Weekly
Wheels and
and wheel rim bolts/nuts studs or nuts are
Wheel Rims
for looseness (e.g.,
missing from
polished surface, rust, or the same wheel.
minor cracks around bolt
and wheel mating
surfaces). Notify your
supervisor of any
looseness found.
Check all armor kit
62
Weekly
Crew Protection
mounting hardware for
Kit Mounting
Hardware
loose or missing
hardware. Notify your
supervisor of any loose
or missing mounting
hardware found.
From inside the cab,
Escape hatch
63
Weekly
Escape Hatch
check that escape hatch will not open or
will open and securely
latch closed
latch closed (WP 0005). securely.
Ensure there is no
damage to latch and
mounting hardware.
Loose
Check both door
64
Weekly
Door
components are
assembly seals,
Assemblies and
evident.
hardware, and door
Stops
stops for damaged or
loose components.
Notify your supervisor
of any damage found.
Roof
NOTE
The Air Conditioning
Kit is installed on
vehicles equipped with
Crew Protection Kit
only.
If vehicle is equipped
with air conditioning,
perform item 65 through
68.
0025-46
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Condenser is
65
Weekly
A/C Condenser
a. Inspect A/C
damaged or
condenser
(Figure 28, Item 1) for mounting bolts
damage and loose or are loose or
missing and
missing mounting
A/C is required
hardware.
for mission.
Leaks are
b. Inspect A/C
evident and A/C
condenser
is required for
(Figure 28, Item 1)
for leaks. Leaks can mission.
be identified by oil
residue on fittings
(Figure 28, Item 3),
along A/C hoses
(Figure 28, Item 2),
or on condenser core.
A/C hoses or
c. Inspect A/C hoses
electrical
(Figure 28, Item 2)
and electrical harness harness are
damaged or
(Figure 28, Item 4)
for damage and loose have loose or
or missing mounting missing
mounting
hardware.
hardware and
A/C is required
for mission.
Leaks are
d. Inspect A/C hoses
evident and A/C
(Figure 28, Item 2)
for leaks. Leaks can is required for
mission.
be identified by oil
residue on fittings
(Figure 28, Item 3) or
along A/C hose
(Figure 28, Item 2).
1
~
2
4
3
Figure 28. A/C Condenser.
0025-47
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
66
Weekly
INTERIOR OF
CAB
A/C Evaporator
Assembly
Evaporator
assembly unit is
damaged or has
loose or missing
mounting
hardware and
A/C is required
for mission.
Switch box is
b. Inspect switch box
damaged or has
(Figure 29, Item 1)
for damage and loose loose or missing
or missing mounting mounting
hardware and
hardware.
A/C is required
for mission.
a. Inspect evaporator
assembly
(Figure 29, Item 2)
for damage and loose
or missing mounting
hardware.
WARNING
If Chemical, Biological,
Radiological, and
Nuclear (CBRN)
exposure is suspected,
personnel wearing
protective equipment
should handle all air
cleaner media. Consult
your CBRN Officer or
CBRN NCO for
appropriate handling or
disposal procedures.
CBRN contaminated
filters must be handled
using adequate
precautions and must be
disposed of by trained
personnel. Wear eye
protection when
removing A/C air filter.
Failure to comply may
result in injury or death
to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the
event of an injury.
0025-48
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
c. Inspect A/C filter
(Figure 29, Item 3)
and clean or replace
if necessary
(WP 0033).
d. Inspect two drain
tubes
(Figure 29, Item 4)
located at bottom
corners of evaporator
assembly
(Figure 29, Item 2)
for damage,
looseness, and
blockage. Clean or
replace as necessary.
2
1
3
4
Figure 29. A/C Evaporator Assembly.
0025-49
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
67
Weekly
OUTSIDE OF
CAB LEFT
SIDE
A/C
Receiver/Dryer
Unit
Receiver/dryer
unit is damaged
or has loose or
missing
mounting
hardware and
A/C is required
for mission.
b. Inspect receiver/dryer Leaks are
evident and A/C
(Figure 30, Item 3)
for leaks. Leaks can is required for
mission.
be identified by oil
residue on A/C hoses
and hose fittings
(Figure 30, Item 1).
A/C hoses and
c. Inspect A/C hoses
hose fittings or
and hose fittings
electrical
(Figure 30, Item 1)
and electrical harness harness are
damaged or
(Figure 30, Item 2)
for damage and loose have loose or
or missing mounting missing
mounting
hardware.
hardware and
A/C is required
for mission.
a. Inspect receiver/dryer
(Figure 30, Item 3)
for damage and loose
or missing mounting
hardware.
0025-50
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
Leaks are
d. Inspect A/C hoses
evident and A/C
and hose fittings
is required for
(Figure 30, Item 1)
for leaks. Leaks can mission.
be identified by oil
residue along A/C
hoses and hose
fittings
(Figure 30, Item 1).
1
2
1
3
Figure 30. A/C Receiver/Dryer.
0025-51
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
68
Weekly
ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
A/C Compressor
a. Open left side engine
cover (WP 0005).
b. Inspect compressor
(Figure 31, Item 4)
for damage and loose
or missing mounting
hardware.
c. Inspect compressor
(Figure 31, Item 4)
for leaks. Leaks can
be identified by oil
residue on fittings
(Figure 31, Item 3).
d. Inspect A/C hoses
(Figure 31, Item 2)
and electrical harness
(Figure 31, Item 1)
for damage and loose
or missing mounting
hardware.
e. Inspect A/C hoses
(Figure 31, Item 2)
for leaks. Leaks can
be identified by oil
residue on fittings
(Figure 31, Item 3) or
along A/C hose
(Figure 31, Item 2).
f. Inspect compressor
belt
(Figure 31, Item 5)
for damage and
correct tightness
(120 lb for new belts).
0025-52
Compressor is
damaged or
mounting bolts
are loose or
missing and
A/C is required
for mission.
Leaks are
evident and A/C
is required for
mission.
A/C hoses or
electrical
harness are
damaged or
have loose or
missing
mounting
hardware and
A/C is required
for mission.
Leaks are
evident and A/C
is required for
mission.
Compressor belt
is damaged or
loose and A/C
is required for
mission.
TM 9-2320-273-10
0025
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) - Continued.
ITEM TO BE
EQUIPMENT NOT
ITEM
INTERVAL
CHECKED OR
PROCEDURE
READY/AVAILABLE
NO.
SERVICED
IF:
1
2
5
4
Figure 31. A/C Compressor.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0025-53/54 blank
3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0026
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
CLEANING VEHICLE
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts
Detergent (WP 0039, Item 9)
Rag, wiping (WP 0039, Item 25)
GENERAL CLEANING
Perform both exterior and interior cleaning procedures when cleaning the vehicle.
EXTERIOR
1. Never wipe off dirt when vehicle is dry.
2. Never wash vehicle in direct sunlight or if the vehicle exterior is hot to touch.
3. Wash your vehicle often using cold or warm water (never use hot water or any
strong detergent). Do not use abrasives to remove mud and dirt from your vehicle.
4. While cleaning truck, look closely for evidence of rust, corrosion, bare metal, or
other exterior damage. If any problems are found, notify your supervisor to treat
affected areas.
INTERIOR
1. Remove loose dust and dirt from cab interior.
2. Clean upholstery and seatbelts using mild solution of warm water and soap (never
use solvents or abrasives).
3. Using clean rags, wipe dry all areas that have been washed.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0026-1/2 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
0027
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
CLEANING BALLISTIC GLASS
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts
Equipment Condition - Continued
Engine off (WP 0011).
Parking brake set (WP 0011).
Cleaning compound, windshield
(WP 0039, Item 7)
Rag, wiping (WP 0039, Item 25)
Equipment Condition
Vehicle parked on level ground
(WP 0011).
CLEANING
CAUTION
Remove rings or other hard objects from hands before
cleaning ballistic glass. DO NOT use hard, dirty, or gritty
cloths on ballistic glass. DO NOT apply water or cleaning
compound unless ballistic glass is cool and protected from
heating effects of sunlight. Failure to follow these
instructions will damage ballistic glass.
Do not use bug spray or other aerosol sprays on or near
ballistic glass. Failure to follow these instructions will
damage ballistic glass.
NOTE
Follow this procedure to clean inner plastic laminate surfaces
of ballistic glass. Clean outside surfaces of ballistic glass in
the same manner as plain glass.
1. Add cleaning compound to 1 gal. (3.8 L) of water as directed by manufacturer
label.
2. Saturate a soft, clean cloth with cleaning solution and lightly rub plastic surfaces.
3. Flush off cleaning solution with water and dry with a soft, clean cloth.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0027-1/2 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
0028
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
FILLING FUEL TANK
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts - Continued
Materials/Parts
Diesel fuel, arctic
(WP 0039, Item 10)
Diesel fuel, DF-1, regular
(WP 0039, Item 11)
Diesel fuel, DF-2, regular
(WP 0039, Item 12)
References
WP 0011
GENERAL
This work package provides general instructions for filling the fuel tank.
FUELING VEHICLE
WARNING
When fueling vehicle, ensure pump nozzle contacts the
filling tube on top of the fuel tank to carry off static
electricity. Do not smoke or have open flame in fueling area.
Failure to comply may result in injury or death to personnel
or damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event
of an injury.
1. Park vehicle, stop engine, and apply parking brake (WP 0011).
2. Wipe off any dirt on fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1) around filler cap
(Figure 1, Item 2).
3. Remove filler cap (Figure 1, Item 2) from fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1).
4. Fill fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1) with appropriate diesel fuel.
5. Install filler cap (Figure 1, Item 2) on fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1).
1
~
2
Figure 1. Fuel Tank and Filler Cap.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0028-1/2 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts
References
Antifreeze (WP 0039, Item 2)
Antifreeze (WP 0039, Item 3)
Sealing compound (WP 0039, Item 26)
WP 0001
GENERAL
WARNING
Accidental or intentional introduction of liquid contaminants
into the environment is a violation of state, federal, and
military regulations. Refer to Army POL (WP 0001) for
information concerning storage, use, and disposal of these
liquids. Failure to comply may result in damage to
environment and health of personnel. Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Use a drain pan to capture any draining coolant. Dispose of
fluids in accordance with local policy and ordinances. Ensure
all spills are cleaned up.
This work package provides instructions for draining the cooling system, filling an
empty cooling system, and adding coolant to a partly filled cooling system.
0029-1
0029
TM 9-2320-273-10
0029
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING
Let radiator cool before removing cap. Remove radiator cap
in two steps. First, place a thick cloth over the cap and
slowly rotate cap left to its first stop, pause, and let pressure
escape from cooling system. Then rotate cap further left until
you can remove it. Failure to comply may result in serious
burns. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Leaking or spilled coolant may cause a slip and fall hazard.
When draining cooling system, clean any leaking or spilled
coolant immediately using suitable absorbent materials.
Dispose of contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning materials
in accordance with local procedures and plans. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
1. Remove radiator cap (Figure 1, Item 1) from radiator filler neck
(Figure 1, Item 2).
NOTE
Use a suitable drain pan to capture coolant when draining
cooling system.
The radiator has one drain cock located on the left side of
the radiator bottom tank, facing the engine.
Coolant is drained from the engine cylinder block by
removing the temperature sending unit form the cylinder
block. The temperature sending unit is located on the right
side of the cylinder block near the back of engine.
A drain cock is located on the top of the thermostat
manifold and on front of oil cooler. These drain cocks are
used to drain coolant or allow air to escape the cooling
system when filling or adding coolant.
2. Position drain pan under radiator drain cock (Figure 2, Item 5). Open radiator
drain cock (Figure 2, Item 5) and allow coolant to drain.
3. Position drain pan under oil cooler drain cock (Figure 2, Item 2). Open thermostat
manifold drain cock (Figure 2, Item 3) and oil cooler drain cock
(Figure 2, Item 2) and allow coolant to drain.
4. Disconnect electrical connector from temperature sending unit (Figure 2, Item 1).
5. Position drain pan under right side of cylinder block (Figure 2, Item 4). Remove
temperature sending unit (Figure 2, Item 1) from cylinder block (Figure 2, Item 4)
and allow all coolant to drain.
0029-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0029
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM - CONTINUED
1
2
Figure 1. Removing Radiator Cap.
2
3
~
1
4
5
Figure 2. Draining Cooling System.
END OF TASK
0029-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0029
FILLING EMPTY COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING
Contact with sealing compound may cause skin irritation.
Use chemical resistant gloves. In case of skin contact,
remove any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly
with soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before
reuse. Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring
of vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may
occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts
of water for at least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides.
Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages.
DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
Leaking or spilled coolant may cause a slip and fall hazard.
When draining cooling system, clean any leaking or spilled
coolant immediately using suitable absorbent materials.
Dispose of contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning materials
in accordance with local procedures and plans. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Fill cooling system with a mixture of clean water and
antifreeze. If unknown, notify supervisor for proper mixture
of water and antifreeze.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Perform steps 1 through 3 if temperature sending is removed
from cylinder block.
Apply thin coat of sealing compound to threads of temperature sending unit
(Figure 3, Item 1).
Install temperature sending unit (Figure 3, Item 1) on cylinder block
(Figure 3, Item 4).
Connect electrical connector to temperature sending unit (Figure 3, Item 1).
Close radiator drain cock (Figure 3, Item 5) and oil cooler drain cock
(Figure 3, Item 3).
Open thermostat manifold drain cock (Figure 3, Item 2), and pour coolant through
radiator filler neck (Figure 4, Item 3) until coolant flows from thermostat manifold
drain cock (Figure 3, Item 2). Close thermostat manifold drain cock
(Figure 3, Item 2).
Continue filling radiator (Figure 3, Item 6) with coolant until coolant level is even
with top of radiator sight glass (Figure 4, Item 2).
0029-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
0029
FILLING EMPTY COOLING SYSTEM - CONTINUED
7. Start engine, and allow engine to reach normal operating temperature of
165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through M920 or 180–200° F (82–93° C) for
M915A1.
8. Open and close oil cooler drain cock (Figure 3, Item 3) and thermostat manifold
drain cock (Figure 3, Item 2) to allow any remaining air to escape from cooling
system.
9. Recheck coolant level and add coolant as necessary until coolant level is even
with top of radiator sight glass (Figure 4, Item 2).
10. Install radiator cap (Figure 4, Item 1) on radiator filler neck (Figure 4, Item 3).
11. Check for leaks.
2
~
1
6
3
4
5
Figure 3. Filling Empty Cooling System.
1
2
3
Figure 4. Checking Coolant Level.
END OF TASK
0029-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0029
ADDING COOLANT TO PARTIALLY EMPTY COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING
Let radiator cool before removing cap. Remove radiator cap
in two steps. First, place a thick cloth over the cap and
slowly rotate cap left to its first stop, pause, and let pressure
escape from cooling system. Then rotate cap further left until
you can remove it. Failure to comply may result in serious
burns. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Leaking or spilled coolant may cause a slip and fall hazard.
When draining cooling system, clean any leaking or spilled
coolant immediately using suitable absorbent materials.
Dispose of contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning materials
in accordance with local procedures and plans. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fill cooling system with a mixture of clean water and
antifreeze. If unknown, notify supervisor for proper mixture
of water and antifreeze.
Remove radiator cap (Figure 5, Item 1) from radiator filler neck
(Figure 5, Item 3).
Add coolant through radiator fill neck (Figure 5, Item 3) until coolant level is
even with top of sight glass (Figure 5, Item 2).
Open and close oil cooler drain cock (Figure 6, Item 3) and thermostat manifold
drain cock (Figure 6, Item 2) to allow any residual air to escape from cooling
system.
Recheck coolant level and add coolant as necessary until coolant level is even
with top of radiator sight glass (Figure 5, Item 2).
Install radiator cap (Figure 5, Item 1) on radiator filler neck (Figure 5, Item 3).
Check for leaks.
0029-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0029
ADDING COOLANT TO PARTIALLY EMPTY COOLING SYSTEM - CONTINUED
1
2
3
Figure 5. Radiator Site Glass.
2
~
1
3
4
Figure 6. Adding Coolant to Cooling System.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0029-7/8 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
WHEEL AND TIRE SERVICE
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
References - Continued
Two
WP 0011
WP 0025
References
WP 0003
WARNING
Exercise caution when raising or lowering spare wheel and
tire assembly. All personnel must stand clear during lifting
operations. Should wheel and tire assembly fall over or drop
from lift, serious injury to personnel may result. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
In case of a flat on any model vehicle, if tactical situation
permits, immediately stop the vehicle where there will be no
hazard to other traffic or to the crew member changing the
tire. Notify your supervisor as soon as possible so wheel
nuts can be tightened to proper torque value and tire can be
repaired and returned to service. Failure to comply may
result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
Wheels and tires are inspected when performing weekly
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS),
(WP 0025).
A spare wheel and tire assembly is provided on M915,
M916, and M915A1 vehicles. On these vehicles a tire lift is
provided to raise and lower the spare wheel and tire
assembly from the stowed position.
On M917, M918, M919, and M920 vehicles, no spare is
provided. Should you have a flat, use one of the pusher axle
wheel and tire assemblies as a spare.
If you should have a flat on the rear of an M918 vehicle,
reduce speed as much as practical and notify your supervisor
as soon as possible. If you should have a flat on one of the
front tires of an M918 vehicle, exchange the flat tire with
one of the outside rear duals.
0030-1
0030
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
NOTE
When changing tires, do not substitute type or size of tire
unless all tires on the vehicle can be converted. Keep all
tires the same.
TIRE INFLATION
Checking tire air pressure is an important aspect of tire maintenance. Tire air pressure
must be checked weekly. Recommended air pressures for all tires on all vehicle models
have been carefully selected to provide maximum tire life and performance. Refer to
Equipment Data in WP 0003 for proper tire air pressure application. Check and adjust
tire air pressure when tires are cold. Recommended air pressures are specified for cold
tires (i.e., tires that have not warmed up due to vehicle operation). When vehicle is
operated and tire warms up, tire air pressure increases. Do not decrease warm tire air
pressure to recommended air pressure for a cold tire. Following cross-country
operations in mud, sand, or snow, ensure that tires are inflated for highway use.
WARNING
Stay clear of wheel when checking tire air pressure and
inflating tire. Injury or death to personnel may result from
exploding wheel components. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
1. Remove tire air pressure gauge from tool box.
2. Remove tire valve stem cap.
3. Check tire air pressure. Refer to Equipment Data in WP 0003 for proper tire air
pressure application.
4. If necessary, remove air hose from tool box and use quick disconnect coupling
provided at air reservoir as indicated in (Figure 1, Item 1), (Figure 2, Item 1), and
(Figure 3, Item 1) to put air in tires.
5. Install tire valve stem cap and tighten finger tight.
6. Store tire air pressure gauge and air hose in tool box.
1
1
Figure 1. M915, M918, and M915A1.
0030-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
TIRE INFLATION - CONTINUED
1
Figure 2. M916.
1
Figure 3. M917, M919, and M920.
END OF TASK
0030-3
0030
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
REMOVING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM TIRE CARRIER
(M915, M916, AND M915A1)
WARNING
Exercise caution when raising or lowering spare wheel and
tire assembly. All personnel must stand clear during lifting
operations. Should wheel and tire assembly fall over or drop
from lift, serious injury to personnel may result. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
Do not touch hot clutch disc when raising or lowering spare
wheel and tire assembly winch brake. Failure to comply may
result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Ensure winch cable drum has a minimum of four full turns
of cable prior to lifting spare wheel and tire assembly.
Failure to comply may result in cable pulling off cable drum
and injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
If winch brake disc shows signs of overheating, stop and
allow 15 minutes for winch brake disc to cool down.
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
4.
The winch automatically brakes when pressure is taken off
handle regardless of which direction it is being turned. If
slack is needed to secure cable around wheel and tire
assembly, you must pull on cable and turn handle in a
counterclockwise direction at the same time. Do not pull out
more cable than needed.
Park vehicle on level ground, stop engine, apply parking brake, and chock wheels
(WP 0011).
Install winch cable (Figure 4, Item 1) through wheel opening (Figure 4, Item 3),
wrap it around wheel and tire assembly (Figure 4, Item 2), and secure snap hook
(Figure 4, Item 6) on winch cable (Figure 4, Item 1).
Remove tractor-to-trailer electrical cable at tractor.
Remove wing nut (Figure 4, Item 5) from bolt (Figure 4, Item 4), lower spare tire
carrier side panel (Figure 5, Item 3), and remove bolt (Figure 5, Item 1) from tire
carrier base (Figure 5, Item 2).
0030-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
REMOVING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM TIRE CARRIER
(M915, M916, AND M915A1) - CONTINUED
2
6
3
1
5
4
Figure 4. Spare Wheel and Tire Carrier
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
1
2
3
Figure 5. Spare Tire Carrier Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
0030-5
0030
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
REMOVING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM TIRE CARRIER
(M915, M916, AND M915A1) - CONTINUED
WARNING
Ensure winch cable drum has a minimum of four full turns
of cable prior to lifting spare wheel and tire assembly.
Failure to comply may result in cable pulling off cable drum
and injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
Ensure wheel and tire assembly does not suddenly drop from
truck by guiding it down between fuel tank and fender.
Failure to comply could cause winch cable to snap and
injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE
Ensure cable is paying out when turning handle
counterclockwise or handle will unscrew and winch will
become inoperative.
The winch automatically brakes when pressure is taken off
handle regardless of which direction it is being turned. If
slack is needed to secure cable around wheel and tire
assembly, you must pull on the cable and turn the handle in
a counterclockwise direction at the same time. Do not pull
out more cable than needed.
This step requires two personnel.
5. Remove wheel and tire assembly (Figure 6, Item 1) from spare tire carrier
(Figure 6, Item 3) and place on spare tire carrier side panel (Figure 6, Item 5).
6. Take up slack in winch cable (Figure 6, Item 2) by turning winch handle
(Figure 6, Item 4) in clockwise direction.
7. While guiding spare tire assembly (Figure 7, Item 3) over fuel tank
(Figure 7, Item 5) and fender, turn winch handle
(Figure 7, Item 2) counterclockwise and lower spare tire assembly
(Figure 7, Item 3) to ground.
8. Remove winch cable (Figure 7, Item 1) from wheel and tire assembly
(Figure 7, Item 3) and leave winch cable (Figure 7, Item 1) payed out for storing
flat wheel and tire assembly later.
0030-6
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
REMOVING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM TIRE CARRIER
(M915, M916, AND M915A1) - CONTINUED
2
1
3
4
5
Figure 6. Wheel and Tire Assembly on Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
1
5
2
4
3
Figure 7. Lower Wheel and Tire Assembly
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
END OF TASK
0030-7
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
INSTALLING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ON CARRIER (M915, M916, AND M915A1)
WARNING
Exercise caution when raising or lowering spare wheel and
tire assembly. All personnel must stand clear during lifting
operations. Should wheel and tire assembly fall over or drop
from lift, serious injury to personnel may result. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
Do not touch hot clutch disc when raising or lowering spare
wheel and tire assembly winch brake. Failure to comply may
result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Ensure winch cable drum has a minimum of four full turns
of cable prior to lifting spare wheel and tire assembly.
Failure to comply may result in cable pulling off cable drum
and injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
If winch brake disc shows signs of overheating, stop and
allow 15 minutes for winch brake disc to cool down.
NOTE
The winch automatically brakes when pressure is taken off
handle regardless of which direction it is being turned. If
slack is needed to secure cable around wheel and tire
assembly, you must pull on cable and turn the handle in a
counterclockwise direction at same time. Do not pull out
more cable than needed.
1. Install winch cable (Figure 8, Item 1) through wheel opening (Figure 8, Item 4),
wrap it around wheel and tire assembly (Figure 8, Item 3), and secure snap hook
(Figure 8, Item 5) back on winch cable (Figure 8, Item 1).
2. Take up slack in winch cable (Figure 8, Item 1) by turning winch handle
(Figure 8, Item 2) in clockwise direction.
NOTE
This step requires two personnel.
3. Turn winch handle (Figure 9, Item 2) clockwise to install wheel and tire assembly
(Figure 9, Item 1) on spare tire carrier side panel (Figure 9, Item 4) while guiding
it around fuel tank (Figure 9, Item 3) and fender.
0030-8
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
INSTALLING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ON CARRIER (M915, M916, AND M915A1) CONTINUED
1
2
5
3
4
Figure 8. Raising Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
1
2
4
3
Figure 9. Wheel and Tire Assembly on Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
0030-9
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
INSTALLING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ON CARRIER (M915, M916, AND M915A1) CONTINUED
4. Install wheel and tire assembly (Figure 10, Item 1) on spare tire carrier
(Figure 10, Item 2).
NOTE
After wheel and tire assembly has been secured, cable may
be slightly loose but should remain attached to wheel and
tire assembly.
Crank handle must be in 12 or 6 o’clock position when not
in use to avoid possible interference with trailer.
5. Install bolt (Figure 10, Item 4) on tire carrier base (Figure 10, Item 3).
6. Raise spare tire carrier side panel (Figure 11, Item 1) and install wing nut
(Figure 11, Item 3) on bolt (Figure 11, Item 2).
7. Connect tractor-to-trailer electrical cable connector to trailer.
8. Release parking brake and remove wheel chocks (WP 0011).
0030-10
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
INSTALLING SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ON CARRIER (M915, M916, AND M915A1) CONTINUED
1
4
2
3
Figure 10. Install Tire on Spare Tire Carrier
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
1
3
2
Figure 11. Secure Side Panel
(M915, M916, and M915A1).
END OF TASK
0030-11
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
WHEEL AND TIRE REPLACEMENT
1. Park vehicle on level ground, stop engine, apply parking brake, and chock wheels.
2. Check tire pressure of wheel and tire assembly to be installed. Refer to
Equipment Data in WP 0003 for proper tire air pressure application.
NOTE
Wheel nuts on left side have left-hand threads and must be
turned clockwise to loosen. Wheel stud nuts on right side
have right-hand threads and must be turned
counterclockwise to loosen. Studs and wheel nuts are
stamped L (left) and R (right).
3. Using spare tire mounting wrench, loosen all wheel nuts (Figure 12, Item 1) from
wheel and tire assembly (Figure 12, Item 4) to be removed.
4. Position jack as instructed in Jacking Procedure and raise axle until tire clears
ground.
5. Remove all wheel nuts (Figure 12, Item 1) from wheel and tire assembly
(Figure 12, Item 4) to be removed.
6. Remove wheel and tire assembly (Figure 12, Item 4) from hub
(Figure 12, Item 2).
7. If inner dual wheel and tire assembly is being replaced, remove inner wheel and
tire assembly from hub (Figure 12, Item 2).
8. If removed, install new inner dual wheel and tire assembly.
9. Install outer dual wheel and tire assembly (Figure 12, Item 4) on hub
(Figure 12, Item 2) so inner valve stem is visible through hole in outer wheel
(Figure 12, Item 3).
NOTE
Wheel nuts on left side have left-hand threads and must be
turned counterclockwise to tighten. Wheel stud nuts on right
side have right-hand threads and must be turned clockwise
to tighten. Studs and wheel nuts are stamped L (left) and R
(right).
10. Using spare tire mounting wrench, install all wheel nuts (Figure 12, Item 1) on
wheel (Figure 12, Item 4) snugly.
11. Lower jack as instructed in Jacking Procedure.
12. Tighten wheel nuts (Figure 12, Item 1) alternately as shown in figure 12 and
notify your supervisor that wheel nuts (Figure 12, Item 1) need to be tightened to
specified torque value.
13. Release parking brake and remove wheel chocks (WP 0011).
0030-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
WHEEL AND TIRE REPLACEMENT - CONTINUED
1
2
4
3
Figure 12. Wheel Nut Tightening Sequence.
END OF TASK
0030-13
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
JACKING PROCEDURES
WARNING
The vehicle’s hydraulic jack is intended only for lifting and
is not a safe support for performing maintenance. Do not get
under vehicle unless it is properly supported by jack stands
or wood blocks. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
Ensure parking brake is released and chocks are placed
behind tires at opposite end of vehicle to be raised prior to
jacking operations. Do not place chocks in front of tires at
opposite end of vehicle to be raised. If vehicle is not free to
roll during jacking operations, it may topple jack. Move
chocks tight against tires after jacking and set parking brake.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel or
damage to equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of
an injury.
OPERATING HYDRAULIC JACK
1. To raise jack (Figure 13, Item 1), insert slotted end of two-piece handle
(Figure 13, Item 6) over release valve (Figure 13, Item 5), and turn release valve
(Figure 13, Item 5) right until seated.
2. Insert two-piece handle (Figure 13, Item 6) in pump assembly socket
(Figure 13, Item 4), and operate pump assembly (Figure 13, Item 3) by moving
handle (Figure 13, Item 6) up and down to raise jack cylinder (Figure 13, Item 2).
3. To lower jack (Figure 13, Item 1), insert slotted end of two-piece handle
(Figure 13, Item 6) over release valve (Figure 13, Item 5), and slowly turn release
valve (Figure 13, Item 5) left until jack cylinder (Figure 13, Item 2) lowers into
jack (Figure 13, Item 1).
2
1
3
6
5
4
Figure 13. Operating Jack.
END OF TASK
0030-14
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
FRONT AXLE JACK PLACEMENT (M915 AND M915A1)
1. Place jack (Figure 14, Item 3) on ground or wood block if ground is soft.
2. Position jack (Figure 14, Item 3) under first small leaf spring
(Figure 14, Item 6) just forward of front axle (Figure 14, Item 1).
3. Turn adjustable ram (Figure 14, Item 5) left until it contacts first small leaf spring
(Figure 14, Item 6).
4. Using jack handle (Figure 14, Item 4), raise jack (Figure 14, Item 3) until tire
(Figure 14, Item 2) clears ground.
1
2
6
5
3
4
Figure 14. Front Axle Jack Placement, M915 and M915A1.
END OF TASK
FRONT AXLE JACK PLACEMENT (M916 THROUGH M920)
1. Place jack (Figure 15, Item 4) on ground or wood block if ground is soft.
2. Position jack (Figure 15, Item 4) directly under front axle (Figure 15, Item 1) at
center of front spring mounting pad (Figure 15, Item 3).
3. Turn adjustable ram (Figure 15, Item 5) left until it contacts center of front spring
mounting pad (Figure 15, Item 3).
4. Raise jack (Figure 15, Item 4) until tire (Figure 15, Item 2) clears ground.
1
2
3
5
4
Figure 15. Front Axle Jack Placement, M916 through M920.
END OF TASK
0030-15
TM 9-2320-273-10
0030
FORWARD-REAR OR REAR-REAR AXLE JACK PLACEMENT (M915 THROUGH
M920 AND M915A1)
1. Place jack (Figure 16, Item 3) on ground or wood block if ground is soft.
2. Position jack (Figure 16, Item 3) under walking beam (Figure 16, Item 1) inboard
of walking beam trunion support (Figure 16, Item 5).
3. Turn adjustable ram (Figure 16, Item 4) left until it contacts walking beam
(Figure 16, Item 1).
4. Raise jack (Figure 16, Item 3) until tandem rear tires (Figure 16, Item 2) clear
ground.
1
1
2
2
5
5
3
4
4
FORWARD-REAR AXLE
REAR-REAR AXLE
Figure 16. Forward-Rear and Rear-Rear Axle Jack Placement.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0030-16
3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0031
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
BATTERY INSPECTION
INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0010
WP 0011
WARNING
Battery acid (electrolyte) is extremely harmful. Always wear
safety goggles and rubber gloves when performing battery
maintenance. Failure to comply may result in severe injury
to personnel if acid contacts eyes or skin. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
Do not smoke, have open flame, or make sparks when
performing battery maintenance. Batteries may explode
causing severe injury to personnel. Failure to comply may
result in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment.
Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Remove all jewelry such as rings, bracelets, and
identification tags. If jewelry comes in contact with battery
terminals, a direct short can occur resulting in instant heating
of jewelry or tools and damage to electrical system. Failure
to comply may result in damage to equipment and injury to
personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Check to make sure that the batteries are connected as
shown in figure 1. Failure to comply may result in damage
to equipment or possible injury to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
GENERAL
M915 through M920 and M915A1 vehicles have four batteries connected in
series-parallel that supply 12-volts to the electrical system and 24-volts to the starter
motor.
0031-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0031
BATTERY INSPECTION
1. Park vehicle, stop engine, apply parking brake and chock wheels (WP 0011).
2. Disconnect two battery box latches (Figure 1, Item 3) from battery box cover
(Figure 1, Item 1).
3. Remove battery box cover (Figure 1, Item 1) from battery box (Figure 1, Item 5)
by pulling battery box cover (Figure 1, Item 1) from locating pins
(Figure 1, Item 2).
4. Check charge level indicators (Figure 1, Item 4) for green color. If any charge
level indicator (Figure 1, Item 4) is completely dark or yellow in color, notify
your supervisor.
5. Check the following connections. If connections are loose, notify your supervisor.
6.
7.
8.
9.
a.
Positive and negative battery posts.
b.
Jumper cable clamps-posts.
c.
All cable-clamp connections.
d. Ground connection.
Check battery box (Figure 1, Item 5) for signs of leaking batteries. If batteries are
leaking, notify your supervisor.
Align locating pins (Figure 1, Item 2) and install battery box cover
(Figure 1, Item 1) on battery box (Figure 1, Item 5).
Secure battery box cover (Figure 1, Item 1) to battery box (Figure 1, Item 5) with
two latches (Figure 1, Item 3).
Release parking brake and remove wheel chock (WP 0010).
1
2
5
3
4
Figure 1. Battery Box, Battery, and Cables Inspection.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0031-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0032
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
FAN CLUTCH LOCKUP PROCEDURE (M915 THROUGH M920)
INITIAL SETUP: Not Applicable
FAN CLUTCH LOCKUP
WARNING
Let radiator cool before performing this task. Failure to
comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek medical
attention in the event of an injury.
1. Using crescent wrench, remove bolt from fan adjusting bracket, located on right
front side of engine.
2. Manually rotate cooling fan until the hole in the cooling fan outer driven member
aligns with any of the three holes in the cooling fan pulley.
3. Insert bolt in aligned hole and tighten with crescent wrench.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0032-1/2 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
A/C AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
Vehicle parked on level ground (WP 0011).
Engine off (WP 0011).
Parking brake set (WP 0011).
Engine run switch in off position (WP 0011).
0033-1
0033
TM 9-2320-273-10
0033
REMOVAL
WARNING
If Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN)
exposure is suspected, personnel wearing protective
equipment should handle all air cleaner media. Consult your
CBRN Officer or CBRN NCO for appropriate handling or
disposal procedures. CBRN contaminated filters must be
handled using adequate precautions and must be disposed of
by trained personnel. Wear eye protection when removing
A/C air filter. Failure to comply may result in injury or death
to personnel. Seek medical attention in the event of an
injury.
1. Unlatch two clamps (Figure 1, Item 2) on evaporator assembly (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Remove air filter (Figure 1, Item 3) from evaporator assembly (Figure 1, Item 1).
END OF TASK
INSTALLATION
1. Install air filter (Figure 1, Item 3) in evaporator assembly (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Latch two clamps (Figure 1, Item 2) on evaporator assembly (Figure 1, Item 1).
1
2
3
2
Figure 1. A/C Air Filter Replacement.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0033-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0034
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
FM 9-207
WP 0003
WP 0016
WP 0017
WP
WP
WP
WP
0025
0026
0029
0035
GENERAL
This work package (WP) provides special instructions for maintaining vehicles under
unusual conditions, which include extreme temperatures, humidity, fording, and difficult
terrain. When operating under unusual conditions, it is especially important to keep the
vehicle clean and adequately lubricated.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
1. In extreme cold weather it is essential the vehicle is kept in top condition or it
will be very difficult to get the vehicle started. Ensure all scheduled PMCS
(WP 0025) are carefully performed prior to operation, and be sure to notify
supervisor of any problems.
2. Always give engine extra time to reach its operating temperature range of
165–195° F (74–91° C) for M915 through M920 or 180–200° F (82–93° C) for
M915A1.
3. For detailed guidance on antifreeze protection, lubrication, electrical system
service, and other maintenance requirements for extreme cold weather operations,
refer to FM 9-207.
4. The power steering system incorporates a cooler designed to reduce power
steering fluid temperatures during normal or unusually warm conditions. In
extremely cold weather, the cooler becomes restrictive and must be bypassed to
prevent over pressure and possible rupture of the cooler. Notify supervisor to
perform maintenance when 0° F (–18° C) or below is expected.
5. For M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1, ensure procedure for
removing frost and ice from ballistic glass (WP 0016) is properly performed to
prevent damage to ballistic glass.
END OF TASK
0034-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0034
EXTREME HOT WEATHER
1. Check engine coolant level frequently. Ensure coolant is maintained at proper
level (WP 0029). Check cooling system (radiator, hoses, and lines) for possible
leaks, and notify supervisor of any problems.
2. The power steering system incorporates an oil cooler designed to reduce power
steering fluid temperatures during normal and unusually warm conditions. Check
oil level in power steering pump reservoir more often during periods of operation
in extreme hot weather (WP 0035).
3. Check tires frequently to ensure each tire is inflated to the proper pressure
(WP 0003) (but be very careful not to over inflate tires). Wait until tires are cool
before adjusting tire pressures.
4. For M915P1, M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, and M920P1, ensure procedures for
operating in extreme heat with crew protection armor and air conditioning are
followed (WP 0017).
END OF TASK
EXTREME HUMID WEATHER
In hot humid weather, exposed metal surfaces can rust rapidly. Fungus can grow in the
fuel tank and on canvas tarps, seats, and other equipment. Frequent inspection,
cleaning, and lubrication are necessary to maintain vehicle readiness in humid
conditions. Fuel filters and air reservoirs must be drained frequently due to increased
condensation in fuel and air systems. Clean affected areas carefully and if necessary,
notify supervisor of any needed parts.
END OF TASK
AFTER FORDING
1. Always check for sand and mud after you have forded water with vehicle.
Thoroughly clean the vehicle. If water fording depth was 21 in. (53 cm) or more,
notify supervisor and request after-fording maintenance for vehicle.
2. If vehicle has been operated in salt water, let vehicle dry, then check it for
evidence of salt accumulation. Use a clean damp cloth to immediately remove all
salt accumulation.
3. If salt water fording depth was 21 in. (53 cm) or more, notify supervisor and
request vehicle needs after-fording maintenance as a result of operating vehicle in
salt water.
END OF TASK
0034-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0034
AFTER OPERATING ON UNUSUAL TERRAIN
1. After operating in mud, clean all accumulated mud from vehicle (WP 0026).
2. Check and clean radiator if mud is stuck in cooling fins.
3. If vehicle has been operated in sandy or dusty conditions, frequently check air
cleaner, radiator cooling fins, and all system fluids. If any fluid is found to be
contaminated with sand or dust, notify supervisor that vehicle needs special
servicing after operation in sand or dust.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0034-3/4 blank
TM 9-2320-273-10
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
References
References - Continued
FM 9-207
WP 0001
WARNING
Accidental or intentional introduction of liquid contaminants
into the environment is a violation of state, federal, and
military regulations. Refer to Army POL (WP 0001) for
information concerning storage, use, and disposal of these
liquids. Failure to comply may result in damage to
environment and health of personnel. Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
Contact with any lubrication material called out in this work
package may cause skin irritation. Use chemical resistant
gloves. In case of skin contact, remove any contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water.
Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Eye contact may
cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of vision. Use face shield
or goggles when eye contact may occur. In case of eye
contact, flush eyes with large amounts of water for at least
15 minutes or until irritation subsides. Inhalation may cause
irritation to upper respiratory passages. DO NOT have food
or drink in the vicinity. Failure to comply may result in
injury or death to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Leaking or spilled lubrication material called out in this
work package may cause a slip and fall hazard. When
draining lubrication material, clean any leaking or spilled
lubrication material immediately using suitable absorbent
materials. Dispose of contaminated cloths, rags, or cleaning
materials in accordance with local procedures and plans.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
0035-1
0035
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
NOTE
These instructions are mandatory.
Use a drain pan to capture any draining fluids. Dispose of
fluids in accordance with local policy and ordinances. Ensure
all spills are cleaned up.
For lubrication instructions for the M917 w/ Dump Truck
Body, refer to your supervisor.
For lubrication instructions for the M918 w/ Bituminous
Distributor Body, refer to your supervisor.
For lubrication instructions for M919 w/ Concrete-Mobile
Mixer Body, refer to your supervisor.
1. The lubrication procedures in this work package are to be performed on the
vehicle daily under normal conditions in order to be mission-ready at all times.
2. When the vehicle has been operated under unusual conditions, it may be
necessary to perform procedures on vehicle more often. When in doubt, notify
your supervisor.
3. Localized lubrication figures 1, 2, and 3, identify lubrication points, required
lubricants, and procedures performed by the operator/crew. Specific notes and
illustrations and any special lubrication instructions are contained in the
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS section.
0035-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
MILITARY SYMBOLS FOR LUBRICANTS AND INTERVALS
LUBRICANT SYMBOLS
ATF ....................................................................................... Fluid, Transmission (Dexron®)
GAA .................................................................................. Grease, Automotive and Artillery
GO ................................................................................ Lubrication Oil, Gear, Multipurpose
OEA ............................. Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine, Tactical Services
OE/HDO ....................... Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine, Tactical Service
LUBRICANT INTERVALS
D ........................................................................................................................................... Daily
W ...................................................................................................................................... Weekly
1 ................................................ 1,000 mi (1,609 km) or 1 month, whichever occurs first
3 .............................................. 3,000 mi (4,828 km) or 3 months, whichever occurs first
6 .............................................. 6,000 mi (9,656 km) or 6 months, whichever occurs first
12 ..................................... 12,000 mi (19,308 km) or 12 months, whichever occurs first
24 ..................................... 24,000 mi (38,624 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first
0035-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
CLEANING
WARNING
Cleaning solvent is combustible. DO NOT use or store near
heat, sparks, flame, or other ignition sources. Use mechanical
ventilation whenever product is used in a confined space,
heated above ambient temperatures, or agitated. Keep
container sealed when not in use. Failure to comply may
result in injury to personnel. Seek medical attention in the
event of an injury.
Contact with cleaning solvent may cause skin irritation. Use
chemical resistant gloves. In case of skin contact, remove
any contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with
soap and water. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
Eye contact may cause irritation, tearing, or blurring of
vision. Use face shield or goggles when eye contact may
occur. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with large amounts
of water for at least 15 minutes or until irritation subsides.
Inhalation may cause irritation to upper respiratory passages.
DO NOT have food or drink in the vicinity. Failure to
comply may result in injury or death to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
LUBRICANTS
NOTE
For arctic operation lubrication instructions, refer to
FM 9-207, Operations and Maintenance of Ordnance
Materiel in Cold Weather.
Perform lubrication after fording operations.
The following list of capacities should be used as a guide
only. Do not overfill.
APPLICATION
CAPACITY
Table 1. Use of Lubricants.
LUBRICANT
EXPECTED
TEMPERATURE
Engine
(M915 through
M920)
Engine
(M915A1)
46 qt (43.5 L) OE/HDO 30
with both
OE/HDO 10
filters
OEA (Arctic Grade) Oil
44 qt (41.6 L) OE/HDO 30
OE/HDO 10
OEA (Arctic Grade) Oil
Transmission
22 qt (20.8 L) OE/HDO 30
(M915 through
OE/HDO 10
M920)
OEA (Arctic Grade) Oil
0035-4
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -15° F (+4 to -26° C)
0 to +65° F (-18 to +18° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
TM 9-2320-273-10
APPLICATION
Transmission
(M915A1)
Table 1. Use of Lubricants - Continued.
CAPACITY
LUBRICANT
EXPECTED
TEMPERATURE
32 qt (30.3 L)
with external
filter
27 pt (12.8 L)
OE/HDO 30
OE/HDO 10
OEA (Arctic Grade) Oil
GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
GO 85/140
GO 80/90
GO 75
(+40° F (+4° C) Limit)
GO 80/90
GO 80/90
GO 75
OE/HDO 10 or OEA
(Arctic Grade) Dexron®
ATF is preferred
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -15° F (+4 to -26° C)
0 to +65° F (-18 to +18° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
GO 80/90
GO 80/90
GO 75
42 gal (159 L) OE/HDO 10
OE/HDO 10
OEA (Arctic Grade) Oil
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Differential
Front
(M916 through
M920)
Differential
40 pt (18.9 L)
Forward-Rear
(M915)
Differential
34 pt (16.1 L)
Forward-Rear
(M916 through
M920)
Differential
38 pt (18.0 L)
Forward-Rear
(M915A1)
Differential
Rear-Rear
(M915 and
M915A1)
Differential
Rear-Rear
(M916 through
M920)
Transfer Case
(M916 through
M920)
Power Steering
(M916 through
M920 and
M915A1)
Winch Drum
(M916 through
M920)
Winch
Reservoir
(M916 through
M920)
GAA - Grease
Automotive
and Artillery
0035
36 pt (17.0 L)
28 pt (13.2 L)
5 qt (4.7 L)
2 qt (1.9 L)
5 qt (4.7 L)
As Required
GAA
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -15° F (+4 to -26° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
Above +32° F (0° C)
+40 to -10° F (+4 to -23° C)
0 to -65° F (-18 to -54° C)
All Temperatures
—
0035-5
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
LUBRICATION LOCATIONS
INTERVAL LUBRICANT
D
Power Steering
OE/HDO 10
Pump Level
OEA
Check and Fill
(See note 1)
D
Front Wheel
Bearings Level
Check and Fill
(M915A1)
(See note 2)
GO
Fuel
Filter/Water
Separator Drain
Moisture
(See note 3)
D
Engine Oil
Level
Check and Fill
(See note 4)
D
OE/HDO
D
OE/HDO,
OEA
Transmission
Oil Level Check
and Fill
(See note 5)
1
GAA
Fifth Wheel
Lubrication
(See note 6)
W
OE/HDO 10
Pintle Hook
Lubrication
(See note 8)
M915 and M915A1
Figure 1. Lubrication Locations
(M915 and M915A1).
0035-6
PROCEDURE
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
LUBRICATION LOCATIONS - CONTINUED
INTERVAL
D
LUBRICANT
PROCEDURE
OE/HDO 10
OEA
Power Steering
Pump Level
Check and Fill
(See note 1)
Fuel
Filter/Water
Separator Drain
Moisture
(See note 3)
D
D
OE/HDO
D
OE/HDO,
OEA
Transmission
Oil Level Check
and Fill
(See note 5)
D
OE/HDO,
OEA
Winch Reservoir
(M916) Level
Check and Fill
(See note 7)
GAA
Fifth Wheel
(M916)
Lubrication
(See note 6)
OE/HDO 10
Pintle Hook
Lubrication
(M916)
(See note 8)
1
W
M916 and M918
Figure 2. Lubrication Locations
(M916 and M918).
0035-7
Engine Oil
Level
Check and Fill
(See note 4)
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
LUBRICATION LOCATIONS - CONTINUED
INTERVAL
LUBRICANT
D
Power Steering
OE/HDO 10 Pump Level
Check and Fill
OEA
(See note 1)
D
Fuel
Filter/Water
Separator Drain
Moisture
(See note 3)
D
Engine Oil
Level
Check and Fill
(See note 4)
D
OE/HDO
OE/HDO,
OEA
Transmission
Oil
Level Check
and Fill
(See note 5)
OE/HDO,
OEA
Winch Reservoir
(M920)
Level Check
and Fill
(See note 7)
1
GAA
Fifth Wheel
(M920)
Lubrication
(See note 6)
W
OE/HDO10
Pintle Hook
Lubrication
(M917, M920)
(See note 8)
D
M917, M919, and M920
Figure 3. Lubrication Locations
(M917, M919, and M920).
0035-8
PROCEDURE
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS
DIPSTICK
AND CAP
~
DIPSTICK
AND CAP
POWER
STEERING
PUMP
POWER
STEERING
PUMP
M915A1
M915 THROUGH M920
Figure 4. Power Steering Pump Level Check and Fill.
NOTE 1 - Power Steering Pump Level Check and Fill
Check daily with fluid hot and engine off. Wipe all dirt and grease from around
dipstick and cap assembly, remove cap, and check fluid level (Figure 4). Add fluid as
necessary to bring fluid level on dipstick to full mark. If fluid contamination is
suspected, notify your supervisor.
0035-9
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
DRAIN AND
FILL PLUG
FULL LINE
DRAIN PLUG
TYPE 1 HUB
FULL LINE
FILL PLUG
TYPE 2 HUB
Figure 5. Front Wheel Bearing Level Check and Fill
(M915A1).
NOTE 2 - Front Wheel Bearing Level Check and Fill (M915A1)
Check fluid level daily. Fluid should be level with full line (Figure 5). Add fluid as
necessary to bring fluid level to full line. If fluid contamination is suspected, notify
your supervisor.
FUEL
FILTER
FUEL
FILTER
DRAIN COCK
DRAIN COCK
M915 THROUGH M920
M915A1
Figure 6. Fuel Filter/Water Separator Drain Moisture.
0035-10
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
NOTE 3 - Fuel Filter/Water Separator Drain Moisture
WARNING
Do not perform fuel filter/water separator draining while
smoking or near fire, flames, or sparks. Fuel may ignite
causing injury or death to personnel and/or damage to
equipment. Seek medical attention in the event of an injury.
Accidental or intentional introduction of liquid contaminants
into the environment is a violation of state, federal, and
military regulations. Refer to Army POL (WP 0001) for
information concerning storage, use, and disposal of these
liquids. Failure to comply may result in damage to
environment and health of personnel. Seek medical attention
in the event of an injury.
CAUTION
Do not overtighten drain cock. Failure to comply may result
in damage to drain cock and fuel leaks.
NOTE
If one quart or more of fuel must be drained from fuel
filter/water separator before fuel is clear, notify your
supervisor.
Park vehicle on level ground with the parking brake applied.
Wipe dirt and oil from drain cock (Figure 6). With engine running and
transmission in neutral, open drain cock on bottom of fuel filter/water separator
and drain fuel and any moisture into suitable container until fuel runs clear. Close
drain cock securely and check for leaks. Notify your supervisor for disposal of
fuel.
0035-11
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
OIL LEVEL
GAUGE
OIL FILL
CAP
Figure 7. Engine Oil Level Check and Fill.
NOTE 4 - Engine Oil Level Check and Fill
CAUTION
Do not overfill oil in engine. Failure to comply may cause
excess oil consumption or damage to engine.
NOTE
Shut engine off and let stand two minutes prior to oil level
check.
Wipe dirt and oil from around dipstick (Figure 7). Using dipstick, check engine
oil level. Engine oil level should be between the low and high marks. If engine
oil is below the low mark, clean and remove oil fill cap and add engine oil to
bring level to full mark on level gauge. If engine has used one quart or more of
oil in 100 miles (161 km), notify your supervisor.
TRANSMISSION
DIPSTICK
BATTERY BOX
TRANSMISSION
FILL TUBE
Figure 8. Transmission Level Check and Fill.
0035-12
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
NOTE 5 - Transmission Oil Level Check and Fill
CAUTION
Do not overfill transmission. Overfilling may cause aeration
of the transmission oil (milky appearance). If overfilling
occurs, drain transmission oil to bring to proper level.
If fluid level is low, bring to proper level with same oil
grade or type. Mixing of oil grade or type may cause
damage to internal transmission components.
NOTE
Park vehicle on level ground with the parking brake applied.
1. Start the engine and shift the transmission through all drive ranges to fill the
clutch cavities and oil passages, then shift to neutral.
2. Run the engine for at least one minute at 1,000–1,200 rpm to clear the system of
air.
Hot Oil Check (HOT RUN band)
Be sure the temperature of the transmission has reached 120° F (49° C) or above. With
the engine idling and the transmission in NEUTRAL, remove the dipstick (Figure 8)
from the oil fill tube and check the oil level. If the oil registers in the HOT RUN band,
the quantity of oil in the transmission is safe for operating the vehicle. If it registers on
or below the bottom line of the HOT RUN band, add required amount of oil necessary
to bring the oil level to the middle of the HOT RUN band (approximately one quart of
oil is required to move the oil level from the bottom line of the HOT RUN band to the
middle of the HOT RUN band).
Cold Oil Check (COLD RUN band)
Run the engine for one minute at 1,000 rpm to charge the system. With the
transmission oil temperature gauge reading below 120° F (49° C), and the engine idling
with the transmission in NEUTRAL, remove the dipstick (Figure 8) from the oil filler
tube and check the oil level. If the oil level registers in the COLD RUN band the
quantity of oil in the transmission is safe for operating the vehicle. If the oil level
registers on or below the bottom line of the COLD RUN band, add the required
amount of oil necessary to bring the oil level to the middle of the COLD RUN band
(approximately one quart of oil is required to move the oil level from the bottom line
of the COLD RUN band to the middle of the COLD RUN band).
0035-13
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
LATCH
MECHANISM
WHEEL PLATE
SURFACE
~
LATCH
MECHANISM
~
SLIDING FIFTH
WHEEL BRACKET
M915, M916, M920
M915A1
Figure 9. Fifth Wheel Lubrication
(M915, M916, M920, and M915A1).
NOTE 6 - Fifth Wheel Lubrication (M915, M916, M920, and M915A1)
1. Latch Mechanism - Apply a liberal coat of GAA lubricant to the top and bottom
latch mechanisms (Figure 9).
2. Wheel Plate Surface - Apply a liberal amount of GAA lubricant to the wheel plate
surface (Figure 9).
3. Sliding Fifth Wheel Bracket (M915A1) - Apply a film of OE/HDO 10 lubricant
on the rack and slide path of the bracket on the sliding fifth wheel (Figure 9).
0035-14
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
FILL CAP
UPPER SIGHT
GLASS
WINCH HYDRAULIC
RESERVOIR
Figure 10. Winch Reservoir Level Check and Fill
(M916 and M920).
WARNING
Winch system retains some pressure even when not in use.
Wear goggles/face shield when opening winch reservoir.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel. Seek
medical attention in the event of an injury.
NOTE 7 - Winch Reservoir Level Check and Fill (M916 and M920)
Check winch reservoir, oil should be visible in upper sight glass (Figure 10). If oil is
not visible in upper sight glass, wipe any dirt or oil from fill cap and remove fill cap
slowly to allow any residual pressure to release from system. Add necessary quantity of
the proper oil to bring oil level to upper sight glass.
0035-15
TM 9-2320-273-10
0035
LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS - CONTINUED
LATCH
COTTER
PIN
Figure 11. Pintle Hook Lubrication
(M915, M916, M917, M920, and M915A1).
NOTE 8 - Pintle Hook Lubrication
(M915, M916, M917, M920, and M915A1)
1. Check latch for looseness.
2. Lubricate cotter pin and latch (Figure 11) with OE/HDO 10.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0035-16
TM 9-2320-273-10
CHAPTER 6
SUPPORTING INFORMATION
TM 9-2320-273-10
0036
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
REFERENCES
SCOPE
This work package lists all field manuals, forms, technical manuals, and miscellaneous
publications referenced in this manual.
PUBLICATIONS INDEX
The following indexes should be consulted frequently for the latest changes or revisions
and for new publications relating to material covered in this manual.
DA Pam 25-30
Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms
FORMS
The following forms pertain to this manual. See DA Pam 25-30 for index of blank forms.
See DA Pam 750-8, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users
Manual, for instructions on the use of maintenance forms pertaining to this manual.
DA Pam 738-751
Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management Systems - Aviation (TAMMS-A)
DA Pam 750-8
The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS)
Users Manual
DA Form 2028
Recommended Changes to DA Publications and Blank
Forms
DA Form 2404/5988-E
Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet
DA Form 5504
Maintenance Request Form
SF 368
Product Quality Deficiency Report
FIELD MANUALS
FM 4-25.11
First Aid
FM 9-207
Operations and Maintenance of Ordnance Material in Cold
Weather
FM 20-22
Vehicle Recovery Operations
FM 21-305
Manual for the Wheeled Vehicle Driver
FM 55-30
Army Motor Transport Units and Operations
TECHNICAL MANUALS
TM 3-4230-204-12&P
Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual for
Decontaminating Apparatus, Portable, ABC-M11
TM 5-3805-274-13&P
Operator and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL) for M917 Truck Body
TM 5-3895-371-10
Operator Manual for M918 Bituminous Distributor Truck
Body
0036-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0036
TECHNICAL MANUALS - CONTINUED
TM 5-3895-372-10
Operator Manual for M919 Concrete Mobile Mixer Truck
Body
TM 750-244-6
Procedures for Destruction of Tank-Automotive Equipment
to Prevent Enemy Use
TM 746-10
Marking, Packaging, and Shipment of Supplies and
Equipment: General Packaging Instructions for Field Use
TM 9-2320-273-23-1
Field Maintenance Manual for M915, M915P1, M915A1,
M915A1P1, M916, M916P1, M920, M920P1 Truck Tractor
and Chassis for M917, M917P1, M918, and M919
TM 9-2320-273-23-2
Field Maintenance Manual for M915, M915P1, M915A1,
M915A1P1, M916, M916P1, M920, M920P1 Truck Tractor
and Chassis for M917, M917P1, M918, and M919
TM 9-2320-273-23-3
Field Maintenance Manual for M915, M915P1, M915A1,
M915A1P1, M916, M916P1, M920, M920P1 Truck Tractor
and Chassis for M917, M917P1, M918, and M919
MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS
AR 70-1
Army Acquisition Policy
AR 385-55
Prevention of Motor Vehicle Accidents
AR 700-138
Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability
CTA 8-100
Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items
CTA 50-909
Field and Garrison Furnishings and Equipment
CTA 50-970
Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V Repair
Parts, and Heraldic Items)
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0036-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0037
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI)
AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS
INTRODUCTION
SCOPE
This work package lists COEI and BII for the M915, M915A1, M916, M917, M918,
M919, and M920 to help you inventory items for safe and efficient operation of the
equipment.
GENERAL
NOTE
There is no authorized COEI for M915, M915A1, M916,
M917, M918, M919, or M920 vehicles.
There is no authorized COEI or BII for M915P1,
M915A1P1, M916P1, M917P1, or M920P1 vehicles.
The COEI and BII information is divided into the following lists:
Components of End Item (COEI). This list is for information purposes only and is not
authority to requisition replacements. These items are part of the vehicle. As part of the
end item, these items must be with the end item whenever it is issued or transferred
between property accounts. Items of COEI are removed and separately packaged for
transportation or shipment only when necessary. Illustrations are furnished to help you
find and identify the items.
Basic Issue Items (BII). These essential items are required to place the vehicle in
operation, operate it, and do emergency repairs. Although shipped separately packaged,
BII must be with the vehicle during operation and when it is transferred between
property accounts. Listing these items is your authority to request/requisition them for
replacement based on authorization of the end item by the TOE/MTOE. Illustrations
are furnished to help you find and identify the items.
0037-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0037
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE COEI LIST AND BII LIST
Column (1) Item Number. Gives you the reference number of the item listed.
Column (2) National Stock Number (NSN). Identifies the stock number of the item to
be used for requisitioning purposes.
Column (3) Description, Part Number/(CAGEC). Identifies the Federal item name (in
all capital letters) followed by a minimum description when needed. The stowage
location of COEI and BII is also included in this column. The last line below the
description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code
(CAGEC) (in parentheses).
Column (4) Usable On Code. When applicable, gives you a code if the item you need
is not the same for different models of equipment. These codes are identified below:
Code
Used On
U21
Model M915
U2A
Model M915A1
U22
Model M916
U23
Model M917
U24
Model M918
U25
Model M919
U26
Model M920
Column (5) U/I. Unit of Issue (U/I). Indicates the physical measurement or count of the
item as issued per the National Stock Number shown in column (2).
Column (6) Qty Rqr. Indicates the quantity required.
0037-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
0037
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS
Table 1. Basic Issue Items (BII).
3
2
1
6
4
5
(1)
Item
Number
(2)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
1
2540-00-670-2459
BAG ASSEMBLY, PAMPHLET (in tool
box under passenger seat)
11676920 (19207)
2
5140-00-473-6256
BAG, TOOL (in tool box under passenger
seat)
5140-00-473-6256 (64067)
3
7510-00-889-3494
BINDER, LOOSE-LEAF (in tool box
under passenger seat)
11677003 (19207)
4
5510-00-491-0307
5
5995-01-082-6214
6
6150-01-022-6004
BLOCK, WOOD (in tool box under
passenger seat)
CPR103023-2 (34623)
CABLE ASSEMBLY (in tool box under
passenger seat)
BE27451 (06721)
CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER (in tool
box under passenger seat)
11682336-1 (19207)
(3)
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
0037-3
(4)
Usable
On
Code
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U22
Thru
U26
U2A
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
(5)
U/I
(6)
Qty
Rqr.
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0037
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS CONTINUED
Table 2. Basic Issue Items (BII).
1
4
2
3
6
(1)
Item
Number
(2)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
1
6150-01-148-6944
2
4210-00-270-4512
3
4210-00-775-0127
4
6545-00-922-1200
5
4910-01-003-9599
6
5120-01-084-3298
5
(3)
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL
PURPOSE (in tool box under passenger
seat)
32-2051 (1F3G5)
EXTINGUISHER, FIRE (in rear of tool
box)
SCD539482 (80063)
EXTINGUISHER, FIRE (in rear of tool
box)
AA393-A2B (80244)
FIRST AID KIT, GENERAL PURPOSE
(on front of tool box)
11677011 (19207)
GAGE, TIRE PRESSURE,
SELF-CONTAINED (in tool box under
passenger seat)
61-J2-1506 (94894)
HANDLE, WRENCH (in tool box under
passenger seat)
967556 (34623)
0037-4
(4)
Usable
On
Code
U21,
U22,
U26
(5)
U/I
(6)
Qty
Rqr.
EA
1
U2A
EA
1
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U21
Thru
U26
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
TM 9-2320-273-10
0037
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS CONTINUED
Table 3. Basic Issue Items (BII).
1
4
2
3
6
(1)
Item
Number
(2)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
(3)
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
1
4720-01-119-5206
2
4720-00-328-5422
3
4910-01-298-5479
4
5120-00-224-7330
5
5120-00-188-1788
HOSE ASSEMBLY (in tool box under
passenger seat)
MB145-20065 (34623)
HOSE ASSEMBLY, PNEUMATIC, TIRE
INFLATOR, 40 FT LONG, QUICK
DISCONNECT (in tool box under
passenger seat)
11624422-7 (19207)
INFLATOR-GAGE, PNEUMATIC TIRE,
10–120 psi (in tool box under passenger
seat)
64A2-1506 (94894)
JACK, HYD, 12 TON (in tool box)
5120-00-224-7330 (80244)
JACK, HYD, 20 TON (in tool box)
5120-00-188-1788 (80244)
6
6220-01-327-3225
LAMP UNIT, VEHICULAR (in tool box
under passenger seat)
1401152 (78422)
0037-5
5
(4)
Usable
On
Code
U2A
(5)
U/I
(6)
Qty
Rqr.
EA
1
U21
Thru
U26
EA
1
U2A
EA
1
U2A &
U21
U22
Thru
U26
U22 &
U26
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0037
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS CONTINUED
Table 4. Basic Issue Items (BII).
2
1
3
6
5
4
(1)
Item
Number
(2)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
1
5120-00-223-7397
PLIERS, SLIP JOINT (in tool box under
passenger seat)
B107.500 (05047)
2
9905-00-148-9546
3
5120-00-234-8913
REFLECTOR SET, HIGHWAY
WARNING, TRIANGULAR (in tool box
under passenger seat)
11669000 (19207)
SCREWDRIVER, CROSS TIP, 4-in. (in
tool box under passenger seat)
B107.30 (05047)
4
5120-00-224-7375
SCREWDRIVER, CROSS TIP, 8-in. (in
tool box under passenger seat)
B107.30 (05047)
5
5120-00-222-8852
SCREWDRIVER, FLAT TIP, 4-in. (in tool
box under passenger seat)
B107.600 (05047)
6
5120-00-237-6985
SCREWDRIVER, FLAT TIP, 8-in. (in tool
box under passenger seat)
B107.600 (05047)
(3)
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
0037-6
(4)
Usable
On
Code
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U21
Thru
U26
(5)
U/I
(6)
Qty
Rqr.
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0037
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS CONTINUED
Table 5. Basic Issue Items (BII).
1
2
7
3
6
4
5
(1)
Item
Number
(2)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
(3)
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
1
5120-01-367-3746
2
N/A
SCREWDRIVER, FLAT TIP (in tool box
under passenger seat)
B107.15 (05047)
TECHNICAL MANUAL, OPERATOR’S
(in glove box)
TM 9-2320-273-10
3
5995-01-082-3172
WIRING HARNESS (in tool box under
passenger seat)
MA365-20000 (34623)
4
5120-00-316-9217
5
5120-01-088-2471
6
5120-00-240-5328
WRENCH, SOCKET (in tool box under
passenger seat)
GGG-W-644 (81348)
WRENCH, WHEEL STUD NUT (in tool
box under passenger seat)
41-W-3838-40 (19207)
WRENCH, ADJUSTABLE, 8-in. (in tool
box under passenger seat)
B107.8 (05047)
7
5120-00-264-3796
WRENCH, ADJUSTABLE, 12-in. (in tool
bag under passenger seat)
B107.8 (05047)
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0037-7/8 blank
(4)
Usable
On
Code
U2A
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21,
U22 &
U26
U21
Thru
U26
U2A
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
U2A,
U21
Thru
U26
(5)
U/I
(6)
Qty
Rqr.
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0038
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (AAL)
INTRODUCTION
SCOPE
This work package lists additional items authorized for the support of the M915,
M915A1, M916, M917, M918, M919, and M920.
GENERAL
This list identifies items that do not have to accompany models M915, M915A1,
M916, M917, M918, M919, and M920 and that do not have to be turned in with it.
These items are all authorized to you by CTA, MTOE, TDA, or JTA.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE AAL
Column (1) National Stock Number (NSN). Identifies the stock number of the item to
be used for requisitioning purposes.
Column (2) Description, Part Number/(CAGEC). Identifies the Federal item name (in
all capital letters) followed by a minimum description when needed. The last line
below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity
Code (CAGEC) (in parentheses).
Column (3) Usable On Code. When applicable, gives you a code if the item you need
is not the same for different models of equipment. These codes are identified below:
Code
Used on
U21
Model M915
U2A
Model M915A1
U22
Model M916
U23
Model M917
U24
Model M918
U25
Model M919
U26
Model M920
Column (4) U/I. Unit of Issue (U/I). Indicates the physical measurement or count of the
item as issued per the National Stock Number shown in column (1).
Column (5) Qty Recm. Indicates the quantity recommended.
0038-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
0038
Table 1. Additional Authorization List (AAL).
(1)
National Stock
Number (NSN)
5940-00-549-6583
5940-00-549-6581
5110-00-293-2336
5610-00-491-0307
5510-00-491-0306
2540-00-933-9034
2540-00-933-6935
5340-01-267-2908
4730-00-595-0083
(2)
Description, Part Number/(CAGEC)
ADAPTER, BATTERY TERMINAL
AA-52425-2 (58536)
ADAPTER, BATTERY TERMINAL MS
A-A-524325-1 (58536)
AX: SINGLE-BIT 4-16-HD-WT 36.5 IN. TO 36.5
IN. LG. 6150925 (19207)
BLOCK: WOOD, 4x8x9 in.
CPR103023-2 (34623)
BLOCK: WOOD, 7x8x9 in.
CPR103023-1 (19207)
CHAIN ASSEMBLY: TIRE
A-A-52507-2245 (58536)
CHAIN ASSEMBLY: TIRE
MS500055-23 (96906)
CLEVIS, ROD END 12322662 (19207)
5315-00-539-9174
COUPLING HALF, QUICK DISCONNECT
A52484-1 (58536)
COVER, BATTERY TERMINAL
10942521 (19207)
DECONTAMINATING APPARATUS,
MILD51048 (81349)
HANDLE: MATTOCK-PICK, 36.5 in. to 36.5 in. lg.
5120-00-288-6574 (80244)
HOSE ASSEMBLY, NONMETALLIC
MS39325-9-126-B (96906)
LAMP, INCANDESCENT, 12 V BEACON
A7079B12 (72914)
MATTOCK: PICK-TYPE, 5 LB, W/O HANDLE
5120-00-243-2395 (80244)
PIN, GROOVE, HEADED 10929861 (19207)
5315-00-350-4326
PIN, LOCK 5213744 (19207)
5120-00-293-3336
SHOVEL: HAND RD-PT, D-HDL, SHORT SIZE 2
5120-00-293-3336 (80244)
TOWBAR, MEDIUM DUTY 8383002 (19207)
TOWBAR, MOTOR VEHICLE 8383802 (19207)
composed of: 12322662, 10929861, and 5213744
2920-00-738-6272
4230-00-720-1618
5120-00-288-6574
4720-00-740-9662
6240-00-783-2853
5120-00-243-2395
2540-01-267-2912
2540-00-378-2012
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0038-2
(3)
Usable
On Code
(4)
U/I
(5)
Qty
Recm.
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26
U2A
EA
4
EA
4
EA
1
EA
1
EA
1
PR
2
PR
2
EA
2
EA
1
EA
8
EA
1
EA
7
EA
2
EA
1
EA
1
EA
2
EA
2
EA
1
EA
EA
1
1
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26
U21 thru
U26, U2A
U2A
U21 thru
U26, U2A
TM 9-2320-273-10
0039
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST
INTRODUCTION
SCOPE
This work package lists expendable and durable items that you will need to operate and
maintain the M915, M915A1, M916, M917, M918, M919, and M920. This list is for
information only and is not authority to requisition the listed items. These items are
authorized to you by CTA 50-970, Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class
V Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items), CTA 50-909, Field and Garrison Furnishings and
Equipment or CTA 8-100, Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE EXPENDABLE/DURABLE ITEMS LIST
Column (1) Item Number. This number is assigned to the entry in the list and is
referenced in the narrative instructions to identify the item (e.g., Use Antifreeze
WP 0039, Item 2).
Column (2) Level. This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires
the listed item (C = Crew).
Column (3) National Stock Number (NSN). This is the NSN assigned to the item
which you can use to requisition it.
Column (4) Item Name, Description, Part Number/(CAGEC). This column provides the
other information you need to identify the item. The last line below the description is
the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code (CAGEC)
(in parentheses).
Column (5) U/I. Unit of Issue (U/I) code shows the physical measurement or count of
an item, such as gallon, dozen, gross, etc.
0039-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
(1)
Item
Number
1
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Level
National Stock
Item Name, Description, Part
Number (NSN)
Number/(CAGEC)
C
8040-00-902-3871
8040-00-865-8991
2
C
3
C
6850-01-464-9096
6850-01-464-9125
6850-01-464-9137
6850-01-464-9152
4
C
9150-00-190-0932
9150-00-231-9071
5
C
6
C
9150-01-102-9455
6850-01-474-2318
6850-01-474-2320
6850-01-474-2321
7
C
6850-00-926-2275
8
C
8030-00-251-3980
9
C
7930-00-282-9699
ADHESIVE
MIL-A-46106 (81349)
3 oz
12 oz
ANTIFREEZE, Arctic, type IP,
ethylene glycol, prediluted
(60/40%), recycled engine coolant
A-A-52624 (58536)
55 gal
ANTIFREEZE, GLYCOL,
INHIBITED
A-A-52624 (58536)
1 gal
5 gal
55 gal
BRAKE FLUID, AUTOMOTIVE
J 1703 (81343)
1 pt
1 gal
BRAKE FLUID, AUTOMOTIVE,
Arctic type
MIL-PRF-46176 (81349)
1 gal
CLEANING COMPOUND, Solvent,
type III
MIL-PRF-680 (81349)
1 gal
5 gal
55 gal
CLEANING COMPOUND,
WINDSHIELD
0854-000 (OFTT5)
16 oz
COMPOUND, ANTISEIZE
MIL-PRF-907 (81349)
1 Pound Can
DETERGENT, GENERAL
PURPOSE LIQUID
7930-00-282-9699 (83421)
1 gal
0039-2
0039
(5)
U/I
KT
KT
DR
GL
CO
DR
PT
GL
GL
GL
BX
DR
BX
LB
BX
TM 9-2320-273-10
(1)
Item
Number
10
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List - Continued.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Level
National Stock
Item Name, Description, Part
Number (NSN)
Number/(CAGEC)
C
9150-00-286-5282
9150-00-286-5284
9150-00-286-5285
9150-00-286-5283
11
C
9140-00-286-5287
9140-00-286-5288
9140-00-286-5289
9140-00-286-5286
12
C
9140-00-286-5295
9140-00-286-5296
9140-00-286-5297
9140-00-286-5294
13
C
9150-01-197-7688
9150-01-197-7693
9150-01-197-7690
9150-01-197-7689
9150-01-197-7692
9150-01-197-7691
14
C
9150-00-698-2382
9150-00-657-4959
15
C
16
C
17
C
9150-00-935-9807
6810-01-075-5546
9150-00-189-6727
9150-00-186-6668
9150-00-191-2772
9150-01-496-1962
DIESEL FUEL, ARCTIC
VVF800GRADEDFAAR (81348)
5 gal
55 gal, 16 gauge drum
55 gal, 18 gauge drum
bulk
DIESEL FUEL, DF-1 Regular
ASTM D 975 (81346)
5 gal
55 gal, 16 gauge drum
55 gal, 18 gauge drum
bulk
DIESEL FUEL, DF-2 Regular
ASTM D 975 (81346)
5 gal
55 gal, 16 gauge drum
55 gal, 18 gauge drum
bulk
GREASE, AUTOMOTIVE AND
ARTILLERY
M-10924-A (81349) 2-1/4 oz
M-10924-B (81349) 14 oz
M-10924-C (81349) 1-3/4 lb
M-10924-D (81349) 6-1/2 lb
M-10924-E (81349) 35 lb
M-10924-F (81349) 120 lb
HYDRAULIC FLUID,
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Dexron VI QT (24617) 1 qt
Dexron VI 5GL (24617) 5 gal
HYDRAULIC FLUID,
PETROLEUM BASE,
PRESERVATIVE
AVERX904 (77988)
1 qt
ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL
7618-19-4 (53390)
4 oz
LUBRICATING OIL, ENGINE,
OE/HDO 10
M2104-1-10W (81349) 1 qt
M2104-3-10W (81349) 5 gal
M2104-4-10W (81349) 55 gal
MIL-PRF-2104 (81349) bulk
0039-3
0039
(5)
U/I
CN
DR
DR
GL
CN
DR
DR
GL
CN
DR
DR
GL
TU
CA
CN
CN
CN
DR
QT
CN
QT
BT
QT
CN
DR
GL
TM 9-2320-273-10
(1)
Item
Number
18
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List - Continued.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Level
National Stock
Item Name, Description, Part
Number (NSN)
Number/(CAGEC)
C
9150-00-186-6681
9150-00-188-9858
9150-00-189-6729
9150-00-183-7808
19
C
9150-00-188-9865
20
C
9150-00-186-6699
9150-01-413-6892
9150-01-230-9748
21
C
9150-00-402-4478
9150-00-402-2372
9150-00-491-7197
22
C
23
C
9150-00-234-5197
9150-01-035-5390
9150-01-035-5391
9150-00-257-5440
9150-00-257-5443
24
C
9150-01-035-5393
25
C
7920-00-205-1711
26
C
8030-00-252-3391
LUBRICATING OIL, ENGINE,
OE/HDO 30
M2104-1-30W (81349) 1 qt
M2104-3-30W (81349) 5 gal
M2104-4-30W (81349) 55 gal
M2104-2-30W (81349) bulk
LUBRICATING OIL, ENGINE,
OE/HDO 50
MIL-L-2104 (81349)
5 gal
LUBRICATING OIL, ENGINE,
Multi-viscosity 10W/30 Grade
MIL-L-46152 (81349) 1 qt
J2362 (13873) 5 gal
J2362 (81343) 55 gal
LUBRICATING OIL, ENGINE
OEA ICE, Subzero
MIL-L-46167 (81349) 1 qt
MIL-PRF-46167 (81349) 5 gal
MIL-PRF-46167 (81349) 55 gal
LUBRICATING OIL, EXPOSED
GEAR
VVL751 (81348)
5 lb
LUBRICATING OIL, EXPOSED
GEAR, Subzero GOS
M2105-1-75W (81349) 1 qt
M2105-3-75W (81349) 5 gal
MILL10324 (81349) 5 gal
MILL10324 (81349) 55 gal
LUBRICATING OIL, GEAR
J2360 (81343)
5 gal
RAG, WIPING
7920-00-205-1711 (80244)
50 Pound Bale
SEALING COMPOUND, TYPE 2
MIL-S-45180 (81349)
11 oz
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0039-4
0039
(5)
U/I
QT
CN
DR
GL
CN
QT
CO
DR
QT
CN
DR
CN
QT
CN
CN
DR
CN
BE
TU
TM 9-2320-273-10
INDEX
Subject
WP Sequence No. - Page No.
A
A/C Air Filter Replacement .................................................................................WP 0033-1
Accessories ......................................................................................................... WP 0003-13
Adding Coolant to Partially Empty Cooling System ......................................... WP 0029-6
Additional Authorization List (AAL) .................................................................. WP 0038-1
Air Conditioning .................................................................................................. WP 0013-8
Assembly and Preparation for Use ......................................................................WP 0006-1
B
Basic Driving Guidelines .....................................................................................WP 0010-8
Basic Issue Items (BII) List .................................................................................WP 0037-3
Battery Inspection ................................................................................................ WP 0031-1
C
Capacities ............................................................................................................. WP 0003-5
Chocking Trailer Wheels Before Coupling ......................................................... WP 0012-6
Chocking Trailer Wheels Before Uncoupling ................................................... WP 0012-11
Cleaning Ballistic Glass ....................................................................................... WP 0027-1
Cleaning Vehicle .................................................................................................. WP 0026-1
Cold Weather Starting Below +32° F (0° C) ......................................................WP 0009-1
Companion Seat Adjustment (M915A1) ............................................................. WP 0007-4
Components of End Item (COEI) and Basic Issue Items (BII) Lists ................ WP 0037-1
Controls and Indicators ........................................................................................ WP 0005-1
Cooling System Service .......................................................................................WP 0029-1
Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) ........................................................... WP 0001-2
Coupling and Connecting Tractor to Trailer ....................................................... WP 0012-8
Crew Protection Kit Function ..............................................................................WP 0004-6
D
Decals and Instruction Plates ...............................................................................WP 0014-1
Description and Use of Operator Controls and Indicators ................................. WP 0005-1
Destruction of Army Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use ....................................... WP 0001-3
Difference Between Models .................................................................................WP 0003-1
Dimensions ........................................................................................................... WP 0003-4
Draining Cooling System .....................................................................................WP 0029-2
Driveline Chassis and Cab ...................................................................................WP 0003-7
Driver Seat Adjustment ........................................................................................WP 0007-2
Driving Guidelines for Vehicles Equipped with Crew Protection Kit ............. WP 0010-12
INDEX-1
TM 9-2320-273-10
INDEX - CONTINUED
Subject
WP Sequence No. - Page No.
E
Efficient and Economical Driving Techniques (M915 through M920) ............ WP 0010-16
Efficient and Economical Driving Techniques (M915A1) ................................WP 0010-20
Engaging Power Take-Off (PTO) for Winch Operation
(M916 and M920) .....................................................................................WP 0012-18
Engine and Transmission Function ..................................................................... WP 0004-4
Equipment Characteristics, Capabilities, and Features ....................................... WP 0002-1
Equipment Description .........................................................................................WP 0002-1
Equipment Data ....................................................................................................WP 0003-1
Escape Hatch ........................................................................................................ WP 0013-9
Expendable and Durable Items List .................................................................... WP 0039-1
Extreme Cold Conditions .....................................................................................WP 0016-1
Extreme Hot Conditions ...................................................................................... WP 0017-1
F
Fan Clutch Lockup Procedure (M915 through M920) ....................................... WP 0032-1
Field Manuals .......................................................................................................WP 0036-1
Fifth Wheel Operation and Coupling and Uncoupling Trailers ......................... WP 0012-1
Filling Empty Cooling System ............................................................................ WP 0029-4
Filling Fuel Tank .................................................................................................. WP 0028-1
Fluid Leakage .......................................................................................................WP 0024-3
Fording Operation ................................................................................................ WP 0019-1
Forms .................................................................................................................... WP 0036-1
Forward-Rear or Rear-Rear Axle Jack Placement ............................................ WP 0030-16
Front Axle Jack Placement ................................................................................ WP 0030-15
Fuel System Function .......................................................................................... WP 0004-6
G
General Cleaning ..................................................................................................WP 0026-1
General Information ............................................................................................. WP 0001-1
H
How to Use This Manual ................................................................................................... x
I
Initial Adjustment, Before Use, and Self-Test .................................................... WP 0006-2
Installing Spare Wheel and Tire on Carrier ........................................................ WP 0030-8
INDEX-2
TM 9-2320-273-10
INDEX - CONTINUED
Subject
WP Sequence No. - Page No.
L
List of Abbreviations/Acronyms ..........................................................................WP 0001-5
List of Effective Pages/Work Packages ............................................................................. A
Localized Lubrication Points ............................................................................... WP 0035-9
Location and Description of Major Components ............................................... WP 0002-4
Lubricants ............................................................................................................. WP 0035-4
Lubrication Instructions ....................................................................................... WP 0035-1
Lubrication Locations .......................................................................................... WP 0035-6
M
Maintenance Forms, Records, and Reports .........................................................WP 0001-2
Maintenance Under Unusual Conditions .............................................................WP 0034-1
Military Load Classification (MLC) .................................................................. WP 0003-14
Military Symbols for Lubricants and Intervals ................................................... WP 0035-3
Miscellaneous Publications .................................................................................. WP 0036-2
Model Number and Equipment Name ................................................................ WP 0001-1
Mud Flap Stowage ............................................................................................. WP 0012-15
N
NATO Slave Receptacle ...................................................................................... WP 0013-7
Nomenclature Cross Reference List .................................................................... WP 0001-4
Normal Shutdown of Winch PTO (M916 and M920) ......................................WP 0012-22
O
Operating Auxiliary Equipment ........................................................................... WP 0013-1
Operating Hydraulic Jack .................................................................................. WP 0030-14
Operating Inter-Axle Differential Lockup ......................................................... WP 0010-26
Operating Procedures ........................................................................................... WP 0006-2
Operating Pusher Axle (M917, M919, and M920) ...........................................WP 0010-27
Operating Trailer Brake Hand Control .............................................................. WP 0010-26
Operating Winch (M916 and M920) ................................................................. WP 0012-20
Operating Winch at Temperatures Below -25° F (-32° C)
(M916 and M920) .....................................................................................WP 0012-18
Operation Under Unusual Conditions ................................................................. WP 0015-1
Operation Under Usual Conditions ..................................................................... WP 0006-1
Optimum Use of Tachograph .............................................................................WP 0010-14
INDEX-3
TM 9-2320-273-10
INDEX - CONTINUED
Subject
WP Sequence No. - Page No.
P
Performance ..........................................................................................................WP 0003-6
Placing Vehicle in Motion ................................................................................... WP 0010-1
Pintle Towing ..................................................................................................... WP 0012-14
Portable Fire Extinguisher ................................................................................... WP 0013-6
Power Train Function ...........................................................................................WP 0004-2
Preparation for Loading Light and Medium Equipment Trailers
(M916 and M920) .....................................................................................WP 0012-16
Preparation for Movement ................................................................................... WP 0006-3
Preparation for Storage or Shipment ...................................................................WP 0001-4
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) ..................................... WP 0025-1
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) Introduction ................ WP 0024-1
R
References ............................................................................................................ WP 0036-1
Removing Spare Wheel and Tire from Tire Carrier ........................................... WP 0030-4
Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations (EIR) ...........................WP 0001-2
S
Seat and Seatbelt Operation .................................................................................WP 0007-1
Securing Winch Wire Rope (M916 and M920) ................................................ WP 0012-22
Spring Brake Power Springs Operation .............................................................. WP 0020-1
Starting Engine Above +32° F (0° C) .................................................................WP 0008-1
Starting Out on Grade (M915 through M920) ..................................................WP 0010-13
Stopping, Shutting Down Engine, and Parking Vehicle ..................................... WP 0011-1
T
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................ ii
Technical Manuals ............................................................................................... WP 0036-1
Theory of Operation .............................................................................................WP 0004-1
Tie Downs and Lifting Shackles ......................................................................... WP 0013-2
Tire Inflation .........................................................................................................WP 0030-2
Towing Pintle ....................................................................................................... WP 0013-1
Towing Vehicle .....................................................................................................WP 0021-1
Troubleshooting Master Index ............................................................................. WP 0022-1
Troubleshooting Procedures .................................................................................WP 0023-1
INDEX-4
TM 9-2320-273-10
INDEX - CONTINUED
Subject
WP Sequence No. - Page No.
U
Uncoupling and Disconnecting Tractor from Trailer ........................................ WP 0012-12
Unusual Terrain Operation ...................................................................................WP 0018-1
Use of Seatbelts ................................................................................................... WP 0007-5
Use of Transmission Gear Ranges (M915A1) .................................................... WP 0010-6
Use of Tow Bar .................................................................................................... WP 0021-2
W
Warning Summary ...............................................................................................................a
Weights ................................................................................................................. WP 0003-2
Wheel and Tire Replacement .............................................................................WP 0030-12
Wheel and Tire Service ....................................................................................... WP 0030-1
Winch Controls (M916 and M920) ................................................................... WP 0012-17
INDEX-5/6 blank
Date you filled out
this form.
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
TM Number
Your mailing address
Date of the TM
Title of the TM
SAMPLE
Your Name
Your Phone Number
Your Signature
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
SAMPLE
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
TM 9-2320-273-10
14 DEC 2012
Operator’s Manual for M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917,
M917P1, M918, M919, M920, AND M920P1
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
TM 9-2320-273-10
14 DEC 2012
Operator’s Manual for M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917
M917P1, M918, M919, M920 & M920P1
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
TM 9-2320-273-10
14 DEC 2012
Operator’s Manual for M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917,
M917P1, M918, M919, M920, AND M920P1
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
TM 9-2320-273-10
14 DEC 2012
Operator’s Manual for M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917
M917P1, M918, M919, M920 & M920P1
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
TM 9-2320-273-10
14 DEC 2012
Operator’s Manual for M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917,
M917P1, M918, M919, M920, AND M920P1
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
TM 9-2320-273-10
14 DEC 2012
Operator’s Manual for M915, M915A1,
M915P1, M915A1P1, M916, M916P1,M917
M917P1, M918, M919, M920 & M920P1
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
RAYMOND T. ODIERNO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW
Administrative Assistant to
the Secretary of the Army
1230506
0001802
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number (IDN) 380297,
requirements for TM 9-2320-273-10.
THE METRIC SYSTEM AND EQUIVALENTS
LINEAR MEASURE
SQUARE MEASURE
1 Centimeter = 10 Millimeters = 0.01 Meter = 0.3937 Inch
1 Decimeter = 10 Centimeters = 3.94 Inches
1 Meter =10 Decimeters = 100 Centimeters
= 1000 Millimeters = 39.37 Inches
1 Dekameter = 10 Meters = 32.8 Feet
1 Hectometer =10 Dekameters = 328.08 Feet
1 Kilometer =10 Hectometers = 1000 Meters
= 0.621 Mile = 3,280.8 Feet
Millimeters = Inches times 25.4
Inches = Millimeters divided by 25.4
1 Sq Centimeter = 100 Sq Millimeters = 0.155 Sq Inch
1 Sq Decimeter = 100 Sq Centimeters = 15.5 Sq Inches
1 Sq Meter (Centare) = 10 Sq Decimeters
= 10,000 Sq Centimeters = 10.764 Sq Feet
1 Sq Dekameter (Are) = 100 Sq Meters = 1,076.4 Sq Feet
1 Sq Hectometer (Hectare) = 100 Sq Dekameters
= 2.471 Acres
1 Sq Kilometer = 100 Sq Hectometers
= 1,000,000 Sq Meters = 0.386 Sq Mile
WEIGHTS
CUBIC MEASURE
1 Centigram = 10 Milligrams = 0.154 Grain
1 Decigram = 10 Centigrams = 1.543 Grains
1 Gram = 0.001 Kilogram = 10 Decigrams
=1000 Milligrams = 0.035 Ounce
1 Dekagram = 10 Grams = 0.353 Ounce
1 Hectogram = 10 Dekagrams = 3.527 Ounces
1 Kilogram = 10 Hectograms = 1000 Grams
= 2.205 Pounds
1 Quintal = 100 Kilograms = 220.46 Pounds
1 Metric Ton = 10 Quintals = 1000 Kilograms
= 1.1 Short Tons
1 Cu Centimeter = 1000 Cu Millimeters = 0.061 Cu Inch
1 Cu Decimeter = 1000 Cu Centimeters = 61.02 Cu Inches
1 Cu Meter = 1000 Cu Decimeters
= 1,000,000 Cu Centimeters= 35.31 Cu Feet
LIQUID MEASURE
1 Milliliter = 0.001 Liter = 0.034 Fluid Ounce
1 Centiliter = 10 Milliliters = 0.34 Fluid Ounce
1 Deciliter = 10 Centiliters = 3.38 Fluid Ounces
1 Liter = 10 Deciliters = 1000 Milliliters
= 33.82 Fluid Ounces
1 Dekaliter = 10 Liters = 2.64 Gallons
1 Hectoliter = 10 Dekaliters = 26.42 Gallons
1 Kiloliter = 10 Hectoliters = 264.18 Gallons
TEMPERATURE
5/9 ( F - 32 ) = C
(9/5 x C) + 32 = F
-35 Fahrenheit is equivalent to -37 Celsius
0 Fahrenheit is equivalent to -18 Celsius
32 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 0 Celsius
90 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 32.2 Celsius
100 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 38 Celsius
212 Fahrenheit is equivalent to 100 Celsius
APPROXIMATE CONVERSION FACTORS
TO CHANGE
TO
MULTIPLY BY
Inches ..........................
Feet ..............................
Yards ...........................
Miles ............................
Square Inches .............
Square Feet .................
Square Yards...............
Square Miles ...............
Acres ............................
Cubic Feet ...................
Cubic Yards .................
Fluid Ounces ...............
Pints ............................
Quarts..........................
Gallons ........................
Ounces .........................
Pounds .........................
Short Tons ...................
Pound-Feet ..................
Pounds-Inches .............
Pounds per Square Inch..
Ounce-Inches...............
Miles per Gallon ..........
Miles per Hour ............
Centimeters ........................ 2.540
Meters ................................. 0.305
Meters ................................. 0.914
Kilometers .......................... 1.609
Square Centimeters ........... 6.451
Square Meters .................... 0.093
Square Meters .................... 0.836
Square Kilometers ............. 2.590
Square Hectometers .......... 0.405
Cubic Meters ...................... 0.028
Cubic Meters ...................... 0.765
Milliliters.......................... 29.573
Liters .................................. 0.473
Liters .................................. 0.946
Liters .................................. 3.785
Grams ............................... 28.349
Kilograms ........................... 0.454
Metric Tons ........................ 0.907
Newton-Meters ................... 1.356
Newton-Meters ............... 0.11375
Kilopascals ......................... 6.895
Newton-Meters ............. 0.007062
Kilometers per Liter .......... 0.425
Kilometers per Hour .......... 1.609
TO CHANGE
TO
MULTIPLY BY
Centimeters .................
Meters ..........................
Meters ..........................
Kilometers ...................
Square Centimeters ....
Square Meters .............
Square Meters .............
Square Kilometers ......
Square Hectometers ....
Cubic Meters ...............
Cubic Meters ...............
Milliliters .....................
Liters ...........................
Liters ...........................
Liters ...........................
Grams ..........................
Kilograms ....................
Metric Tons .................
Newton-Meters ............
Kilopascals ..................
Kilometers per Liter ...
Kilometers per Hour ...
Fahrenheit .................
Celsius ........................
Inches.................................. 0.394
Feet ..................................... 3.280
Yards ................................... 1.094
Miles ................................... 0.621
Square Inches ..................... 0.155
Square Feet ...................... 10.764
Square Yards ...................... 1.196
Square Miles....................... 0.386
Acres ................................... 2.471
Cubic Feet......................... 35.315
Cubic Yards ........................ 1.308
Fluid Ounces ...................... 0.034
Pints .................................... 2.113
Quarts ................................. 1.057
Gallons ................................ 0.264
Ounces ................................ 0.035
Pounds ................................ 2.205
Short Tons .......................... 1.102
Pound-Feet ......................... 0.738
Pounds per Square Inch..... 0.145
Miles per Gallon ................. 2.354
Miles per Hour ................... 0.621
Celsius .............. C = ( F-32)x5/9
Fahrenheit ...... F = (9/5x C)+32
PIN 045568-000
Download PDF
Similar pages